440 Siemens Inverter

MICROMASTER 440
0.12 kW - 250 kW
Operating Instructions Issue 07/05
User Documentation 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 440 Documentation

Getting Started Guide Is for quick commissioning with SDP and BOP.
Operating Instructions Gives information about features of the MICROMASTER 440, Installation, Commissioning, Control modes, System Parameter structure, Troubleshooting, Specifications and available options of the MICROMASTER 440.
Parameter List The Parameter List contains the description of all Parameters structured in functional order and a detailed description. The Parameter list also includes a series of function plans.
Catalogues In the catalogue you will find all the necessary information to select an appropriate inverter, as well as filters, chokes, operator panels and communication options.
Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A B C D E F G
Installation
Functions
MICROMASTER 440
0.12 kW - 250 kW
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Operating Instructions User Documentation
Options
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility Appendices
Valid for Inverter Type MICROMASTER 440 0.12 kW - 250 kW
Issue 07/05 Software Version 2.0
Index
Issue 07/05
Further information can be obtained from Internet website: http://www.siemens.de/micromaster Approved Siemens Quality for Software and Training is to DIN ISO 9001, Reg. No. 2160-01 The reproduction, transmission or use of this document, or its contents is not permitted unless authorized in writing. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved. Siemens AG 2001 - 2005. All Rights Reserved. MICROMASTER is a registered trademark of Siemens Other functions not described in this document may be available. However, this fact shall not constitute an obligation to supply such functions with a new control, or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. There may be discrepancies nevertheless, and no guarantee can be given that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement. Siemens handbooks are printed on chlorine-free paper that has been produced from managed sustainable forests. No solvents have been used in the printing or binding process. Document subject to change without prior notice. Order number: 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft
MICROMASTER 440
Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0
Issue 07/05
Foreword
Foreword
User Documentation
WARNING Before installing and commissioning the inverter, you must read all safety instructions and warnings carefully including all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels.
Information is also available from: Regional Contacts

Please get in touch with your contact for Technical Support in your Region for questions about services, prices and conditions of Technical Support.
Central Technical Support

The competent consulting service for technical issues with a broad range of requirements-based services around our products and systems. Europe / Africa Tel: +49 (0) 180 5050 222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223 Email: adsupport@siemens.com America Tel: +1 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 423 262 2589 Email: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com Asia / Pazific Tel: +86 1064 757 575 Fax: +86 1064 747 474 Email: adsupport.asia@siemens.com
Online Service & Support

The comprehensive, generally available information system over the Internet, from product support to service & support to the support tools in the shop. http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Contact address
Should any questions or problems arise while reading this manual, please contact the Siemens office concerned using the form provided at the back this manual.
MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0
Definitions and Warnings
Issue 07/05
Definitions and Warnings

DANGER indicates an immanently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in a property damage. NOTICE indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state. NOTE For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important information relating to the product or highlights part of the documentation for special attention. Qualified personnel For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications: 1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 3. Trained in rendering first aid.
PE
= Ground
PE Protective Earth uses circuit protective conductors sized for short circuits where the voltage will not rise in excess of 50 Volts. This connection is normally used to ground the inverter. - Is the ground connection where the reference voltage can be the same as the Earth voltage. This connection is normally used to ground the motor.
Use for intended purpose only

The equipment may be used only for the application stated in the manual and only in conjunction with devices and components recommended and authorized by Siemens.
MICROMASTER 440
Issue 07/05
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions
The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are provided for your safety and as a means of preventing damage to the product or components in the machines connected. This section lists Warnings, Cautions and Notes, which apply generally when handling MICROMASTER 440 Inverters, classified as General, Transport & Storage, Commissioning, Operation, Repair and Dismantling & Disposal. Specific Warnings, Cautions and Notes that apply to particular activities are listed at the beginning of the relevant chapters and are repeated or supplemented at critical points throughout these sections. Please read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal safety and will also help prolong the service life of your MICROMASTER 440 Inverter and the equipment you connect to it.
General
WARNING This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating mechanical parts. Non-compliance with Warnings or failure to follow the instructions contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage to property. Only suitable qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only after becoming familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and maintenance procedures contained in this manual. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon its proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance. Risk of electric shock. The DC link capacitors remain charged for five minutes after power has been removed. It is not permissible to open the equipment until 5 minutes after the power has been removed. The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: the power supply L/L1, N/L2, L3 resp. U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 the motor terminals U, V, W resp. U2, V2, W2 and depending on the frame size the terminals DC+/B+, DC-, B-, DC/R+ resp. DCPS, DCNS, DCPA, DCNA HP ratings are based on the Siemens 1LA motors and are given for guidance only; they do not necessarily comply with UL or NEMA HP ratings. CAUTION Children and the general public must be prevented from accessing or approaching the equipment! This equipment may only be used for the purpose specified by the manufacturer. Unauthorized modifications and the use of spare parts and accessories that are not sold or recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment can cause fires, electric shocks and injuries.
Safety Instructions
Issue 07/05
NOTICE Keep these operating instructions within easy reach of the equipment and make them available to all users Whenever measuring or testing has to be performed on live equipment, the regulations of Safety Code BGV A2 must be observed, in particular 8 Permissible Deviations when Working on Live Parts. Suitable electronic tools should be used. Before installing and commissioning, please read these safety instructions and warnings carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels.
Transport & Storage

WARNING Correct transport, storage, erection and mounting, as well as careful operation and maintenance are essential for proper and safe operation of the equipment. CAUTION Protect the inverter against physical shocks and vibration during transport and storage. Also be sure to protect it against water (rainfall) and excessive temperatures (see Table 4-1).
Commissioning
WARNING Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material. Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation, commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the device/system. Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards). Only type B ELCBs should be used with FSA to FSF. Machines with a threephase power supply, fitted with EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker - see DIN VDE 0160, section 5.5.2 and EN50178 section 5.2.11.1). The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: the power supply L/L1, N/L2, L3 resp. U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 the motor terminals U, V, W resp. U2, V2, W2 and depending on the frame size the terminals DC+/B+, DC-, B-, DC/R+ resp. DCPS, DCNS, DCPA, DCNA This equipment must not be used as an emergency stop mechanism (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4) CAUTION The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried out as shown in Fig. 2-11 on page 43, to prevent inductive and capacitive interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
MICROMASTER 440
Issue 07/05
Safety Instructions
Operation
WARNING MICROMASTERS operate at high voltages. When operating electrical devices, it is impossible to avoid applying hazardous voltages to certain parts of the equipment. Emergency Stop facilities according to EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the control equipment. Any disengagement of the Emergency Stop facility must not lead to uncontrolled or undefined restart. Certain parameter settings may cause the inverter to restart automatically after an input power failure (e.g. automatic restart). Wherever faults occurring in the control equipment can lead to substantial material damage or even grievous bodily injury (i.e. potentially dangerous faults), additional external precautions must be taken or facilities provided to ensure or enforce safe operation, even when a fault occurs (e.g. independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks, etc.). Motor parameters must be accurately configured for motor overload protection to operate correctly. This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection in accordance with UL508C section 42. Refer to P0610 and P0335, i2t is ON by default. Motor overload protection can also be provided using an external PTC (disabled by default P0601). This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V / 460 V / 575 V when protected by a H or K type fuse (see Tables 5-5). This equipment must not be used as an emergency stop mechanism (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4)
Repair
WARNING Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by repair centers authorized by Siemens or by authorized personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual. Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant spare parts list. Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access
Dismantling & Disposal

CAUTION The inverters packaging is re-usable. Retain the packaging for future use. Easy-to-release screw and snap connectors allow you to break the unit down into its component parts. You can then re-cycle these component parts, dispose of them in accordance with local requirements or return them to the manufacturer.
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
Issue 07/05
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

The device contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if not carefully handled. Before opening the cabinet/enclosure in which the device is located, you must electrically discharge your body and apply the appropriate ESDS protective measures. The cabinet/enclosure should be appropriately labeled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please observe the following: Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary. The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an electronic board. Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g. plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers. Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces. Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal containers). If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or household aluminium foil. The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the following diagram: a = Conductive floor surface b = ESD table c = ESD shoes d = ESD overall e = ESD chain f = Cubicle ground connection
b e
b e
f a c
f c a
f c a
Sitting
Standing
Standing / Sitting
MICROMASTER 440
10
Issue 07/05
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 Overview ................................................................................................................ 17 The MICROMASTER 440....................................................................................... 18 Features.................................................................................................................. 19 Installation ............................................................................................................. 21 Installation after a Period of Storage ...................................................................... 23 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 24 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 26 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 33 Functions............................................................................................................... 45 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 49 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 68 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 72 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 73 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 75 Inputs / outputs ..................................................................................................... 133 Communications ................................................................................................... 142 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 164 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 167 JOG....................................................................................................................... 169 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 170 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 178 Free function blocks (FFB) ................................................................................... 188 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 193 Electronic brakes .................................................................................................. 199 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 208 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 210 Closed-loop Vdc control........................................................................................ 212 Positioning down ramp ......................................................................................... 216 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 218 Thermal motor protection and overload responses .............................................. 224 Power module protection ...................................................................................... 229 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 232
11
Table of Contents
Issue 07/05
4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 5 6 6.1 6.2 7 7.1
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 255 Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 256 Troubleshooting with the BOP .............................................................................. 257 Fault messages..................................................................................................... 258 Alarm Messages ................................................................................................... 258 MICROMASTER 440 specifications................................................................... 259 Options ................................................................................................................ 271 Inverter-independent options ................................................................................ 271 Inverter-dependent options................................................................................... 271 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) .............................................................. 273 Electro-magnetic compatibility .............................................................................. 274
Appendices .............................................................................................................................. 279 A B B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 C D D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6 E E.1 E.2 E.3 E.4 E.5 E.6 F G Index Changing the Operator Panel ............................................................................ 279 Removing Front Covers ..................................................................................... 280 Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes A .............................................................. 280 Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes B and C ................................................... 281 Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes D and E ................................................... 282 Removing Front Covers. Frame Size F ................................................................ 283 Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes FX and GX.............................................. 284 Removing the I/O Board..................................................................................... 285 Removing Y Cap ............................................................................................... 286 Removing Y Cap. Frame Size A ......................................................................... 286 Removing Y Cap. Frame Sizes B and C............................................................. 287 Removing Y Cap. Frame Sizes D and E............................................................. 288 Removing Y Cap. Frame Size F ......................................................................... 289 Removing Y Cap. Frame Size FX ....................................................................... 290 Removing Y Cap. Frame Size GX ...................................................................... 291 Removing fan ...................................................................................................... 292 Removing fan. Frame Size A................................................................................ 292 Removing fan. Frame Sizes B and C ................................................................... 293 Removing fan. Frame Size D and E ..................................................................... 294 Removing fan. Frame Size F ................................................................................ 295 Removing fan. Frame Size F with filter................................................................. 296 Removing fan. Frame Sizes FX and GX .............................................................. 297 Standards ............................................................................................................ 298 List of Abbreviations .......................................................................................... 299 .............................................................................................................................. 302
MICROMASTER 440
12
Issue 07/05
Table of Contents
List of Illustrations
Fig. 2-1 Fig. 2-2 Fig. 2-3 Fig. 2-4 Fig. 2-5 Fig. 2-6 Fig. 2-7 Fig. 2-8 Fig. 2-9 Fig. 2-10 Fig. 2-11 Fig. 2-12 Fig. 2-13 Fig. 2-14 Fig. 3-1 Fig. 3-2 Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-4 Fig. 3-5 Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-7 Fig. 3-8 Fig. 3-9 Fig. 3-10 Fig. 3-11 Fig. 3-12 Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-16 Fig. 3-17 Fig. 3-18 Fig. 3-19 Fig. 3-20 Fig. 3-21 Fig. 3-22 Fig. 3-23 Fig. 3-24 Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-26 Fig. 3-27 Fig. 3-28 Fig. 3-29 Fig. 3-30 Fig. 3-31 Forming ................................................................................................................................ 23 Ambient operating temperature ............................................................................................ 24 Installation altitude................................................................................................................ 24 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 440 ................................................................................... 27 Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size FX ......................................... 28 Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size GX ........................................ 29 Options for the electronic box............................................................................................... 32 MICROMASTER 440 Connection Terminals........................................................................ 36 MICROMASTER 440 connection drawing frame size FX.................................................. 37 MICROMASTER 440 connection drawing - frame size GX .................................................. 38 Motor and Power Connections ............................................................................................. 39 Adaptation of fan voltage...................................................................................................... 40 Control terminals of MICROMASTER 440............................................................................ 41 Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI ................................................................. 43 Parameter types ................................................................................................................... 49 Header line for parameter P0305 ......................................................................................... 53 Parameter grouping / access................................................................................................ 54 Binectors .............................................................................................................................. 58 Connectors ........................................................................................................................... 59 BICO connections (examples).............................................................................................. 60 Example: Changeover from motor 1 to motor 2.................................................................... 61 Example: Changing-over between the control and setpoint (frequency) source................... 61 Copying from CDS ............................................................................................................... 63 Changing-over CDS ............................................................................................................. 63 Copying from DDS ............................................................................................................... 64 Changing-over DDS ............................................................................................................. 65 Normalization / de-normalization .......................................................................................... 67 Operator panels.................................................................................................................... 68 Operator panel keys ............................................................................................................. 70 Changing parameters using the BOP ................................................................................... 71 MICROMASTER 440 block diagram ................................................................................. 72 Status Display Panel (SDP).................................................................................................. 73 Recommended wiring for the factory setting ........................................................................ 74 Procedure when commissioning........................................................................................... 75 DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz...................................................................... 77 Mode of operation of the DIP50/60 switch in conjunction with P0100 .................................. 77 Motor terminal box................................................................................................................ 78 Star / delta circuit configurations .......................................................................................... 79 V/f characteristic ................................................................................................................... 80 Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD) ......................................................................................... 89 Magnetizing characteristic .................................................................................................... 90 Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools..................................................................... 130 Digital inputs....................................................................................................................... 133 Digital outputs..................................................................................................................... 136 DIP switch and P0756 for ADC current / voltage input ....................................................... 138
13
Table of Contents
Issue 07/05
Fig. 3-32 Fig. 3-33 Fig. 3-34 Fig. 3-35 Fig. 3-36 Fig. 3-37 Fig. 3-38 Fig. 3-39 Fig. 3-40 Fig. 3-41 Fig. 3-42 Fig. 3-43 Fig. 3-44 Fig. 3-45 Fig. 3-46 Fig. 3-47 Fig. 3-48 Fig. 3-49 Fig. 3-50 Fig. 3-51 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-53 Fig. 3-54 Fig. 3-55 Fig. 3-56 Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-58 Fig. 3-59 Fig. 3-60 Fig. 3-61 Fig. 3-62 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-64 Fig. 3-65 Fig. 3-66 Fig. 3-67 Fig. 3-68 Fig. 3-69 Fig. 3-70 Fig. 3-71 Fig. 3-72 Fig. 3-73 Fig. 3-74 Fig. 3-75 Fig. 3-76 Fig. 3-77
Connection example for ADC voltage / current input.......................................................... 139 ADC channel ...................................................................................................................... 139 Signal output through the D/A converter channel ............................................................... 140 D/A converter channel ........................................................................................................ 140 Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link ................................................. 142 Cycle times......................................................................................................................... 145 Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer (master).............. 146 Telegram structure ............................................................................................................. 147 Assignment of the address byte (ADR) .............................................................................. 148 Circulating list (Example of configuration) .......................................................................... 149 Cycle time........................................................................................................................... 149 Transmit sequence ............................................................................................................. 150 USS bus topology............................................................................................................... 151 Telegram structure ............................................................................................................. 153 Structure of the PKW and PZD areas................................................................................. 153 Connecting the USS bus cable........................................................................................... 162 Connecting the RS485 terminator ...................................................................................... 163 Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2.......................................... 165 Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded method .... 166 Motorized potentiometer..................................................................................................... 167 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise ....................................................................... 169 Structure of the technology controller ................................................................................. 171 Structure of the technological controller (PID controller) .................................................... 172 PID controller...................................................................................................................... 173 Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via DIN1.............. 175 PID dancer roll control ........................................................................................................ 176 Structure of the closed-loop PID-dancer roll control ........................................................... 177 Setpoint channel................................................................................................................. 178 Summation ......................................................................................................................... 179 Modifying the frequency setpoint ........................................................................................ 179 Ramp-function generator.................................................................................................... 180 Rounding off after an OFF1 command ............................................................................... 181 OFF1 .................................................................................................................................. 183 OFF2 .................................................................................................................................. 184 OFF3 .................................................................................................................................. 185 Changing-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 .......................................... 186 Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1 ................................................................................. 193 Motor holding brake after OFF2 ......................................................................................... 194 Direct motor holding brake connection ............................................................................... 197 Indirect motor holding brake connection............................................................................. 198 Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes.......................................................................... 199 DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3 ........................................................................................... 200 DC braking after external selection .................................................................................... 201 Compound braking ............................................................................................................. 202 Connecting the chopper (braking) resistor.......................................................................... 204 Mode of operation of the dynamic braking.......................................................................... 204
MICROMASTER 440
14
Issue 07/05
Table of Contents
Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-79 Fig. 3-80 Fig. 3-81 Fig. 3-82 Fig. 3-83 Fig. 3-84 Fig. 3-85 Fig. 3-86 Fig. 3-87 Fig. 3-88 Fig. 3-89 Fig. 3-90 Fig. 3-91 Fig. 3-92 Fig. 3-93 Fig. 3-94 Fig. 3-95 Fig. 3-96 Fig. 3-97 Fig. 3-98 Fig. 3-99 Fig. 3-100 Fig. 3-101 Fig. 3-102 Fig. 3-103 Fig. 3-104 Fig. 3-105 Fig. 3-106 Fig. 3-107 Fig. 3-108 Fig. 3-109
Load duty cycle chopper resistors (MICROMASTER Catalog DA51.2)........................... 205 Increasing the level of braking energy which can be absorbed .......................................... 206 Chopper load duty cycle ..................................................................................................... 206 Automatic restarts .............................................................................................................. 208 Flying restart....................................................................................................................... 211 Vdc_max controller............................................................................................................. 213 Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)................................................................................. 215 Positioning down ramp ....................................................................................................... 216 Rotary or linear axis............................................................................................................ 217 Shaft drive with flat belts..................................................................................................... 220 Load torque monitoring (P2181 = 1)................................................................................... 220 Frequency/torque tolerance bandwidth .............................................................................. 221 Load torque characteristic with minimum permissible load................................................. 222 Load torque characteristic with maximum permissible load................................................ 222 Load torque characteristic with minimum and maximum permissible load ......................... 223 Thermal motor protection ................................................................................................... 225 Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER....................................................... 227 PTC characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors ........................................................................... 228 KTY84 characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors ........................................................................ 228 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from a drive inverter233 Slip compensation .............................................................................................................. 236 Effect of V/f resonance damping ........................................................................................ 237 Imax controller.................................................................................................................... 239 Current Vector diagram in a steady-state condition............................................................ 240 Changeover condition for SLVC ......................................................................................... 242 Starting and passing-through 0 Hz in closed-loop controlled operation.............................. 243 P0400 and DIP switch on the pulse encoder module ......................................................... 244 Speed controller ................................................................................................................. 245 Speed controller with pre-control........................................................................................ 247 Speed controller with droop................................................................................................ 249 Closed-loop speed/torque control....................................................................................... 250 Torque limits....................................................................................................................... 252
List of Tables
Table 2-1 Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-11 Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 440............................................................... 30 Parameter attributes ............................................................................................................. 50 Parameter P0700 ................................................................................................................. 55 Parameter P1000 ................................................................................................................. 56 Parameter P0719 ................................................................................................................. 57 Normalized interfaces........................................................................................................... 66 Normalization functions ........................................................................................................ 66 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 73 Example 1LA7060-4AB10 .................................................................................................... 80 Possible settings for parameter P0340................................................................................. 86 Calculated parameters ......................................................................................................... 87 Parameters P0701 P0706 ............................................................................................... 134
15
Table of Contents
Issue 07/05
Table 3-12 Table 3-13 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Table 3-16 Table 3-17 Table 3-18 Table 3-19 Table 3-20 Table 3-21 Table 3-22 Table 3-23 Table 3-24 Table 3-25 Table 3-26 Table 3-27 Table 3-28 Table 3-29 Table 3-30 Table 3-31 Table 3-32 Table 3-33 Table 3-34 Table 3-35 Table 3-36 Table 3-37 Table 3-38 Table 3-39 Table 3-40 Table 4-1 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Table 5-5 Table 7-1 Table 7-2 Table 7-3 Table 7-4 Table 7-5
Parameters P0731 P0733 (frequently used functions / states)........................................ 136 BOP link ............................................................................................................................. 143 COM link............................................................................................................................. 143 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates ................................................................... 149 Structural data .................................................................................................................... 151 Thermal and electrical characteristics ................................................................................ 152 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate....................... 152 Task IDs (master -> drive converter) .................................................................................. 155 Response ID (converter -> master) .................................................................................... 157 Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed" .................................... 158 Example for direct coding via digital inputs......................................................................... 164 Example for binary coding via digital inputs........................................................................ 165 Mode of operation of the MOP ........................................................................................... 168 Selecting the motorized potentiometer ............................................................................... 168 Correspondence between the parameters ......................................................................... 174 Important parameters for the PID dancer roll control.......................................................... 177 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator ................................................................... 182 Examples for settings of parameter P0810......................................................................... 187 Possible settings for parameters P0700 and P1000........................................................... 187 Free function blocks ........................................................................................................... 188 FFB priority table ................................................................................................................ 191 Settings for parameter P1200............................................................................................. 210 DC link undervoltage shutdown threshold ....................................................................... 216 Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 219 Thermal classes ................................................................................................................. 225 General protection of the power components..................................................................... 229 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300) .................................................................................. 233 Voltage boost ..................................................................................................................... 235 Vector control versions ....................................................................................................... 241 Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP ....................................................... 256 MICROMASTER 440 Performance Ratings ....................................................................... 260 Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals ............. 262 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency............................................................... 263 Data for braking resistors ................................................................................................... 263 MICROMASTER 440 Specifications .................................................................................. 264 Permissible harmonic current emissions ............................................................................ 275 Class 1 - General Industrial ................................................................................................ 276 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial................................................................................................. 276 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential. Commercial and Light Industry ...................................... 277 Compliance Table .............................................................................................................. 278
MICROMASTER 440
16
Issue 07/05
1 Overview
Overview
A summary of the major features of the MICROMASTER 440 range.
This Chapter contains:

1.1 1.2 The MICROMASTER 440....................................................................................... 18 Features.................................................................................................................. 19
17
1 Overview
Issue 07/05
1.1
The MICROMASTER 440

The MICROMASTER 440 are frequency inverters for speed and torque control of three-phase motors. The various models available cover the performance range from 120 W to 200 kW (for constant torque (CT), alternatively up to 250kW (for variable torque (VT)). The inverters are microprocessor-controlled and use state-of-the-art Insulated Gate BipoIar Transistor (IGBT) technology. This makes them reliable and versatile. A special pulse-width modulation method with selectable Pulse frequency permits quiet motor operation. Comprehensive protective functions provide excellent inverter and motor protection. With the factory default settings, the MICROMASTER 440 is suitable for many variable speed applications. Using the functionally grouped parameters, the MICROMASTER 440 can adapted to more demanding applications. The MICROMASTER 440 can be used in both 'stand-alone' applications as well as being integrated into 'Automation Systems'.
MICROMASTER 440
18
Issue 07/05
1 Overview
1.2
Features
Easy installation Easy commissioning Rugged EMC design Can be operated on IT line supplies Fast repeatable response time to control signals Comprehensive range of parameters enabling configuration for a wide range of applications Simple cable connection Output relays Analog outputs (0 20 mA) 6 Isolated and switchable NPN/PNP digital inputs 2 Analog inputs: ADC1: 0 10 V, 0 20 mA and -10 to +10 V ADC2: 0 10 V, 0 20 mA The 2 analog inputs can be used as the 7th and 8th digital inputs BICO technology Modular design for extremely flexible configuration High switching frequencies (drive inverter specific up to 16 kHz) for low-noise motor operation Internal RS485 interface (port) Detailed status information and integrated message functions
Main Characteristics
19
1 Overview
Issue 07/05
Performance Characteristics
Vector Control Sensorless Vector Control (SLVC) Vector Control with encoder (VC) V/f Control Flux Current Control (FCC) for improved dynamic response and motor control
Multi-point V/f characteristic Automatic restart Flying restart Slip compensation Fast Current Limitation (FCL) for trip-free operation Motor holding brake Built-in DC injection brake Compound braking to improve braking performance Built-in braking chopper (Frame Sizes A to F) for resistor braking (dynamic braking) Setpoint input via: Analog inputs Communication interface JOG function Motorized potentiometer
Fixed frequencies Ramp function generator With smoothing Without smoothing Technology controller (PID) Parameter set switch-over Motor data sets (DDS) Command data sets and setpoint sources (CDS) Free Function Blocks DC link voltage controller Kinetic Buffering Positioning Ramp down
Protection characteristics
Overvoltage/undervoltage protection Overtemperature protection for the inverter Ground fault protection Short-circuit protection i2t thermal motor protection PTC/KTY84 for motor protection
Options
Refer to Chapter 5
MICROMASTER 440
20
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Installation
General data relating to installation Dimensions of Inverter Wiring guidelines to minimize the effects of EMI Details concerning electrical installation
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Installation after a Period of Storage ...................................................................... 23 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 24 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 26 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 33
21
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
WARNING Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material. Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation, commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the device/system. Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards). Only type B ELCBs should be used with FSA to FSF. Machines with a threephase power supply, fitted with EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker - see DIN VDE 0160, section 5.5.2 and EN50178 section 5.2.11.1). The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: the power supply L/L1, N/L2, L3 resp. U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 the motor terminals U, V, W resp. U2, V2, W2 and depending on the frame size the terminals DC+/B+, DC-, B-, DC/R+ resp. DCPS, DCNS, DCPA, DCNA Always wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. This equipment must not be used as an emergency stop mechanism (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4) The minimum size of the earth-bonding conductor must be equal to or greater than the cross-section of the power supply cables. If the front cover (Frame Sizes FX and GX) has been removed, the fan impeller is exposed. There is danger of injury when the fan is running. CAUTION The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried out as shown in Fig. 2-11 on page 43, to prevent inductive and capacitive interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
MICROMASTER 440
22
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
2.1
Installation after a Period of Storage

Following a prolonged period of storage, you must reform the capacitors in the inverter.
Frame Sizes A to F
Voltage
[%] 100
75
50
Storage period less than 1 year: Storage period 1 to 2 years: Storage period 2 to 3 years: Storage period 3 and more years:
No action necessary Prior to energizing, connect to voltage for one hour Prior to energizing, form according to the curve Prior to energizing, form according to the curve
0,5
Time t [h]
Fig. 2-1
Forming
Frame Sizes FX and GX

Reforming the capacitors can be accomplished by applying 85% of the rated input voltage for at least 30 minutes without load.
23
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
2.2
Ambient operating conditions
Temperature
Frame Sizes A to F:
Permissible output current [%] 100
Frame Sizes FX and GX:

Permissible output current [%] 100 95
75
90 85 constant torque variable torque 10 [C] 40 45 50 55 [C] Ambient temperature
50 25
-10
20
30
60 40 50 Ambient temperature
10
20
30
Fig. 2-2
Ambient operating temperature
Humidity Range
Relative air humidity 95 % Non-condensing
Altitude
If the inverter is to be installed at an altitude > 1000 m or > 2000 m above sea level, derating will be required:
Permissible output current 100 % 85 80 Permissible input voltage Frame Sizes 100 FX and GX Frame Sizes % A to F 80 77
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Installation altitude in m above sea level
2000 0 1000 3000 4000 Installation altitude in m above sea level
Fig. 2-3
Installation altitude
Shock and Vibration

Do not drop the inverter or expose to sudden shock. Do not install the inverter in an area where it is likely to be exposed to constant vibration. Mechanical strength to DIN IEC 68-2-6 Deflection: 0.075 mm (10 ... 58 Hz) Acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 (> 58 ... 500 Hz)
Electromagnetic Radiation
Do not install the inverter near sources of electromagnetic radiation.
MICROMASTER 440
24
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Atmospheric Pollution
Do not install the inverter in an environment, which contains atmospheric pollutants such as dust, corrosive gases, etc.
Water
Take care to site the inverter away from potential water hazards, e.g. do not install the inverter beneath pipes that are subject to condensation. Avoid installing the inverter where excessive humidity and condensation may occur.
Installation and cooling

CAUTION The inverters MUST NOT be mounted horizontally. The inverters can be mounted without any clearance at either side. When mounting inverters one above the other, the specified environmental conditions must not be exceeded. Independent of this, these minimum distances must be observed. Frame Size A, B, C above and below 100 mm Frame Size D, E above and below 300 mm Frame Size F above and below 350 mm Frame Size FX, GX above 250 mm below 150 mm in front 40 mm (FX), 50 mm (GX) No equipment that could have a negative effect on the flow of cooling air should be installed in this area. Make sure that the cooling vents in the inverter are positioned correctly to allow free movement of air.
25
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
2.3
Mechanical installation
WARNING To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid down in these operating instructions. Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective equipment (PPE). The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. The inverters can be mounted without any clearance at either side. When mounting inverters one above the other, the specified environmental conditions must not be exceeded. Independent of this, these minimum distances must be observed. Frame Size A, B, C above and below 100 mm Frame Size D, E Frame Size F above and below 300 mm above and below 350 mm
Frame Size FX, GX above 250 mm below 150 mm in front 40 mm (FX), 50 mm (GX) If the front cover (Frame Sizes FX and GX) has been removed, the fan impeller is exposed. There is danger of injury when the fan is running.
4
Removing from transport pallet (only for frame sizes FX and GX)
During transport, the inverter is fastened on the transport pallet with the aid of two iron brackets. WARNING Note that the center of gravity of the inverter is not in the middle of the unit. When lifting the pallet, the unit can therefore suddenly change position and swing to the side. 1. Fasten the hoisting crane cable to the hoisting eyes on the inverter (2 eyes, see Fig. 2-9 and Fig. 2-10). 2. Remove the two retaining bolts at the top of the front cover. 3. Unscrew the bolts in the iron brackets on the transport pallet and lift the inverter off the pallet. 4. Once installation has been completed and the inverter connected, fasten the two retaining bolts for the front cover at the bottom side of the door.
MICROMASTER 440
26
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Frame Sizes A to F
Frame Size A Frame Size B Frame Size C
5.5 mm 0.22"
55 mm 2.2"
4.8 mm 0.19"
160 mm 6.30"
174 mm 6.85"
204 mm 8.03"
4.5 mm 0.17"
138 mm 5.43"
174 mm 6.85"
Frame Size D
Frame Size E
Frame Size F
17.5 mm 0.68"
17.5 mm 0.68"
15 mm 0.59"
486 mm 19.13" 616.4 mm 24.27" 810 mm 31.89" with filter 1110 mm 43.70"
235 mm 9.25"
235 mm 9.25"
300 mm 11.81"
Fig. 2-4
Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 440
27
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
Frame Size FX
Fig. 2-5
Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size FX
MICROMASTER 440
28
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Frame Size GX
Fig. 2-6
Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size GX
29
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
Table 2-1 Frame-Size

A Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth Width x Height x Depth
Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 440 Overall Dimensions

mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch 73 x 173 x 149 2,87 x 6,81 x 5,87 149 x 202 x 172 5,87 x 7,95 x 6,77 185 x 245 x 195 7,28 x 9,65 x 7,68 275 x 520 x 245 10,82 x 20,47 x 9,65 275 x 650 x 245 10,82 x 25,59 x 9,65 350 x 850 mm x 320 height with filter 1150 13,78 x 33,46 x 12,60 height with filter 45,28 326 x 1400 x 356 12,80 x 55,12 x 12,83 326 x 1533 x 545 12,80 x 60,35 x 21,46
Fixing Method
2 M4 Bolts 4 M4 Nuts 4 M4 Washers or fitting on a standard rail 4 M4 Bolts 4 M4 Nuts 4 M4 Washers 4 M5 Bolts 4 M5 Nuts 4 M5 Washers 4 M8 Bolts 4 M8 Nuts 4 M8 Washers 4 M8 Bolts 4 M8 Nuts 4 M8 Washers 4 M8 Bolts 4 M8 Nuts 4 M8 Washers 6 M8 Bolts 6 M8 Nuts 6 M8 Washers 6 M8 Bolts 6 M8 Nuts 6 M8 Washers
Tightening Torque
2,5 Nm with washers fitted 2,5 Nm with washers fitted 2,5 Nm with washers fitted 3,0 Nm with washers fitted 3,0 Nm with washers fitted
3,0 Nm with washers fitted
FX
13 Nm +30 % with washers fitted 13 Nm +30 % with washers fitted
GX
MICROMASTER 440
30
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
2.3.1
Mounting onto standard rail, Frame Size A
Mounting the inverter onto a 35 mm standard rail (EN 50022)

Release Mechanism
1. Locate the inverter on the mounting rail using the upper rail latch 2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, press the release mechanism downwards and engage the inverter into the lower rail latch.
Upper rail latch
Lower rail latch
Removing the Inverter from the rail

1. To disengaged the release mechanism of the inverter, insert a screwdriver into the release mechanism. 2. Apply a downward pressure and the lower rail latch will disengage. 3. Pull the inverter from the rail.
31
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
2.3.2
Installing communication options and/or pulse encoder evaluation module
Sizes A to F
NOTE When installing the following options PROFIBUS module, DeviceNet module, CANopen option module and/or pulses encoder evaluation module, the mounting depth of the drive inverter is increased! Please refer to the relevant Operating Instructions for the actual procedure.
Sizes FX and GX
The front cover of the MICROMASTER 440 is designed so that the control module (normally the SDP) is almost flush with the opening in the front cover. If more than one option is to be installed in the electronic box, it is necessary to position the entire electronic box further to the rear Installing the options Remove the front cover: Unscrew two screws at the bottom side of the front cover. Lift front cover up and out. Remove retaining screws on the electronic box. Screw on electronic box in correct installation position as shown in Fig. 2-7 Install additional options. Reinstall front cover.
Installation position 2 Installation position 1 Standard installation
Standard installation Installation position 1 Installation position 2
Fig. 2-7
Options for the electronic box
MICROMASTER 440
32
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
2.4
Electrical installation
WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid down in these operating instructions. Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective gear. Never use high voltage insulation test equipment on cables connected to the inverter. The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. If the front cover (Frame Sizes FX and GX) has been removed, the fan impeller is exposed. There is danger of injury when the fan is running. CAUTION The control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately. Do not feed them through the same cable conduit/trunking.
33
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
2.4.1
General
WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. If the inverter is not grounded correctly, extremely dangerous conditions may arise within the inverter which could prove potentially fatal. NOTE When using output reactors, the pulse frequency may not be set higher than 4 kHz.
Operation with ungrounded (IT) supplies

The use of filtered MICROMASTER 4 drives on unearthed mains supplies is not permitted. For ungrounded line supplies, the 'Y' capacitor in the inverter must be disabled. The procedure to do this is described in Attachment D. MICROMASTER is connected to ungrounded line supplies and remains operational even if a ground fault occurs at an input or output phase. In this particular case, an output reactor must be installed.
Operation with Residual Current Device (Frame Sizes A to F)

If an RCD (also referred to as ELCB or RCCB) is fitted, the MICROMASTER inverters will operate without nuisance tripping, provided that: A type B RCD is used. The trip limit of the RCD is 300 mA. The neutral of the supply is grounded. Only one inverter is supplied from each RCD. The output cables are less than 50 m (screened) or 100 m (unscreened).
Operation with long cables

All inverters will operate at full specification with cable lengths as follows: Frame Sizes A to F screened: 50 m unscreened: 100 m Frame Sizes FX and GX screened: 100 m unscreened: 150 m Using the output chokes specified in catalogue DA 51.2, the following cable lengths are possible for all frame sizes: screened: 200 m unscreened: 300 m
MICROMASTER 440
34
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
2.4.2
Power and motor connections

WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. Isolate the mains electrical supply before making or changing connections to the unit. Ensure that the inverter is configured for the correct supply voltage: MICROMASTERS must not be connected to a higher voltage supply. When synchronous motors are connected or when coupling several motors in parallel, the inverter must be operated with V/f control characteristic (P1300 = 0, 2 or 3). CAUTION After connecting the power and motor cables to the proper terminals, make sure that the front covers have been replaced properly before supplying power to the unit! NOTICE Ensure that the appropriate circuit-breakers/fuses with the specified current rating are connected between the power supply and inverter (see chapter 5, Tables 5-5). Use Class 1 60/75 oC copper wire only (for UL compliance). For tightening torque see Table 5-2.
Access to the power and motor terminals

Access to the power supply and motor terminals is possible by removing the front covers (See Fig. 2-8 to Fig. 2-10). See also Appendix B. After removing the front covers and exposing the terminals, complete power and motor connections as shown in Fig. 2-11.
Connection of braking unit (only for framesize FX and GX)

A passage opening for access to the intermediate circuit connections has been provided on the top side of the inverter. It is possible to connect an external braking unit (refer to Catalog DA65.11 or DA65.10) to these terminals. The position is shown in Fig. 2-9 and Fig. 2-10. The maximum cross section of connections is 50 mm, but only provided the crimped area of cable shoes on the equipment side is provided with a heatshrinkable sleeve. This measure is important to ensure that air gaps and creep distances are observed.
35
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
Fig. 2-8
MICROMASTER 440 Connection Terminals
MICROMASTER 440
36
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Hoisting eyes Shield connection Mains cable PE Cable opening for mains conection U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 Cable opening DCPA, DCNA for connection of an external braking unit Mains cable Phase U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 Connection to Y-Capacitor
Connection DCPA, DCNA for external braking unit Top adjustment rail Top retaining screw Connection for dv/dt filter DCPS, DCNS
Status Display Panel Elektronic box
Bottom adjustment rail Bottom retaining screw Fan screws
Fan Shield connection control leads
Fan fuses Transformer adaption Motor cable Phase U2, V2, W2 Motor cable PE Shield connection
Fig. 2-9
MICROMASTER 440 connection drawing frame size FX
37
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
Hoisting eyes
Shield connection Mains cable PE Cable opening for mains conection U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 Cable opening DCPA, DCNA for connection of an external braking unit
Mains cable Phase U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 Connection to Y-Capacitor Connection DCPA, DCNA for external braking unit Top adjustment rail Top retaining screw Connection for dv/dt filter DCPS, DCNS Status Display Panel Elektronic box Bottom adjustment rail Bottom retaining screw Fan screws
Fan Shield connection control leads Fan fuses
Transformer adaption Motor cable Phase U2, V2, W2 Motor cable PE Shield connection
Fig. 2-10
MICROMASTER 440 connection drawing - frame size GX
MICROMASTER 440
38
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Frame Sizes A to F
L3 L2 L1 N Contactor Fuse L/L1 U V N/L2 W PE PE PE
Single Phase
Optional line choke Optional Filter MICROMASTER 1) Motor
L3 L2 L1 Fuse
Three Phase
Contactor Optional line choke Optional Filter MICROMASTER 1) L3 L2 L1 PE PE PE U V W Motor
1) with and without filter

L3 L2 L1 Contactor Fuse L3 L2 L1 PE PE 3) U V W Optional Filter Optional line choke MICROMASTER 2) Motor
2) without filter 3) the commutation choke is to be earthed using the designated earthing point Fig. 2-11 Motor and Power Connections
39
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
Adaptation of fan voltage (only for frame size FX and GX)

A transformer is installed to adapt the existing line voltage to the fan voltage. It may be necessary to reconnect the transformer terminals on the primary side to coincide with the existing line power.
0V 1L380V
1L400V 1L440V
1L480V
Connect according input voltage
Fig. 2-12
Adaptation of fan voltage
CAUTION If the terminals are not reconnected to the actually present line voltage, the fan fuses can blow.
Replacement for fan fuses

Frame size
FX (90 kW CT) FX (110 kW CT) GX (132-200 kW CT)
Fuses (2 each)
1 A / 600 V / slow-acting 2,5 A / 600 V / slow-acting 4 A / 600 V / slow-acting
Recommended fuses
Cooper-Bussmann FNQ-R-1, 600 V or comparable fuse Ferraz Gould Shawmut ATDR2-1/2, 600 V or comparable fuse Ferraz Gould Shawmut ATDR4, 600 V or comparable fuse
MICROMASTER 440
40
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
2.4.3
Control terminals
Terminal Designation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ADC1+ ADC1DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 DIN4 ADC2+ ADC2DAC1+ DAC1PTCA PTCB DIN5 DIN6 DOUT1/NC DOUT1/NO DOUT1/COM DOUT2/NO DOUT2/COM DOUT3/NC DOUT3/NO DOUT3/COM DAC2+ DAC2 P+ N
Function
Output +10 V Output 0 V Analog input 1 (+) Analog input 1 (-) Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Isolated output +24 V / max. 100 mA Analog input 2 (+) Analog input 2 (-) Analog output 1 (+) Analog output 1 (-) Connection for PTC / KTY84 Connection for PTC / KTY84 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital output 1 / NC contact Digital output 1 / NO contact Digital output 1 / Changeover contact Digital output 2 / NO contact Digital output 2 / Changeover contact Digital output 3 / NC contact Digital output 3 / NO contact Digital output 3 / Changeover contact Analog output 2 (+) Analog output 2 (-) Isolated output 0 V / max. 100 mA RS485 port RS485 port
Fig. 2-13
Control terminals of MICROMASTER 440
A detailed description of the inputs and outputs is provided in Section 3.6.
41
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
2.4.4
Avoiding Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI)

The inverters are designed to operate in an industrial environment where a high level of EMI can be expected. Usually, good installation practices will ensure safe and trouble-free operation. If you encounter problems, follow the guidelines stated below.
Action to Take
Ensure that all equipment in the cubicle is well grounded using short, thick grounding cable connected to a common star point or busbar Make sure that any control equipment (such as a PLC) connected to the inverter is connected to the same ground or star point as the inverter via a short thick link. Connect the return ground from the motors controlled by the inverters directly to the ground connection (PE) on the associated inverter Flat conductors are preferred as they have lower impedance at higher frequencies Terminate the ends of the cable neatly, ensuring that unscreened wires are as short as possible Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible, using separate trunking, if necessary at 90 to each other. Whenever possible, use screened leads for the connections to the control circuitry Ensure that the contactors in the cubicle are suppressed, either with R-C suppressors for AC contactors or 'flywheel' diodes for DC contactors fitted to the coils. Varistor suppressors are also effective. This is important when the contactors are controlled from the inverter relay Use screened or armored cables for the motor connections and ground the screen at both ends using the cable clamps WARNING Safety regulations must not be compromised when installing inverters!
2.4.5
Screening Methods
Frame Sizes A, B and C

For frame sizes A, B and C the Gland Plate Kit is supplied as an option. It allows easy and efficient connection of the necessary screening. See the Gland Plate Installation Instructions contained on the Document CD-ROM, supplied with the MICROMASTER 440.
MICROMASTER 440
42
Issue 07/05
2 Installation
Screening without a Gland Plate

Should a Gland Plate not be available, then the inverter can be screened using the methodology shown in Fig. 2-14.
1 Mains power input 2 Control cable 3 Motor cable 4 Footprint filter 5 Metal back plate 6 Use suitable clips to fix motor and control cable screens securely to metal back plate 7 Screening cables
Fig. 2-14
Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI
Frame Sizes D, E and F

The Gland Plate is factory fitted. The installation of the screening is accomplished using the same methodology as in frame sizes A, B and C.

Connect the wire shields to the shield connection points shown in the connection drawing (see Fig. 2-9 and Fig. 2-10) . For this purpose twist the motor leads and screw all of them together to the shield connection point for the motor lead. When using an EMI filter, a power commutating choke is required. The wire shields should be fastened to the metallic mounting surface as close as possible to the components.
43
2 Installation
Issue 07/05
MICROMASTER 440
44
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Functions
Explanation of the MICROMASTER 440 parameters An overview of the parameter structure of MICROMASTER 440 A description of the display and operator control elements and communications A block diagram of MICROMASTER 440 An overview of the various ways of commissioning the MICROMASTER 440 A description of the inputs and outputs Possibilities of controlling (open-loop and closed-loop) the MICROMASTER 440 A description of the various functions of the MICROMASTER 440 and their implementation Explanation and information on the protective functions
This Section includes the following:
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.7.1 3.5.7.2 3.5.7.3 3.5.7.4 3.5.7.5 3.5.7.6
Parameters ............................................................................................................. 49 Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes ..................................... 49 Interconnecting signals (BICO technology) ............................................................ 55 Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source P1000....... 55 Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719 .................................................. 57 BICO technology..................................................................................................... 58 Data sets................................................................................................................. 61 Reference quantities ............................................................................................... 66 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 68 Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel) ..................................................... 68 Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) .............................................. 69 Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP) ................................ 70 Changing parameters using the operator panel ..................................................... 71 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 72 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 73 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 75 50/60 Hz setting ...................................................................................................... 77 Motor circuit ............................................................................................................ 78 Quick commissioning .............................................................................................. 81 Calculating the motor / control data ........................................................................ 86 Motor data identification.......................................................................................... 89 Magnetizing current ................................................................................................ 93 Commissioning the application ............................................................................... 95 Serial Interface (USS) ............................................................................................. 95 Selection of command source ................................................................................ 96 Digital input (DIN).................................................................................................... 96 Digital output (DOUT) ............................................................................................. 97 Selection of frequency setpoint............................................................................... 98 Analog input (ADC) ................................................................................................. 99
45
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.7 3.5.7.8 3.5.7.9 3.5.7.10 3.5.7.11 3.5.7.12 3.5.7.13 3.5.7.14 3.5.7.15 3.5.7.16 3.5.7.17 3.5.7.18 3.5.7.19 3.5.7.20 3.5.7.21 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.1.1 3.7.1.2 3.7.1.3 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.11.1 3.11.1.1 3.11.1.2 3.11.1.3 3.12 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.3 3.12.4 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.15.1 3.15.2 3.15.3 3.16 3.17
Analog output (DAC)............................................................................................. 100 Motor potentiometer (MOP) .................................................................................. 101 Fixed frequency (FF)............................................................................................. 102 JOG....................................................................................................................... 103 Ramp function generator (RFG) ........................................................................... 104 Reference/limit frequencies .................................................................................. 105 Inverter protection ................................................................................................. 106 Motor protection .................................................................................................... 106 Encoder................................................................................................................. 108 V/f control.............................................................................................................. 109 Field-orientated control ......................................................................................... 111 Converter-specific Functions ................................................................................ 116 Command and drive data set................................................................................ 125 Diagnostic parameters.......................................................................................... 128 Abschluss der Inbetriebnahme ............................................................................. 129 Series commissioning ........................................................................................... 130 Parameter reset to the factory setting................................................................... 131 Inputs / outputs ..................................................................................................... 133 Digital inputs (DIN)................................................................................................ 133 Digital outputs (DOUT) ......................................................................................... 136 Analog inputs (ADC) ............................................................................................. 138 Analog outputs (D/A converter) ............................................................................ 140 Communications ................................................................................................... 142 Universal serial interface (USS)............................................................................ 144 Protocol specification and bus structure ............................................................... 146 The structure of net data....................................................................................... 153 USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485) ...................................................... 162 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 164 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 167 JOG....................................................................................................................... 169 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 170 Closed-loop PID control ........................................................................................ 172 PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) ............................................................. 174 PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF)................................................................................... 175 PID dancer roll control .......................................................................................... 176 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 178 Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM)............................. 178 Ramp-function generator (RFG) ........................................................................... 180 OFF/braking functions .......................................................................................... 183 Manual / automatic operation ............................................................................... 186 Free function blocks (FFB) ................................................................................... 188 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 193 Electronic brakes .................................................................................................. 199 DC braking ............................................................................................................ 199 Compound braking................................................................................................ 202 Dynamic braking ................................................................................................... 203 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 208 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 210
MICROMASTER 440
46
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.18 3.18.1 3.18.2 3.19 3.20 3.20.1 3.20.2 3.21 3.21.1 3.21.2 3.22 3.22.1 3.22.2 3.23 3.23.1 3.23.1.1 3.23.1.2 3.23.1.3 3.23.1.4 3.23.1.5 3.23.2 3.23.2.1 3.23.2.2 3.23.2.3 3.23.2.4 3.23.2.5
Closed-loop Vdc control........................................................................................ 212 Vdc_max controller ............................................................................................... 212 Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)................................................................... 215 Positioning down ramp ......................................................................................... 216 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 218 General monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 218 Load torque monitoring......................................................................................... 220 Thermal motor protection and overload responses .............................................. 224 Thermal motor model............................................................................................ 226 Temperature sensor.............................................................................................. 227 Power module protection ...................................................................................... 229 General overload monitoring ................................................................................ 229 Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses........................................ 230 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 232 V/f control.............................................................................................................. 232 Voltage boost ........................................................................................................ 234 Slip compensation................................................................................................. 236 V/f resonance damping......................................................................................... 237 V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC)............................................ 238 Current limiting (Imax controller)........................................................................... 239 Vector control........................................................................................................ 240 Vector control without speed encoder (SLVC) ..................................................... 242 Vector control with speed encoder (VC) ............................................................... 244 Speed controller.................................................................................................... 245 Closed-loop torque control.................................................................................... 250 Limiting the torque setpoint................................................................................... 251
47
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
WARNING MICROMASTER drive inverters operate with high voltages. When electrical equipment is operated, then specific parts of this equipment are at hazardous voltage levels. The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: the power supply L/L1, N/L2, L3 resp. U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 the motor terminals U, V, W resp. U2, V2, W2 and depending on the frame size the terminals DC+/B+, DC-, B-, DC/R+ resp. DCPS, DCNS, DCPA, DCNA Emergency switching-off devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain functional in all operating modes of the control device. When the Emergency switching-off device is reset, then it is not permissible that the equipment runs-up again in an uncontrolled or undefined way. In cases and situations where short-circuits in the control device can result in significant material damage or even severe bodily injury (i.e. potentially hazardous short-circuits), then additional external measures or devices/equipment must be provided in order to ensure or force operation without any potential hazards, even if a short-circuit occurs (e.g. independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.). Certain parameter settings can mean that the drive inverter automatically restarts after the power supply voltage fails and then returns. The motor parameters must be precisely configured in order to ensure perfect motor overload protection. The drive inverter provides internal motor overload protection according to UL508C, Section 42. I2t monitoring is enabled in the default setting (refer to P0610 and P0335). The motor overload protection can also be guaranteed using an external PTC or KTY84 (factory setting: P0601 is de-activated). This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V / 460 V / 575 V when protected by an H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self-protected combination motor controller. The drive unit may not be used as 'Emergency switching-off device' (refer to EN 60204, 9.2.5.4). CAUTION Only qualified personnel may commission (start-up) the equipment. Safety measures and warnings must be always extremely carefully observed and fulfilled.
MICROMASTER 440
48
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.1
3.1.1
Parameters
Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes
The drive inverter is adapted to the particular application using the appropriate parameters. This means that each parameter is identified by a parameter number , parameter text and specific attributes (e.g. readable, can be written into, BICO attribute, group attribute etc.). Within any one particular drive system, the parameter number is unique. On the other hand, an attribute can be assigned a multiple number of times so that several parameters can have the same attribute. For MICROMASTER, parameters can be accessed using the following operator units: BOP (option) AOP (option) PC-based commissioning (start-up) tool "Drive Monitor" or "STARTER". These PC-based tools are supplied on the CD-ROM. The parameter types are the main differentiating feature of the parameters.
Parameter Read (r....) Write/Read (P....)
"normal" Read parameters
BICO output
"normal" Write-/Read parameters
BICO input
Fig. 3-1
Parameter types
Setting parameters
Parameters which can be written into and read "P" parameters These are activated/de-activated in the individual functions or parameters directly influence the behavior of a function. The value of this parameter is saved in a nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) as long as the appropriate option was selected (nonvolatile data save). Otherwise, these values are saved in the non-volatile memory (RAM) of the processor, which are lost after power failure or power-off/power-on operations. Notation: P0927 setting parameter 927 P0748.1 setting parameter 748, bit 01 P0719[1] setting parameter 719 index 1 P0013[0...19] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19) Abbreviated notation P0013[20] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
49
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Monitoring parameters
These can only be read "r" parameters These parameters are used to display internal quantities, for example states and actual values. These parameters are absolutely necessary, especially for diagnostics. Notation: r0002 r0052.3 monitoring parameter 2 monitoring parameter 52, bit 03
r0947[2] monitoring parameter 947 index 2 r0964[0...4] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4) Abbreviated notation r0964[5] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4) NOTE A parameter (e.g. P0013[20]) with x consecutive elements (in this case: 20) is defined using an index. x is defined by the numerical index value. When transferred to a parameter this means that an indexed parameter can assume several values. The values are addressed via the parameter number including the index value (e.g. P0013[0], P0013[1], P0013[2], P0013[3], P0013[4], ...). Index parameters, for example, are used for: Drive data sets Command data sets Sub-functions In addition to the parameter number and parameter text, every setting and monitoring parameter has different attributes which are used to individually define the properties/characteristics of the parameter. The attributes are listed in the following Table which are used for MICROMASTER.
Table 3-1 Attribute group
Data types
P0013[0] P0013[1] P0013[2] . . . P0013[18] P0013[19]
Parameter attributes Attribute Description

The data type of a parameter defines the maximum possible value range. 3 data types are used for MICROMASTER. They either represent an unsigned integer value (U16, U32) or a floating-point value (float). The value range is frequently restricted by a minimum, maximum value (min, max) or using drive inverter/motor quantities. U16 U32 Float Unsigned, integer value with a size of 16 bits, max. value range: 0 .... 65535 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 32 bits max. value range: 0 .... 4294967295 A simple precise floating point value according to the IEEE standard format +38 +38 max. value range: -3.39e +3.39e
MICROMASTER 440
50
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Attribute group
Value range
Attribute
Description
The value range, which is specified as a result of the data type, is restricted/limited by the minimum, maximum value (min, max) and using drive inverter/motor quantities. Straightforward commissioning (start-up) is guaranteed in so much that the parameters have a default value. These values (min, def, max) are permanently saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user.
Min Def Max Unit
No value entered (e.g.: "r parameter") Minimum value Default value Maximum value For MICROMASTER, the units of a particular parameter involve the physical quantity (e.g. m, s, A). Quantities are measurable properties/characteristics of physical objects, operations, states and are represented using characters of a formula (e.g. V = 9 V).
% A V Ohm us ms s Hz kHz 1/min m/s Nm W kW Hp kWh C m kg Access level
No dimension Percentage Ampere Volt Ohm Microseconds Milliseconds Seconds Hertz Kilohertz Revolutions per minute [RPM] Meters per second Newton meter Watt Kilowatt Horse power Kilowatt hours Degrees Celsius Meter Kilograms Degrees (angular degrees) The access level is controlled using parameter P0003. In this case, only those parameters are visible at the BOP or AOP, where the access level is less than or equal to the value assigned in parameter P0003. On the other hand, for DriveMonitor and STARTER, only access levels 0 and 4 are relevant. For example, parameters with access level 4 cannot be changed if the appropriate access level has not been set. The following access levels are implemented in the family of MICROMASTER drive units:
0 1 2 3 4
User-defined parameter list (refer to P0013) Standard access to the most frequently used parameters Extended access, e.g. to drive inverter I/O functions Expert access only for experienced users Service access only for authorized service/maintenance personnel with password protection. As far as the ability to visualize the parameters is concerned, the group assignment of the individual parameters must be taken into account. Parameter P0004 is used for the control (refer to the Grouping).
51
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Attribute group
Grouping
Attribute
Description
The parameters are sub-divided into groups according to their functionality. This increases the transparency and allows a parameter to be quickly searched for. Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be used to control the ability to be visualized for the BOP / AOP. Main parameter area:
ALWAYS INVERTER MOTOR ENCODER TECH_APL COMMANDS TERMINAL SETPOINT FUNC CONTROL COMM ALARMS TECH BICO
0 2 3 4 5 7
all parameters drive inverter parameters motor parameters 0600 .... 0699 speed encoder technical applications / units
0200 .... 0299 0300 .... 0399 and 0400 .... 0499 0500 .... 0599 0700 .... 0749 and 0750 .... 0799 1000 .... 1199 1200 .... 1299 1300 .... 1799 2000 .... 2099 2100 .... 2199 2200 .... 2399
control commands, digital I/O 0800 .... 0899 8 Analog inputs/outputs 10 Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 12 Drive inverter functions Motor open-loop/closed-loop control Communications Faults, warnings, monitoring functions" Technological controller (PID controller)
13 20 21 22
Description for Binector Input (BI), Binector Output (BO), Connector Input (CI), Connector Output (CO) and Connector Output / Binector Output (CO/BO), refer to Section 3.1.2.3 BI BO CI CO CO/BO Binector Input Binector Output Connector Input Connector Output Connector Output / Binector Output Description for the command data set (CDS) and drive data set (DDS) refer to Section 3.1.3 CDS DDS Command data set Drive data set "P" parameters can only be changed depending on the drive state. The parameter value is not accepted if the instantaneous state is not listed in the parameter attribute "Change state". For instance, the commissioning (start-up) parameter P0010 with the attribute "CT" can only be changed in quick start-up "C" or ready "T" but not in run "U". C U T Quick commissioning (start-up) Operation (run) Ready This parameter attribute identifies as to whether the parameter is included in the quick commissioning (start-up) (P0010 = 1). No Yes The parameter is not included in the quick commissioning (start-up) The parameter is included in the quick commissioning (start-up) This attribute is only of importance in conjunction with a BOP. The "Immediate" attribute indicates that this value is already accepted when scrolling (when changing or ). Especially parameters which are used for optimization the value with functions have this property (e.g. constant voltage boost P1310 or filter time constants). On the other hand, for parameters with the attribute "After actuation", the . These include, for example, value is only accepted after first actuating the key parameters where the parameter value can have different settings/meanings (e.g. selecting the frequency setpoint source P1000). Immediately After actuation The value becomes valid by either scrolling with The value is only accepted by pressing or
Data sets
Change state
QC.
Active
MICROMASTER 440
52
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The attributes and groups are shown, in the parameter list, in the header line of the parameter. This is shown as an example in Fig. 3-2 using parameter P0305.
Index BICO (if available) Datatype: Float Active: first confirm Active Datatypes Unit A QuickComm. Yes QuickComm. Unit Access level Min: 0.01 Def: 3.25 10000.0 Max: 0 Value range Level:
P0305[3]
Rated motor current

CStat: C P-Group: MOTOR Group CStat
Fig. 3-2
Header line for parameter P0305
53
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
The interrelationship between access level P0003 and the grouping P0004 is schematically shown in Fig. 3-3.
User access level P0003 = 1 Standard 2 Extended 3 Expert 4 Service
P0004 = 2
Inverter Unit P0004 = 2, P0003 = 1 Parameters level 1 concerning the inverter unit P0004 = 2, P0003 = 2
P0004 = 0
(no filter function) allows direct access to the parameters. For BOP and AOP depending on the selected access level
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 3 Parameters level 1, 2 and 3 concerning the inverter unit
Parameters level 1 and 2 concerning the inverter unit
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 4 Parameters level 1, 2, 3 and 4 concerning the inverter unit
PID Controller Alarms, Warnings & Monitoring
P0004 = 22
Inverter Unit P0200 ... P0299 Motor Data P0300 ... P0399 P0600 ... P0699
P0004 = 2
P0004 = 21
P0003 = 1
P0003 = 2
P0004 = 3
Communication P2000 ... P2099
P0004 = 20
P0003 = 3
P0003 = 4
Speed sensor P0400 ... P0499
P0004 = 4
Motor Control P1300 ... P1799
P0004 = 13
P0004 = 5
Technology Application / units P0400 ... P0499
P0004 = 12
Drive Features P1200 ... P1299
P0004 = 7 P0004 = 10 P0004 = 8

Commands and Digital I/O P0700 ... P0749 P0800 ... P0899
Setpoint Channel & Ramp Generator P1000 ... P1199
Analogue I/O P0750 ... P0799
Fig. 3-3
Parameter grouping / access
MICROMASTER 440
54
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.1.2
Interconnecting signals (BICO technology)

A state-of-the-art drive unit must be able to interconnect internal and external signals (setpoint / actual values and control / status signal). This interconnection functionality must have a high degree of flexibility in order to be able to adapt the drive to new applications. Further, a high degree of usability is required, which also fulfills standard applications. This is the reason that within the MICROMASTER series of drive units, BICO technology ( flexibility) and fast parameterization using parameters P0700 / P1000 ( usability) or P0719 ( combination P0700/P1000) have been introduced to be able to fulfill both of these requirements.
3.1.2.1
Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source P1000
The following parameters can be used to quickly interconnect setpoints and control signals: P0700 "Selection of command source" P1000 "Selection of setpoint source" These parameters are used to define via which interface the drive inverter receives the setpoint or the power-on/power-off command. The interfaces, listed in Table 3-2 can be selected for the command source P0700.
Table 3-2 Parameter P0700
Significance / command source Factory default BOP (operator panel, refer to Section 3.2.1) Terminal strip USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB on COM link
Parameter values 0 1 2 4 5 6
The following internal or external sources / interfaces can be selected for the frequency setpoint source P1000. In addition to the main setpoint (1st position), a supplementary setpoint (2nd position) can be selected (refer to Table 3-3).
55
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Table 3-3
Parameter P1000
Significance Main setpoint source No main setpoint MOP setpoint (motorized potentiometer) Analog setpoint Fixed frequency USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB on COM link Analog setpoint 2 No main setpoint MOP setpoint Analog setpoint .. .. .. Analog setpoint 2 MOP setpoint MOP setpoint MOP setpoint .. .. .. Analog setpoint 2 Supplementary setpoint source
Parameter values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 .. .. .. 77
NOTE Communications between the AOP and MICROMASTER are established using the USS protocol. The AOP can be connected to both the BOP link (RS 232) as well as at the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter. If the AOP is to be used as command source or setpoint source then for parameter P0700 or P1000, either "USS on BOP link" or "USS on COM link" should be selected. The complete list of all of the setting possibilities can be taken from the parameter list (refer to parameter list P1000). Parameters P0700 and P1000 have the following default settings: a) P0700 = 2 (terminal strip) b) P1000 = 2 (analog setpoint)
In this case, the selection of the command source is made independently of the selection of the frequency setpoint source. This means that the source to enter the setpoint does not have to match the source to enter the power-on/power-off command (command source). This means, for example, that the setpoint (P1000 = 4) can be connected via an external device which is connected to the BOP link interface via USS and the control (ON/OFF command, etc.) is entered via digital inputs (terminals, P0700 = 2).
CAUTION When P0700 or P1000 are modified, then the frequency inverter also changes the subordinate BICO parameters (refer to the parameter list for P0700 or P1000 in the appropriate tables) There is no prioritization (priority assignment) between direct BICO parameterization and P0700/P1000. The last modification is valid.
MICROMASTER 440
56
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.1.2.2
Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719

Parameter P0719 represents a combination of the functionalities of the two parameters P0700 and P1000. Here, it is possible to changeover the command source as well as also the frequency setpoint source via a parameter change. Contrary to P0700 and P1000, for parameter P0719, the subordinate (lower-level) BICO parameters are not changed. This characteristic/feature is especially used by PC tools in order to briefly retrieve the control authority for the drive without having to change the existing BICO parameterization. Parameter P0719 "Selection of command/frequency setpoint" comprises the command source (Cmd) and the frequency setpoint (setpoint).
Table 3-4 Parameter P0719
Significance Command source Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BICO parameter Cmd=BOP Cmd=BOP Cmd=BOP .. .. Cmd=CB COM link Cmd=CB COM link Setpoint source (frequency source) Setpoint = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint Setpoint = Analog Setpoint = Fixed frequency Setpoint = USS BOP link Setpoint = USS COM link Setpoint = CB COM link Setpoint = BICO Param Setpoint = MOP setpoint Setpoint = Analog .. .. Setpoint = USS BOP link Setpoint = USS COM link
Parameter values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 .. .. 64 66
NOTE The complete list of all of the possible settings can be taken from the parameter list (refer to the parameter list, P0719). Contrary to parameter P0700 and P1000, subordinate BICO parameters are not changed for parameter P0719. This characteristic/feature can be used during service if the control authority must be briefly and quickly re-assigned (e.g. selecting and executing the motor data identification routine using a PC-based tool).
57
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.1.2.3
BICO technology
Using BICO technology (English: Binector Connector Technology), process data can be freely interconnected using the "standard" drive parameterization. In this case, all values which can be freely interconnected (e.g. frequency setpoint, frequency actual value, current actual value, etc.) can be defined as "Connectors" and all digital signals which can be freely interconnected (e.g. status of a digital input, ON/OFF, message function when a limit is violated etc.) can be defined as "Binectors". There are many input and output quantities as well as quantities within the closedloop control which can be interconnected in a drive unit. It is possible to adapt the drive to the various requirements using BICO technology. A binector is a digital (binary) signal without any units and which can either have the value 0 or 1. Binectors always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided into binector inputs and binector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-4). In this case, the binector input is always designated using a "P" parameter with attribute "BI" (e.g.: P0731 BI: Function, digital output 1), while the binector output is always represented using an "r" parameter with attribute "BO" (e.g.: r0751 BO: ADC status word). As can be seen from the examples above, the binector parameters have the following abbreviations in front of the parameter names: BI Binector Input, signal receiver ("P" parameters) The BI parameter can be interconnected with a binector output as source, by entering the parameter number of the binector output (BO parameter) as value in the BI parameter (e.g.: Interconnecting the "BO" parameter r0751 with "BI" parameter P0731 P0731 = 751). BO Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) The BO parameter can be used as source for BI parameters. For the particular interconnection the BO parameter number must be entered into the BI parameter (e.g.: Interconnecting the "BO" parameter r0751 with "BI" parameter P0731 P0731 = 751).
Abbreviation and symbol
BI
Name
Binector input (signal receiver)
Function
Data flow Pxxxx BI: ... Function Data flow Function rxxxx BO: ...
BO
Binector output (signal source)
Fig. 3-4
Binectors
A connector is a value (16 or 32 bit), which can include a normalized quantity (without dimension) as well as also a quantity with associated units. Connectors always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided into connector inputs and connector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-5). Essentially the same as the binectors, the connector inputs are characterized by a "P" parameter with attribute "CI" (e.g.: P0771 CI: D/A converter); while the connector outputs are always represented using an "r" parameter with attribute "CO" (e.g.: r0021 CO: Smoothed output frequency).
MICROMASTER 440
58
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
As can be seen from the examples above, connector parameters have the following abbreviations in front of the parameter names: CI Connector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters) The CI parameter can be interconnected with a connector output as source, by entering the parameter number of the connector output (CO parameter) as value in the CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21). CO Connector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) The CO parameter can be used as source for CI parameters. For the particular interconnection, the CO parameter number must be entered in the CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21). Further, MICROMASTER has "r" parameters where several binector outputs are combined in a word (e.g.: r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1). This feature reduces, on one hand, the number of parameters and simplifies parameterization via the serial interface (data transfer). This parameter is further characterized by the fact that it does not have any units and each bit represents a digital (binary) signal. As can be seen from the examples of parameters, these combined parameters have the following abbreviation in front of the parameter names: CO/BO Connector Output / Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) CO/BO parameters can be used as source for CI parameters and BI parameters: a) In order to interconnect all of the CO/BO parameters, the parameter number must be entered into the appropriate CI parameter (e.g.: P2016[0] = 52). b) When interconnecting a single digital signal, in addition to the CO/BO parameter number, the bit number must also be entered into the BI parameter (e.g.: P0731 = 52.3)
Abbreviation and symbol
CI
Name
Connector input (signal receiver)
Function
Data flow Pxxxx CI: ... Function Data flow Function rxxxx CO: ...
CO
Connector output (signal source)
CO BO
Binector/connector output (signal source)
Data flow rxxxx Functions CO/BO: ...
Fig. 3-5
Connectors
In order to interconnect two signals, a BICO setting parameter (signal receiver) must be assigned the required BICO monitoring parameter (signal source). A typical BICO interconnection is shown using the following examples (refer to Fig. 3-6).
59
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Connector output (CO)
===>
Connector input (CI)

CI: Main setpoint P1070 (755) Function
Function CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h] r0755
FB
P1070 = 755
Binector output (BO)

Function
===>
Binector input (BI)

BI: ON/OFF1
P0840 P0840
FB
BO: Status word of ADC r0751
P0840 = 751.0
(751:0) (751:0)
Function
FB
Connector output / Binector output (CO/BO)
CI: PZD to CB P2051 (52) Function
P2051 = 52
CO/BO: Act. status word 1 Function
FB
FB
r0052 r0052 BI: Function of digital output 1 P0731 P0731 Function (52:3)
FB
P0731 = 52.3
Fig. 3-6 BICO connections (examples)
NOTE BICO parameters with the CO, BO or CO/BO attributes can be used a multiple number of times.
MICROMASTER 440
60
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.1.3
Data sets
For many applications it is advantageous if several parameters can be simultaneously changed, during operation or in the ready state, using an external signal.
Examples: The drive inverter should be switched-over from motor 1 to motor 2.

M1 K1 MM4 Motor 1
M2 K2
Motor 2
Fig. 3-7
Example: Changeover from motor 1 to motor 2
The control source (e.g. terminal BOP) or setpoint (frequency) source (e.g. ADC MOP) should be changed-over using a terminal signal (e.g. DIN4) as function of an external event (e.g. the higher-level control unit fails). A typical example in this case is a mixer, which may not come to an uncontrolled stop when the control fails. Control source: Setpoint (frequency source):
P0810 = 722.3 DIN4 Terminals BOP ADC MOP P0700[0] = 2 P0700[1] = 1 P1000[0] = 2 P1000[1] = 1
0
Terminal BOP ADC MOP
Sequence control
1
0 1
Setpoint channel
Motor control
Fig. 3-8
Example: Changing-over between the control and setpoint (frequency) source
This functionality can be elegantly implemented using indexed parameters (refer to Section 3.1.1). In this case, as far as the functionality is concerned, the parameters are combined to form groups / data sets and are indexed. By using indexing, several different settings can be saved for each parameter which can be activated by changing-over the data set (i.e. toggling between data sets). The following data sets apply: CDS Command Data Set DDS Drive Data Set
61
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3 independent settings are possible for each data set. These settings can be made using the index of the particular parameter: CDS1 ... CDS3 DDS1 ... DDS3 Those parameters (connector and binector inputs) which are used to control the drive and enter a setpoint, are assigned to the command data set (CDS). The signal sources for the control commands and setpoints are interconnected using BICO technology (refer to Section 3.1.2.3). In this case, the connector and binector inputs are assigned as signal sources corresponding to the connector and binector outputs. A command data set includes:
Command sources and binector inputs for control commands (digital signals) e.g.:
Selects the command source ON/OFF1 OFF2 Enable JOG right Enable JOG left P0700 P0840 P0844 P1055 P1056 P1000 P1070 P1075
Setpoint sources and connector inputs for setpoints (analog signals) e.g.:
Selection of frequency setpoint Selection of main setpoint Selection of additional setpoint
The parameters, combined in a command data set, are designated with [x] in the parameter list in the index field. Index: Pxxxx[0] : 1st command data set (CDS) Pxxxx[1] : 2nd command data set (CDS) Pxxxx[2] : 3rd command data set (CDS)
NOTE A complete list of all of the CDS parameters can be taken from the parameter list.
It is possible to parameterize up to three command data sets. This makes it easier to toggle between various pre-configured signal sources by selecting the appropriate command data set. A frequent application involves, for example, the ability to toggle between automatic and manual operation. MICROMASTER has an integrated copy function which is used to transfer command data sets. This can be used to copy CDS parameters corresponding to the particular application. The copy operation is controlled with P0809 as follows (refer to Fig. 3-9): 1. P0809[0] = Number of the command data set which is to be copied (source) 2. P0809[1] = Number of the command data set into which data is to be copied (target) 3. P0809[2] = 1 Copying is started Copying has been completed, if P0809[2] = 0.
MICROMASTER 440
62
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
P0809[0] = 0 P0809[1] = 2 P0809[2] = 1
1. CDS 3. CDS Start copy
[0] P0700 P0701 P0702 P0703 P0704
[1]
[2]
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
P2253 P2254 P2264 1. CDS 2. CDS 3. CDS
Fig. 3-9
Copying from CDS
The command data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameter P0810 and P0811, whereby the active command data set is displayed in parameter r0050 (refer to Fig. 3-10). Changeover is possible both in the "Read" as well as in the "Run" states.
Selection of CDS
BI: CDS bit 1 P0811 (0:0) BI: CDS b0 loc/rem P0810 (0:0)
3 2 1 0 t Switch-over time aprox. 4 ms 3 2 1 0 t Switch-over time aprox. 4 ms
CO/BO: Act CtrlWd2 r0055 .15 r0055 .15 CO/BO: Act CtrlWd1 r0054 .15 r0054 .15
CDS active r0050
Fig. 3-10
Changing-over CDS
63
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
The drive data set (DDS) contains various setting parameters which are of significance for the open-loop and closed-loop control of a drive: Motor and encoder data, e.g.: Select motor type P0300 Rated motor voltage P0304 Main inductance P0360 Select encoder type P0400 Various closed-loop control parameters, e.g.: Fixed frequency 1 P1001 Min. frequency P1080 Ramp-up time P1120 Control mode P1300 The parameters, combined in a drive data set, are designated with an [x] in the parameter list in the index field: Pxxxx[0] : 1st drive data set (DDS) Pxxxx[1] : 2nd drive data set (DDS) Pxxxx[2] : 3rd drive data set (DDS)
NOTE A complete list of all of the DDS parameters can be taken from the parameter list.
It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets. This makes it easier to toggle between various drive configurations (control mode, control data, motors) by selecting the appropriate drive data set. Just like the command data sets, it is possible to copy drive data sets within the MICROMASTER. P0819 is used to control the copy operation as follows: 1. P0819[0] = Number of the drive data set which is to be copied (source) 2. P0819[1] = Number of the drive data set into which data is to be copied (target) 3. P0819[2] = 1 Copying is started Copying has been completed, if P0819[2] = 0.
1. DDS 3. DDS Start copy
P0819[0] = 0 P0819[1] = 2 P0819[2] = 1
[0] P0005 P0291 P0300 P0304 P0305
[1]
[2]
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
P2484 P2487 P2488 1. DDS 2. DDS 3. DDS
Fig. 3-11
Copying from DDS
Drive data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameter P0820 and P0821 whereby the active drive data set is displayed in parameter r0051 (refer to Fig.
MICROMASTER 440
64
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3-12). Drive data sets can only be changed-over in the "Ready" state and this takes approx. 50 ms.
Drive running Drive ready t Selection of DDS
BI: DDS bit 1 P0821 (0:0) BI: DDS bit 0 P0820 (0:0) CO/BO: Act CtrlWd2 r0055 .05 r0055 .05 CO/BO: Act CtrlWd2 r0055 .04 r0055 .04
3 2 1 0 t Switch-over time aprox. 50 ms 3 2 1 0 t Switch-over time aprox. 50 ms
DDS active r0051[1]
Fig. 3-12
Changing-over DDS
65
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.1.4
Reference quantities
Parameter range: P2000 r2004 Physical quantities are normalized or de-normalized by the frequency inverter when data is output or is being entered. This conversion is undertaken by the particular interface using the reference quantities. The normalization / denormalization is carried-out for the following interfaces:
Table 3-5 Interafce
Analog input Current input Voltage input Analog output Current output Voltage output USS CB
Normalized interfaces 100 %

20 mA 10 V 20 mA 10 V 4000 h 4000 h
Further, for a BICO connection, a normalization is carried-out if the connector output (CO) represents a physical quantity and the connector input (CI) a normalized (percentage) quantity (e.g. PID controller). De-normalization is carriedout if the inverse situation exists. This normalization / de-normalization should be carefully taken into consideration, especially for the free function blocks (FFBs). Reference quantities (normalization quantities) are intended to allow setpoint and actual value signals to be represented in a standard fashion (normalization / denormalization of physical quantities such as setpoint and actual frequency). This also applies for permanently set parameters that are entered as a "percentage". A value of 100 % corresponds to a process data value PZD of 4000 h (USS or CB) or a current / voltage value of 20 mA / 10 V (analog input / output). The following reference parameters and permanently saved reference values are available:
Table 3-6 Parameter
P2000 P2001 P2002 P2003 r2004 -
Normalization functions Designation

Reference frequency Reference voltage Reference current Reference torque Reference power Reference speed Reference temperature Reference energy
Value (100 % / 4000 h)

P2000 P2001 P2002 P2003 * P2000 * P2003 P2000 * 60 / r0313 100 C 100 kWh
Units
Hz V A Nm kW RPM C kWh
MICROMASTER 440
66
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Example
Using the reference frequency P2000 as example, normalization / de-normalization is demonstrated via the serial interface "USS at BOP link". If the connection between two BICO parameters is closed (directly using the BICO parameters or indirectly using P0719 or P1000), that have different representation types (normalized representation (hex) or physical representation (Hz)), then in the frequency inverter, the following normalization is made to the target value:
r0021 P2016 [0] [1] [2] [3] y[Hex] r2015 [0] [1] [2] [3] x[Hex] P1070 y[Hz] =
USS-PZD BOP link
y[Hex] =
r0021[Hz] 4000[Hex ] P2000[Hz]
x[Hz]
USS-PZD BOP link
r2015[1] P2000 4000[Hex]
y[Hz]
Fig. 3-13
Normalization / de-normalization
Note Analog values are limited to 10 V or 20 mA. A maximum of 100 % referred to the corresponding reference values can be output / entered as long as no DAC/ADC scaling is made (factory setting). Setpoints and actual value signals via serial interface:
When transferring using the PZD part, they are limited to the value 7FFF h. This is the reason that the maximum value is 200 % referred to the reference value. When transferring data using the PKW part, they are transferred dependant on the data type and the units. Parameter P1082 (max. frequency) limits the frequency in the frequency inverter independent of the reference frequency. When changing P1082 (factory setting: 50 Hz), this is the reason that P2000 should always be adapted (factory setting: 50 Hz). If, e.g. for a NEMA motor, the parameter is set to 60 Hz, and no changes are made regarding P2000, then the analog setpoint / actual value is limited to 100 % or a setpoint / actual value signal at 4000 h is limited to 50 Hz!
67
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.2
Operator panels for MICROMASTER

MICROMASTER drive units can be optionally equipped with a BOP (Basic Operator Panel) or AOP (Advanced Operator Panel). The AOP distinguishes itself as a result of a plain text display which simplifies operator control, diagnostics as well as also commissioning (start-up).
BOP
Fig. 3-14 Operator panels
AOP
3.2.1
Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel)

The BOP, available as option, allows drive inverter parameters to be accessed. In this case, the Status Display Panel (SDP) must be removed and the BOP either inserted or connected in the door of a cabinet using a special mounting kit (Operator panel door mounting set) (refer to the Attachment A). Parameter values can be changed using the BOP. This allows the MICROMASTER drive unit to be set-up for a particular application. In addition to the keys (refer to Section 3.2.3), it includes a 5-digit LCD display on which the parameter numbers rxxxx and Pxxxx, parameter values, parameter units (e.g. [A], [V], [Hz], [s]), alarm Axxxx or fault messages Fxxxx as well as setpoints and actual values.
NOTE Contrary to the AOP, for the BOP, parameters do not have to be set or taken into consideration when establishing the communications between the BOP and drive inverter. A BOP does not have a local memory. This means that it is not possible to save a parameter set on the BOP.
MICROMASTER 440
68
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.2.2
Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel)

An AOP (this is available as option) has the following additional functions with respect to a BOP: Multi-language and multi-line plain text display Units are additionally displayed, such as [Nm], [C], etc. Active parameters, fault messages, etc. are explained Diagnostics menu to support troubleshooting The main menu is directly called by simultaneously pressing keys Fn and P Timer with 3 switching operations per entry Up to 10 parameter sets can be downloaded / saved Communications between an AOP and MICROMASTER are realized using the USS protocol. An AOP can be connected to the BOP link (RS 232) as well as to the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter. Multi-point capable coupling to control (open-loop) and visualize up to 31 MICROMASTER drive inverters. The USS bus must, in this case, be configured and parameterized via the drive inverter terminals of the COM link interface. Please refer to Sections 3.2.3, 3.2.4 and the AOP Manual for additional details.
NOTE Contrary to the BOP, for the AOP, the communications parameters of the particular interface must be taken into account. When inserting / connecting to the drive inverter, the AOP automatically changes the parameter P2012 (USS-PZD length) to 4 corresponding to the interface. COM link: P2012[0] BOP link: P2012[1] For DriveMonitor, the default value for the USS-PZD length is set to 2. This results in a conflict if the AOP and the DriveMonitor are operated, alternating, at the same interface. Remedy: Increase the USS-PZD length to 4.
69
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.2.3
Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP)

Function Status display Effects
Operator panel/key
The LCD indicates the settings which the drive inverter is presently using. The drive inverter is started by pressing the key. This key is de-activated in the default setting. Parameter P0700 or P0719 should be changed as follows to activate the key: BOP: P0700 = 1 or P0719 = 10 ... 16 AOP: P0700 = 4 or P0719 = 40 .... 46 on the BOP link P0700 = 5 or P0719 = 50 .... 56 on the COM link OFF1 When this key is pressed, the motor comes to a standstill within the selected ramp-down time. It is de-activated in the default setting; to activate refer to the "Start motor" key. OFF2 The motor coasts down to a standstill by pressing the key twice (or pressing once for a longer period of time). This function is always activated. To reverse the direction of rotation of the motor, press this key. The opposing direction is displayed using the minus character (-) or by the flashing decimal point. In the default setting this function is de-activated; to activate it refer to the "Start motor" key. In the "Ready to power-on" state, when this key is pressed, the motor starts and rotates with the pre-set jog frequency. The motor stops when the key is released. When the motor is rotating, this key has no effect. This key can be used to display additional information. If you press the key during operation, independent of the particular parameter, for two seconds, then the following data is displayed: 1. Voltage of the DC current link (designated by d units V). 2. Output current (A) 3. Output frequency (Hz) 4. Output voltage (designated by o units V). 5. The value, selected in P0005 (if P0005 is configured so that one of the above pieces of data is displayed (1 to 4), then the associated value is not re-displayed). The displays mentioned above are run-through one after the other by pressing again. Step function Starting from any parameter (rXXXX or PXXXX), if the key Fn is briefly pressed, then a jump is immediately made to r0000. You can then, when required, change an additional parameter. After returning to r0000, when key Fn is pressed, then the system returns to the starting point. Acknowledgement If alarm and fault messages are present, then these can be acknowledged by pressing key Fn.
Start motor
Stop motor
Direction reversal Jog motor
Functions
Parameter access Increase value Reduce value
Parameters can be accessed by pressing this key. When this key is pressed, the displayed value is increased. When this key is pressed, the displayed value is decreased. Calls the AOP menu prompting (this is only available for AOP).
+
Fig. 3-15
AOP menu Operator panel keys
MICROMASTER 440
70
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.2.4
Changing parameters using the operator panel

The way that parameter P0719 can be changed will now be described; please use this description as a basis when setting all of the other parameters using the BOP.
Changing P0004 parameter filter function

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6
Press Press Press level in order to access the parameter until P0004 is displayed in order to reach the parameter value
Result on the display
Press or required value Press the value
in order to obtain the
to acknowledge the value and to save
The user can only see the command parameters.
Changing an indexed parameter P0719 selecting the command/frequency setpoint

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Press Press Press Press value Press value Press the value Press in order to access the parameter until P0719 is displayed in order to reach the parameter value in order to display the currently set
Result on the display
or
in order to obtain the required
to acknowledge the value and to save
until r0000 is displayed
Press in order to return to the operating display (the display which the customer has defined)
Fig. 3-16
Changing parameters using the BOP
NOTE
The BOP sometimes display when changing parameter values. This means that the drive inverter is presently handling another higher-priority task.
71
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.3
Block diagram
PE 1/3 AC 200 - 240 V 3 AC 380 - 480 V 3 AC 500 - 600 V
1 2
SI PE L/L1, N/L2 or L/L1, N/L2,L3 or L1, L2, L3
+10 V 0V ADC1+
4.7 k
ADC14
A/D
BOP link
RS232
ADC2+
10
ADC2-
A/D
150.00
Hz
External 24 V
DIN1
5
11
I 0
Jog
Fn
DIN1
5
BOP/AOP
DIN2
6 6
DIN2
~
Opto Isolation
DIN3
7 7
DIN3 DIN4
8 8
=
Frame sizes A to F
B+/DC+
DIN4 DIN5
16 16
DIN5 DIN6
17 17
R
BDC-
DIN6
or NPN
28
9 28
Motor PTC KTY84
PTCA
14
PTCB
15
A/D
Frame sizes FX and GX

CPU
DCNA DCPA DCNS
DAC1+ 0 - 20 mA max. 500

12
DAC113
D/A
DCPS
=
DAC2+ DAC2-
0 - 20 mA max. 500
26 27
D/A
3~
60 Hz
COM
20
Relay1
NO NC
Not used
19 18
50 Hz 1 2 DIP switch (on Control Board)
30 V DC / 5 A (resistive) 250 V AC / 2 A (inductive)
COM Relay2
22 21
NO
COM
25
0 - 20 mA current 0 - 10 V voltage
ADC ADC 1 2 DIP switch (on I/O Board) 1 2
Relay3
NO NC P+
24 23 29
N30
RS485
COM link
PE
automatic
CB Option
U,V,W
Fig. 3-17
MICROMASTER 440 block diagram
MICROMASTER 440
72
Connection for dv/dt filter
External braking module connection
+ _ 24 V
PNP
Output +24 V max. 100 mA (isolated) Output 0 V max. 100 mA (isolated)
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.4
Factory setting
The MICROMASTER drive unit is shipped from the plant with a Status Display Panel (SDP, refer to Fig. 3-18). The SDP has two LEDs on the front panel which display the operating state of the drive inverter (refer to Section 4.1). When MICROMASTER is shipped from the plant with the SDP functioning, it can be operated without any additional parameterization. In this case, the drive inverter default settings (which depend on the drive inverter type / size) match the following data of a 4pole motor: Rated motor power P0307 Rated motor voltage P0304 Rated motor current P0305 Rated motor frequency P0310 (We recommend a Siemens standard motor.) Further, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Control (ON/OFF command) via digital inputs Setpoint input via analog input 1 Induction motor Self-cooled motor Motor overload factor Min. frequency Max. frequency Ramp-up time Ramp-down time Linear V/f characteristic
Table 3-7
Digital inputs Command source Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input 8
Fig. 3-18
Status Display Panel (SDP)
(refer to Table 3-7) P1000 = 2 P0300 = 1 P0335 = 0 P0640 = 150 % P1080 = 0 Hz P1082 = 50 Hz P1120 = 10 s P1121 = 10 s P1300 = 0
Pre-assignment of the digital inputs

Terminals 5 6 7 8 16 17 Via ADC1 Via ADC2 Parameter P0700 = 2 P0701 = 1 P0702 = 12 P0703 = 9 P0704 = 15 P0705 = 15 P0706 = 15 P0707 = 0 P0708 = 0 ON / OFF1 Reversing Fault acknowledge Fixed setpoint (direct) Fixed setpoint (direct) Fixed setpoint (direct) Digital input disabled Digital input disabled Function Terminal strip Active Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
73
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
If the various prerequisites are fulfilled and the appropriate conditions present, then after the motor has been connected and the power connected, then the following is possible with the factory setting: The motor can be started and stopped (via DIN1 with external switch) The direction of rotation can be reversed (via DIN2 with external switch) Faults reset (via DIN3 with external switch) A frequency setpoint can be entered (via ADC1 with external potentiometer default setting of the ADC: Voltage input) The frequency actual value can be output (via D/A converter, D/A converter output: current output) The potentiometer and the external switches can be connected through the drive inverter internal power supply, as shown in Fig. 3-19.
Analog output
Pre-assignment of the digital inputs DIN1 to DIN3, refer to Table 3-7.
Fig. 3-19
Recommended wiring for the factory setting
If settings have to be made which go beyond the factory setting, then depending on the complexity of the application, when commissioning the drive system, the particular function description as well as the parameter list including function charts must be carefully taken into consideration.
MICROMASTER 440
74
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5
Commissioning
A differentiation is made between the following scenarios when commissioning MICROMASTER: 50/60 Hz changeover Quick commissioning Motor data identification Calculating the motor / control data Series commissioning Commissioning the application
Start commissioning Carry-out checklist
NEMA motor 60 Hz / hp ? Section 3.5.2 no Complete parameter list of a commissioning available ?
yes 50/60 Hz setting Section 3.5.1
no Quick commissioning Section 3.5.3
yes
no
Is the moment of inertia of the motor and load known ?
yes P0341 = ? P0342 = ? P0344 = ? P0340 = 1 Series commissioning Section 3.5.7 yes Enter motor equivalent circuit diagram data Section 3.5.4
Motor equivalent circuit diagram data known ? Motor data identification Section 3.5.5 no
Commissioning the application Section 3.5.6
End of commissioning
Fig. 3-20
Procedure when commissioning
75
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
When commissioning, initially, a quick or series commissioning should be carriedout. The actual application should only be commissioned if the drive inverter motor combination provides a satisfactory result. If the drive is to be commissioned from a defined state, then the drive inverter can be reset to the initial state when it left the plant. This is done as follows: Reset parameters to the factory setting
Check list
The following check list should help you to commission MICROMASTER without any problems and to guarantee a high degree of availability: When handling the drive unit, carefully observe all of the ESD measures. All of the screws must have been tightened up to their specified torque. All connectors / option modules must have been correctly inserted and locked / screwed into place. The DC link pre-charging has been completed. All of the components are grounded/earthed at the points provided and all of the shields have been connected. MICROMASTER drive units have been designed for defined mechanical, climatic and electrical ambient conditions. It is not permissible that the specified limit values are exceeded in operation and when the drive units are being transported. The following must be especially carefully observed:
Line supply conditions Pollutant stressing Gases which can have a negative impact on the function Ambient climatic conditions Storage / transport Shock stressing Vibration stressing Ambient temperature Installation altitude
In addition to carrying-out all of the installation work, an important prerequisite for successful commissioning is that the drive inverter is not disconnected from the line supply while being parameterized. If a line supply failure interrupts commissioning, then inconsistencies can occur regarding the parameterization. In this case, it is important that the commissioning is re-started (possibly reset and establish the original factory settings (refer to Section 3.5.9)).
NOTE When using output reactors, the pulse frequency may not be set higher than 4 kHz. The following parameter setting is mandatory when using an output reactor: P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1
MICROMASTER 440
76
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.1
50/60 Hz setting
The frequency setting made in the factory can be adapted to the North American market, without requiring any parameterization using an operator panel or PC tool using the DIP50/60 switch (refer to Fig. 3-21) under the I/O board (refer to the Appendix C when removing the I/O board).
Remove I/O board
DIP50/60
Fig. 3-21
DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz
The switch determines the value of parameter P0100 corresponding to the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-22). Besides P0100 = 2, after the power supply voltage has been switched-in, the DIP50/60 switch determines the 50/60 Hz setting (value of parameter P0100).
Quick commissioning P0010 = 1
Power cycle
P0100 = 2 ? no
yes
yes
P0100 = 2 ? no
no
P0100 = 1 ? yes
DIP2 = OFF ? yes
no
Power in kW Frequency 50 Hz P0100 = 0
Power in kW Frequency 60 Hz P0100 = 2
Power in hp Frequency 60 Hz P0100 = 1
Fig. 3-22
Mode of operation of the DIP50/60 switch in conjunction with P0100
77
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
By changing the setting of DIP50/60 switch, after the drive inverter has been powered-down/powered-up, the parameters for the rated motor frequency P0310, max. frequency P1082 and reference frequency P2000 are automatically pre-set. In addition, the rated motor parameters as well as all of the other parameters which depend on the rated motor parameters, are reset. The units of the power parameters are, depending on P0100, are either interpreted as kW value or hp value.
NOTE Switch DIP2(1) (refer to Fig. 3-21) under the I/O board has no function.
3.5.2
Motor circuit
In order to ensure a straightforward, successful commissioning, it is important that the circuit connection in the motor terminal box (refer to Fig. 3-23) matches the rated motor voltage entered in P0304 or the rated motor current P0305.
IEC Motor W2 W2 U1 U2 V1 V2 U1 W1 V1 W1 U2 V2
U1
U1
V1 W1 Delta connection
V1 W1 Star connection
e.g.: Volts 230 V (Delta connection) / 400 V (Star connection)

NEMA Motor T1 U V W Connected together T4-T5-T6 T1-T7 T2-T8 T3-T9 Connection YY Y T3 T6T9 T4 T7 T8 T5 T1
Volts low high
T1-T7 T2-T8 T3-T9 T1 T2 T3
e.g.: Volts 230 V YY (low) / 460 V Y (high)
T2
Volts low high Fig. 3-23
Connected together T4-T7 T5-T8 T6-T9
Connection
T1-T6-T7 T2-T4-T8 T3-T5-T9 T1 T2 T3
T9 T6 T3
T4 T7 T2
T8 T5
Motor terminal box
MICROMASTER 440
78
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The following must be noted when entering the rating plate data or the ESB data: The outer conductor voltage/phase-to-phase voltage (voltage U12 between outer conductors L1, L2) and the outer conductor current (phase current) I1 are always specified on the rating plate. The rated motor voltage P0304 and the rated motor current P0305 must always be entered according to the motor circuit configuration (either delta/star circuit configuration). If rated motor data that are available (P0304, P0305) are not consistent with the motor circuit configuration, then an appropriate conversion should be made which is then entered. If equivalent circuit diagram data (P0350, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360) is available, then these should be entered according to the motor circuit configuration. If there is no consistency between the motor circuit configuration and equivalent circuit diagram data, then the equivalent circuit diagram data should be converted and entered corresponding to the data on the rating plate (P0304, P0305).
1 U12 U1N 2 3 I1 = I2 = I3 U12 = U23 = U31 = 3 U1 U12 = 2 Z I1 1 3 Z I1 I1N Z N Z 2 3 I12 = I23 = I31 = U12 = U23 = U31 U12 2 = Z 3 I1 1 U12 I12 Z I1
I1, = U12, =
I1,Y 3 U12, Y
1 3
I1
Z12, =
Z12,Y 3
Fig. 3-24
Star / delta circuit configurations
NOTE The precise equivalent circuit diagram data are of extreme important regarding the stability of the closed-loop vector control and for the voltage boost applied to the V/f characteristic. Equivalent circuit diagram data can only be estimated from the rating plate data; this is the reason that equivalent circuit diagram data is either determined - using the motor data identification (refer to Chapter 0), or - is entered from a motor data sheet that may be available (refer to Chapter 0). NOTE The MICROMASTER series of drive units is not available for 3-ph. 690 V AC.
79
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
87 Hz characteristic
When a motor with a delta circuit configuration (e. g. VN, motor = 230 V) is fed from a frequency inverter, where the rated voltage corresponds to the star circuit configuration (e.g. 400 V frequency inverter), then it is important to proceed as follows and observe the following: The motor must have the appropriate voltage strength. Above the rated motor frequency, the iron losses in the motor increase overproportionally. This is the reason that above this frequency, the thermal motor torque should be reduced. For the quick commissioning, the rating plate data for the delta circuit configuration should be entered or the rating plate must be appropriately converted. The drive inverter must be designed for the higher current (delta circuit configuration). The 87 Hz characteristic is independent of the control type and can therefore be used both for V/f control as well as for closed-loop vector control. When using the 87 Hz characteristic, the mechanical motor limits must be taken into account (refer to Catalog M11). For the 87 Hz characteristic, the ratio between the voltage and frequency (V/f characteristic) remain constant. This is the reason that the following relationships apply:
U UN1 (400 V) UN (230 V) PN1 = f N1 = UN1 PN UN UN1 f N UN P = power f = frequency n = speed p = pole pair No.
f fN(50 Hz) fN1(87 Hz)
s 60 min ( nN1 = f N1 f N ) + n p
Fig. 3-25 Table 3-8
V/f characteristic Example 1LA7060-4AB10

Delta circuit configuration 87 Hz characteristic 400 V 0.73 A 207 W 0.75 87 Hz 2460 RPM 2 Star circuit configuration 400 V 0.42 A 120 W 0.75 50 Hz 1350 RPM 2
P0304 P0305 P0307 P0308 P0310 P0311 P0314
Rated motor voltage Rated motor current Rated motor power Cos Rated motor frequency Rated motor speed Motor pole pairs
230 V 0.73 A 120 W 0.75 50 Hz 1350 RPM 2
Contrary to the BOP, AOP operator panels or the commissioning program DriveMonitor, the STARTER commissioning (start-up) program offers a mask-orientated quick commissioning, which is especially advantageous for users who are using MICROMASTER for the first time. On the other hand, BOP, AOP and DriveMonitor offer, in conjunction with the drive inverter, parameter-orientated quick commissioning where the user is navigated through the menu tree mentioned.
MICROMASTER 440
80
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.3
Quick commissioning
If there is still no appropriate parameter set for the drive, then a quick commissioning must be carried-out for the closed-loop Vector control and for the V/f control including a motor data identification routine. The following operator units can be used to carry-out quick commissioning: BOP (option) AOP (option) PC Tools (with commissioning program STARTER, DriveMonitor) When the quick commissioning is carried-out, the motor drive inverter is basically commissioned; the following data must be obtained, modified or entered before quick commissioning is started: Enter the line supply frequency Enter the rating plate data Command / setpoint sources Min. / max. frequency or ramp-up / ramp-down time Closed-loop control mode Motor data identification
Parameterizing the drive with BOP or AOP

The frequency inverter is adapted to the motor using the quick commissioning function and important technological parameters are set. The quick commissioning shouldn't be carried-out if the rated motor data saved in the frequency inverter (4-pole 1LA Siemens motor, star circuit configuration frequency inverter (FU)specific) match the rating plate data. Parameters, designated with a * offer more setting possibilities than are actually listed here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities.
NOTE
Parameter P0308 or P0309 can only be viewed on the BOP or AOP if P0003 2. Depending on the setting of parameter P0100, either P0308 or P0309 is displayed. The value entered into P0307 and all of the other power data depending on P0100 are either interpreted as kW or hp value.
START
Factory setting User access level * 1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters 2 Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions 3 Expert (For expert use only) Parameter filter * 0 All parameters 2 Inverter 3 Motor 4 Speed sensor
1
P0003 = 3
P0004 = 0
81
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
P0010 = 1
Commissioning parameter * 0 Ready 1 Quick commissioning 30 Factory setting (refer to Section 3.5.9)
NOTE P0010 should be set to 1 in order to parameterize the data of the motor rating plate.
P0100 =... P0100 = 1, 2 P0100 = 0
0 Europe/ North America (enters the line supply frequency) 0 Europe [kW], frequency default 50 Hz 1 North America [hp], frequency default 60 Hz 2 North America [kW], frequency default 60 Hz NOTE For P0100 = 0 or 1, the setting of switch DIP50/60 determines the value of P0100 (refer to Section 3.5.1).
OFF = kW, 50 Hz ON = hp, 60 Hz

P0205 =... P0205 =... Inverter application (enters the required torque) 0 Constant torque (e.g. compressors, processing machines) 1 Variable torque (e.g. pumps, fans) NOTE This parameter is only effective for drive inverters 5.5 kW / 400 V
0
P0300 =...
1 P0300 =... Select motor type 1 Asynchronous motor (induction motor) 2 Synchronous motor NOTE For P0300 = 2 (synchronous motor), only the V/f control types (P1300 < 20) are permitted.
FU-spec. P0304 =... P0304 =... Rated motor voltage (Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating plate) The rated motor voltage on the rating plate must be checked, regarding the star/delta circuit configuration to ensure that it matches with the circuit connection configured at the motor terminal board
P0310 P0304
P0305 =... P0305 =... Rated motor current (Nominal motor current [A] from rating plate)
FU-spec.
FU-spec. P0307 P0305 P0307 =... P0307 =... Rated motor power P0308 P0311 (Nominal motor power [kW/hp] Example of a typical motor rating plate (data for from rating plate) If P0100 = 0 or 2, value will be in kW. a delta circuit configuration). The precise definition and explanation of this If P0100 = 1, value will be in in hp. data is specified in DIN EN 60 034-1.
P0308 =...
P0308 =... Rated motor cosPhi (Nominal motor power factor (cos ) from rating plate) If the setting is 0, the value is automatically calculated P0100 = 1,2: P0308 no significance, no entry required.
FU-spec.
P0309 =... P0309 =... Rated motor efficiency (Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate) Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. P0100 = 0: P0309 no significance, no entry required.
FU-spec.
MICROMASTER 440
82
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
P0310 =...
Rated motor frequency (Nominal motor frequency in [Hz] from rating plate) Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
50.00 Hz
P0311 =...
FU-spec. Rated motor speed (Nominal motor speed in [rpm] from rating plate) Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. NOTE An entry must be made for closed-loop Vector control, V/f control with FCC and for slip compensation. 0.0 Motor magnetizing current (this is entered as a % referred to P0305) Motor magnetizing current as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current). With P0320 = 0, the motor magnetizing current is calculated using P0340 = 1 or using P3900 = 1 - 3 (end of the quick commissioning) and is displayed in parameter r0331.
P0320 = ...
P0335 =...
Motor cooling (Selects motor cooling system used) 0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor 1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan 2 Self-cooled and internal fan 3 Force-cooled and internal fan
P0640 =...
150 % Motor overload factor (Motor overload factor in [%] relative to P0305) This defines the limit of the maximum output current as a % of the rated motor current (P0305). This parameter is set, using P0205 for constant torque, to 150 %, and for variable torque, to 110 %.
P0700 =...
Selection of command source (enters the command source) 0 Factory default setting 1 BOP (keypad) 2 Terminal 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link (control terminals 29 and 30) 6 CB on COM link (CB = communications module)
BOP Terminals USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link Setpoint channel Motor control P0700 = 2 Sequence control
83
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
P1000 =...
Selection of frequency setpoint * (enters the frequency setpoint source) 1 MOP setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 3 Fixed frequency 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link (control terminals 29 and 30) 6 CB on COM link (CB = communications module) 10 No main setpoint + MOP setpoint 11 MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint 12 Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
...
76 77 CB on COM link + Analog setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
MOP Sequence control ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 P1000 = 12 Main setpoint P1000 = 12 Additonal setpoint Setpoint channel Motor control
P1080 =...
0.00 Hz Min. frequency (enters the minimum motor frequency in Hz) Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. 50.00 Hz Max. frequency (enters the maximum motor frequency in Hz) Sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. 10.00 s Ramp-up time (enters the ramp-up time in s) Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used. If a ramp-up time is parameterized which is too low, then this can result in alarm A0501 (current limit value) or the drive inverter being shutdown with fault F0001 (overcurrent). 10.00 s Ramp-down time (enters the deceleration time in s) Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used. If the ramp-down time is parameterized too low, then this can result in alarms A0501 (current limit value), A0502 (overvoltage limit value) or the drive inverter being powered-down with fault F0001 (overcurrent) or F0002 (overvoltage).
P1082 =...
P1120 =...
P1121 =...
MICROMASTER 440
84
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
P1135 =...
5.00 s OFF3 ramp-down time (enters the fast stop ramp-down time in s) Enters the time, for example, with which the motor should be braked from the maximum frequency P1082 down to standstill for an OFF3 command (fast stop). If the ramp-down time is parameterized too low, then this can result in alarms A0501 (current limit value), A0502 (overvoltage limit value) or the drive inverter being shutdown with fault F0001 (overcurrent) or F0002 (overvoltage).
P1300 =...
Control mode (enters the required control mode) 0 V/f with linear characteristic 1 V/f with FCC 2 V/f with parabolic characteristic 3 V/f with programmable characteristic 5 V/f for textile applications 6 V/f with FCC for textile applications 19 V/f control with independent voltage setpoint 20 Sensorless Vector control 21 Vector control with sensor 22 Sensorless Vector torque-control 23 Vector torque-control with sensor Selection of torque setpoint * (enters the source for the torque setpoint) 0 No main setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link (control terminals 29 and 30) 6 CB on COM link (CB = communications module) 7 Analog setpoint 2 Select motor data identification * (refer to Section 0) 0 Disabled
P1500 =...
P1910 = ... P1960 = ...
0 Speed controller optimization * 0 Inhibited In order to optimize the speed controller, the closed-loop vector control (P1300 = 20 or 21) must be activated. After the optimization has been selected (P1960 = 1), Alarm A0542 is displayed. 0 End of quick commissioning (start of the motor calculation) 0 No quick commissioning (no motor calculations) 1 Motor calculation and reset of all of the other parameters, which are not included in the quick commissioning (attribute "QC" = no), to the factory setting 2 Motor calculation and reset of the I/O settings to the factory setting 3 Only motor calculation. The other parameters are not reset. NOTE For P3900 = 1,2,3 P0340 is internally set to 1 and the appropriate data calculated (refer to Section 3.5.4).
P3900 = 1
END
End of the quick commissioning/drive setting If additional functions must be implemented at the drive inverter, please use the Section "Commissioning the application" (refer to Section 3.5.7). We recommend this procedure for drives with a high dynamic response.
85
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
WARNING The motor data identification routine (refer to Section 0) may not be used for loads which are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before the motor data identification run is started, the potentially hazardous load must be carefully secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or by clamping the load using the motor holding brake).
3.5.4
Calculating the motor / control data

The calculation of the internal motor / control data is initiated using parameter P0340 or indirectly using parameter P3900 (refer to Section 3.5.3) or P1910 (refer to Section 0). The functionality of parameter P0340 can, for example, be used if the equivalent circuit diagram data (refer to Fig. 3-26) or the moment of inertia is known. Possible settings for parameter P0340 are described in Table 3-9. Table 3-10 lists which parameters are calculated for the different settings.
Table 3-9
Parameter
P0340 = 0 P0340 = 1
Possible settings for parameter P0340

Description
No calculation is made Starting from the rating plate parameters (P0300 - P0335) the motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters (P0350 - P0369) and the motor weight / moment of inertia (P0344, P0341) are determined. The V/f- / vector control parameters and reference quantities are then pre-assigned (this includes all calculations from P0340 = 2,3,4). Starting from the rating plate parameters, the motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters (P0350 - P0369) are calculated (without any additional pre-assignments being made). Starting from the motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters (P0350 - P0369) and motor weight / moment of inertia, moment of inertia ratio (P0344, P0341, P0342), the V/f- / vector control parameters are determined (contains all of the calculations from P0340 = 4). Starting from the motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters (P0350 - P0369) and motor weight / moment of inertia, moment of inertia ratio (P0344, P0341, P0342), the vector control parameters are pre-assigned.
P0340 = 2
P0340 = 3
P0340 = 4
NOTE When exiting the quick commissioning with P3900 > 0 (refer to Section 3.5.3), internally P0340 is set to 1 (complete parameterization). For the motor data identification (refer to Section 0), after the measurement has been completed, internally P0340 is set to 3. Equivalent circuit diagram data always refer to the star circuit configuration equivalent circuit diagram. If data for the delta equivalent circuit diagram are available, then this should first be converted into the star equivalent circuit diagram data before being entered. If equivalent circuit diagram data (P0350, . . ., P0360) is available, then this must be entered according to the motor circuit configuration being used (a star circuit configuration requires star-type equivalent circuit diagram data). If there is no consistency between the motor circuit configuration and the equivalent circuit diagram data, then the equivalent circuit diagram data should be converted according to the motor circuit configuration actually being used (P0350 = P0350Y, etc.).
MICROMASTER 440
86
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Table 3-10
Calculated parameters
P0340 = 1 P0340 = 2 P0340 = 3 P0340 = 4 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
P0341[3] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] P0342[3] Total/motor inertia ratio P0344[3] Motor weight P0346[3] Magnetization time P0347[3] Demagnetization time P0350[3] Stator resistance (line-to-line) P0352[3] Cable resistance P0354[3] Rotor resistance P0356[3] Stator leakage inductance P0358[3] Rotor leakage inductance P0360[3] Main inductance P0362[3] Magnetizing curve flux 1 P0363[3] Magnetizing curve flux 2 P0364[3] Magnetizing curve flux 3 P0365[3] Magnetizing curve flux 4 P0366[3] Magnetizing curve imag 1 P0367[3] Magnetizing curve imag 2 P0368[3] Magnetizing curve imag 3 P0369[3] Magnetizing curve imag 4 P0625[3] Ambient motor temperature P1253[3] Vdc-controller output limitation P1316[3] Boost end frequency P1460[3] Gain speed controller P1462[3] Integral time speed controller P1470[3] Gain speed controller (SLVC) P1472[3] Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) P1520[3] CO: Upper torque limit P1521[3] CO: Lower torque limit P1530[3] Motoring power limitation P1531[3] Regenerative power limitation P1715[3] Gain current controller P1717[3] Integral time current controller P1764[3] Kp of n-adaption (SLVC) P1767[3] Tn of n-adaption (SLVC) P2000[3] Reference frequency P2002[3] Reference current P2003[3] Reference torque P2174[3] Torque threshold M_thresh P2185[3] Upper torque threshold 1 P2186[3] Lower torque threshold 1 P2187[3] Upper torque threshold 2 P2188[3] Lower torque threshold 2 P2189[3] Upper torque threshold 3 P2190[3] Lower torque threshold 3
When calculating the motor / control data using P0340, there are different scenarios (refer to the following flowchart), which can be called-up as a function of the known data.
87
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
START
Factory setting
0 Calculation of motor parameters This parameter is required during commissioning in order to optimize the operating behavior of the drive inverter. For the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1), in addition to the motor / control parameters, parameters are preassigned which refer to the rated motor data (e.g. torque limits and reference quantities for interface signals). A list of the parameters, which are calculated, depending on the setting of P0340, are included in the parameter list. 0 No calculation 1 Complete parameterization 2 Calculation of equivalent circuit data 3 Calculation of V/f and Vector control data 4 Calculation of controller settings only
P0340 = 1
Additional Catalog and/or ECD data known ? no yes P0341 = ... P0342 = ... P0344 = ... ECD data known ? no P0340 = 4 yes
Calculation of motor parameters 4 Calculates the controller setting (refer to parameter P0340)
0
Motor inertia [kgm2] Total/motor inertia ratio Motor weight (entered in kg)
FU-spez. FU-spez. FU-spez.
P0350 = ...
FU-spez. Stator resistance (line-to-line) (entered in ) Stator resistance in of the motor which is connected (from line-to-line). This parameter value also includes the cable resistance. FU-spez. Rotor resistance (entered in ) Defines the rotor resistance of the motor equivalent diagram (phase value). FU-spez. Stator leakage inductance (entered in mH) Defines the stator leakage inductance of the motor equivalent diagram (phase value). FU-spez. Rotor leakage inductance (entered in mH) Defines the rotor leakage inductance of the motor equivalent diagram (phase value). FU-spez. Main inductance (entered in mH) Defines the main (magnetizing) inductance of the motor equivalent diagram (phase value). 0 Calculation of motor parameters 3 Calculation of V/f and Vector control All of the parameters, dependent on the ECD data are calculated and, in addition, the controller settings (P0340 = 4).
P0354 = ... P0356 = ...
P0358 = ...
P0360 = ...
P0340 = 3
END
The motor parameters have been calculated and it is now possible to return to the additional parameterization in the Section 3.5.7 "Commissioning the application".
MICROMASTER 440
88
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.5
Motor data identification

MICROMASTER has a measuring technique which is used to determine the motor parameters: Equivalent circuit data (ECD, refer to Fig. 3-26) P1910 = 1 Magnetizing characteristic (refer to Fig. 3-27)
P1910 = 3
For control-related reasons, we absolutely recommend that the motor data identification is carried-out as, starting from the rating plate data, it is only possible to estimate the equivalent circuit data, the motor cable resistance, the IGBT letthrough voltage and the compensation of IGBT interlocking times. For example, the stator resistance is extremely important for the stability of the closed-loop Vector control and for the voltage boost for the V/f characteristic. The motor data identification routine should be executed, especially if long feeder cables or if thirdparty motors are being used. If the motor data identification routine is being started for the first time, then the following data (refer to Fig. 3-26) is determined, starting from the rating plate data (rated [nominal] data) with P1910 = 1: Equivalent circuit data Motor cable resistance IGBT on-state voltage and compensation of IGBT gating dead times The rating plate data represent the initialization values for the identification. This is the reason that it is necessary to have correct and consistent input of the rating plate data when determining the data specified above (refer to Section 3.5.8).
Stator res. (L2L) 0.00001 ... 2000.00000 [Ohm] P0350.D (4.00000)
Inverter
On-state voltage Gating dead time 0.0 ... 20.0 [V] 0.00 ... 3.50 [us] P1825 (1.4) P1828 (0.50)
Cable
Motor
P0350 = 2(RCable + R S) Cable resistance 0.0 ... 120.0 [Ohm] P0352.D (0.0)
Rotor leak.induct. 0.0 ... 1000.0 P0358.D (10.0) Stator leak.induct Rotor resistance 0.00001 ... 1000.00000 0.0 ... 300.0 [Ohm] P0356.D (10.00000) P0354.D (10.0)
R Cable C Cable
RS
L?S LM
L?R
RR
Main inductance 0.0 ... 3000.0 P0360.D (10.0)
Fig. 3-26
Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD)
In addition to the equivalent circuit data, the motor magnetizing characteristic (refer to Fig. 3-26) can be determined using the motor data identification (P1910 = 3). If the motor-drive inverter combination is operated in the field-weakening range, then this characteristic should be determined, especially when Vector control is being used. As a result of this magnetizing characteristic, MICROMASTER can, in the field-weakening range, more precisely calculate the current which is generating the field and in turn achieve a higher torque accuracy.
89
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
[%] P0365 P0364 100 % P0363 P0362
0
i [A] i [%] = r0331
P0366 P0367 100 % P0368
P0369
i [%]
Fig. 3-27
Magnetizing characteristic
After selecting the motor data identification using parameter P1910, alarm A0541 is immediately generated. The motor identification routine is started by the ON command and different excitation signals are impressed in the motor (DC and AC voltages). This measurement is carried-out with the motor at a standstill and it takes, including the data calculation per selection (P1910 = 1.3) between 20 s ... 4 min. The identification time depends on the motor and increases with its size (this takes approx. 4 min for a 200 kW motor). The motor data identification routine must be carried-out with the motor in the cold condition so that the motor resistance values saved can be assigned to the parameter of the ambient temperature P0625. Only then is correct temperature adaptation of the resistances possible during operation. The motor data identification routine operates with the results of the "Complete parameterization" P0340 = 1 or the motor equivalent diagram data which was last saved. The results become increasingly better the more times that the identification routine is executed (up to 3 times).
WARNING It is not permissible to carry-out the motor identification routine for loads which are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before starting the motor data identification routine, the potentially hazardous load must be secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or clamping the load using the motor holding brake). When starting the motor data identification routine, the rotor can move into a preferred position. This is more significant for larger motors.
MICROMASTER 440
90
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE The equivalent circuit data (P0350, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360), with the exception of parameter P0350, should be entered as phase values. In this case, parameter P0350 (line-to-line value) corresponds to twice the phase value. Equivalent circuit diagram data always refer to the star circuit configuration equivalent circuit diagram data. If data for the delta equivalent circuit diagram is available, then this data must be converted into the star equivalent circuit diagram data before being entered (refer to Section 0). The motor cable resistance P0352 is defined as phase value During the motor identification routine, the stator resistance and the motor cable resistance are determined and entered into parameter P0350. If a correction is made in parameter P0352, then MICROMASTER defines the motor cable resistance using the following relationship: P0352 = 0.2 * P0350. If the motor cable resistance is known, then the value can be entered into parameter P0352 after the motor data identification. The stator resistance is appropriately reduced as a result of this entry and is therefore more precisely adapted to the actual application. It is not necessary to lock the motor rotor for the motor data identification routine. However, if it is possible to lock the motor rotor during the identification routine (e.g. by closing the motor holding brake), then this should be used to determine the equivalent circuit diagram data. The following formula can be applied to check the correctness of the motor rating plate data:
PN = 3 VN IN cos 3 VN IN cos with PN rated motor power rated motor voltage (star / delta) VN , VN rated motor current (star / delta) IN , IN power factor cos efficiency
Motor data identification routine

START Factory setting
20 C Ambient motor temperature (entered in C) The motor ambient temperature is entered at the instant that motor data is being determined (factory setting: 20 C). The difference between the motor temperature and the motor ambient temperature P0625 must lie in the tolerance range of approx. 5 C. If this is not the case, then the motor data identification routine can only be carried-out after the motor has cooled down.
P0625 = ?
| Motor temp. - P0625| 5 C ? yes no Allow the motor to cool down
91
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
P1910 = 1 A0541
0 Select motor data identification with P1910 = 1 p1910 = 1: Identifies the motor parameter with parameter change. These are accepted and applied to the controller. When p1910 = 1 is selected, Alarm A0541 (motor data identification active) is output, and internally p0340 is set to 3.
EIN
Starts the motor data identification run with p1910 = 1 The measuring operation is initiated with the continuous (steady-state) ON command. The motor aligns itself and current flows through it. Diagnostics is possible using r0069 (CO: Phase current). After the motor data identification routine has been completed, p1910 is reset (p1910 = 0, motor data identification routine inhibited) and Alarm A0541 is cleared (deleted).
AUS1 P1910 = 3 A0541 EIN
In order to set the frequency converter into a defined state, an OFF1 command must be issued before the next step.
0 Select motor data identification with P1910 = 3 p1910 = 3: Identifies the saturation characteristic with parameter change. When p1910 = 3 is selected, Alarm A0541 (motor data identification active) is output and internally, p0340 is set to 2.
Starts the motor data identification run with P1910 = 3 The measuring operation must be started with a continuous ON command. After the motor identification routine has been completed, p1910 is reset (p1910 = 0, motor data identification routine inhibited) and Alarm A0541 is cleared (deleted).
AUS1
END
In order to set the frequency converter into a defined state, an OFF1 command must be issued before the next step.
If problems occur during the identification run, e.g. the current controller oscillates, then the rating plate data should be re-checked and an approximately correct magnetizing current P0320 entered. The motor data identification routine should then be re-started by calling P0340 = 1 (refer to Section 3.5.4).
MICROMASTER 440
92
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.6
Magnetizing current
The value of the magnetizing current r0331/P0320 has a significant influence on the closed-loop control. This cannot be measured at standstill. This means that the value is estimated for standard 4-pole 1LA7 SIEMENS standard using the automatic parameterization P0340=1 (P0320=0; result in r0331). If the deviation of the magnetizing current is too high, then the values for the magnetizing reactance and those of the rotor resistance will not be able to be accurately determined. Especially for third-party motors it is important that the magnetizing current that is determined, is carefully checked and if required, appropriately corrected. The procedure to manually determine the magnetizing current and to re-calculate the equivalent circuit diagram data when the drive is operated with closed-loop vector control (P1300 = 20/21) is shown in the following.
93
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
START
Quick commissioning Motor data identificationdentif Operation under no-load conditions
Quick commissioning routine Using the quick commissioning routine the frequency inverter is adapted to the motor and important technology parameters are set. Motor data identification routine Using the motor data identification routine motor equivalent circuit diagram data is determined using a measuring technique. Determing the magnetizing current In order to determine the magnetizing current (P0320/r0331), the motor should be accelerated up to approximately 80% of its rated speed under no-load operating conditions. In so doing, the following conditions must be carefully maintained: the vector control must be activated, P1300 = 20.21 no field weakening (r0056.8 = 0) flux setpoint, r1598 = 100 % no efficiency optimization, P1580 = 0 % No-load operation means that the motor is operated without a load (i.e. no coupled driven machine). Under steady-state conditions, a current r0027 is obtained that approximately corresponds to the rated magnetizing current r0331. (the current is always less than the no-load current for a pure V/f control).
Criterium fulfilled ? no yes
Measuring and entering the magnetizing current and therefore the associated new calculation of the equivalent circuit diagram data of the motor is an iterative procedure. It must be repeated at least 2-3 times until the following criteria are fulfilled: The more accurate the value of the magnetizing current that was entered, the better the flux setpoint (r1598=100%) matches the flux actual value (r0084=96..104%) of the observer model. The output Xm adaptation (r1787) of the observer model should be as low as possible. Good values lie between 1-5%. The less that the Xh adaptation of the observer must operate, the sensitivity of the motor parameters after power failures are that much less sensitive. NOTE In order to display r0084 at the BOP/AOP, the LEVEL 4 parameters must be enabled using service parameter P3950=46.
Calculating P0320 Now, the new value can be entered in P0320 from the determined fluxgenerating current component r0029 by applying the following equation. P0320 = r0029 * 100 / P0305
0
P0320 = ...
P0340 = 1
0 Calculating the motor parameters The values of the motor equivalent circuit diagram data are calculated from the entered rating plate data. In addition, the parameters of the controls are pre-set (subsequently optimized) (P0340 = 3).
END
MICROMASTER 440
94
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7
Commissioning the application

After the motor drive inverter combination was commissioned using the quick or series commissioning, in the following step parameters should be adapted and set according to the technological requirements. As an example, the following points should be considered: Functional requirements of the drive inverter (e.g. closed-loop process control with PID controller) Limit values Dynamic requirements Starting torques Load surge requirement Overload Diagnostics If the application includes a function, which is not covered by the quick or series commissioning, then the following sections of the function description or the parameter list should be considered.
Adapting the drive inverter to the application

The parameters designated with * offer more setting possibilities than are listed here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities.
START Factory setting User access level * 1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters 2 Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions 3 Expert (For expert use only)
1
P0003 = 3
3.5.7.1
P2010 =...
Serial Interface (USS)

USS baud rate Sets baud rate for USS communication. USS address Sets unique address for inverter.
6
Possible Settings:
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud 38400 Baud 57600 Baud 76800 Baud 93750 Baud 115200 Baud
P2011 =... P2012 =... P2013 =...
2 USS PZD length Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram. 127 USS PKW length Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.
95
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.2
P0700 =...
Selection of command source

2 Selection of command source Selects digital command source. 0 Factory fault setting 1 BOP (keypad) 2 Terminal 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link BOP Terminals USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link Setpoint channel Motor control P0700 = 2 Sequence control
3.5.7.3
P0701 = ...
Digital input (DIN)

Function digital input 1 Terminal 5 1 ON / OFF1 Possible Settings: 0 Digital input disabled 1 ON / OFF1 2 ON + Reverse / OFF1 12 Function digital input 2 3 OFF2 coast to standstill Terminal 6 4 OFF3 quick ramp-down 9 Fault acknowledge 12 Reverse 10 JOG right 9 Function digital input 3 11 JOG left Terminal 7 12 Reverse 9 Fault acknowledge 13 MOP up (increase frequency) 15 14 MOP down (decrease frequency) Function digital input 4 15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection) Terminal 8 16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON) 15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection) 17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON) 15 21 Local/remote Function digital input 5 25 DC brake enable Terminal 16 29 External trip 15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection) 33 Disable additional freq setpoint 15 99 Enable BICO parameterization Function digital input 6 Terminal 17 15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection) Function digital input 7 Via analog input, Terminal 3 0 Digital input disabled Function digital input 8 Via analog input, Terminal 10 0 Digital input disabled
0 1
P0702 = ...
P0703 = ...
P0704 = ...
P0705 = ...
P0706 = ...
P0707 = 0
ON > 3,9 V, OFF < 1,7 V DIN7 1 2 3 4 DIN8 1 2 10 11

3
P0708 = 0
P0724 = ...
Debounce time for digital inputs Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs. 0 No debounce time 1 2.5 ms debounce time 2 8.2 ms debounce time 3 12.3 ms debounce time
P0725 = ...
1 PNP / NPN digital inputs Change-over (toggles) between high active (PNP) and low active (NPN). This applies to all digital inputs simultaneously. 0 NPN mode ==> low active 1 PNP mode ==> high active
MICROMASTER 440
96
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - PNP (P0725 = 1))

Kl.9 P24 (PNP) Kl.28 0 V (NPN) PNP/NPN DIN 0 ... 1 P0725 (1) Debounce time: DIN 0 ... 3 P0724 (3)
P0701
24 V
Function
0 1 0 1
24 V
&
r0722 r0722 .0
Pxxxx BI: ...
CO/BO: Bin.inp.val 0V
3.5.7.4
P0731 = ... P0732 = ... P0733 = ... P0748 = ...
Digital output (DOUT)

BI: Function of digital output 1 * Defines source of digital output 1. BI: Function of digital output 2 * Defines source of digital output 2. BI: Function of digital output 3 * Defines source of digital output 3.
52.3
52.7
0.0
0 Invert digital output Defines high and low states of relay for a given function.
Common Settings: 52.0 Drive ready 52.1 Drive ready to run 52.2 Drive running 52.3 Drive fault active 52.4 OFF2 active 52.5 OFF3 active 52.6 Switch on inhibit active 52.7 Drive warning active 52.8 Deviation, setpoint / actual value 52.9 Control from PLC (PZD control) 52.A Maximum frequency reached 52.B Alarm: Motor current limiting 52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 52.D Motor overload 52.E Motor direction of rotation, clockwise 52.F Frequency inverter overload 53.0 DC brake active .
CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747.0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
DOUT channel
Invert DOUTs 0 ... 7 P0748 (0) BI: Fct. of DOUT 1
int. 24 V max. 100 mA Kl.9 COM Kl.20 NO NC Kl.19 or Kl.18 Kl.28
Function xxxx.y
rxxxx.y
P0731.C (52:3)
P0731 = xxxx.y
-1
Relay : Text DC 30 V / 5 A AC 250 V / 2 A max. opening / closing time 5 / 10 ms
97
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.5
P1000 =...
Selection of frequency setpoint

Selection of frequency setpoint 0 No main setpoint 1 MOP setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 3 Fixed frequency 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link 7 Analog setpoint 2 10 No main setpoint + MOP setpoint 11 MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint 12 Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
2
76 77
...
CB on COM link Analog setpoint 2
+ Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
NOTE In addition to the main setpoint, a supplementary setpoint can be entered using P1000
Example P1000 = 12 :
P1000 = 12 P1070 = 755 P1070 r0755 P1075 r1050 CI: Main setpoint CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h] CI: Additional setpoint CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP
P1000 = 12 P1075 = 1050
MOP Sequence control ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 P1000 = 12 Main setpoint P1000 = 12 Additonal setpoint Setpoint channel Motor control
P1074 = ... P1075 = ...
BI: Disable additional setpoint Deaktiviert den Zusatzsollwert (ZUSW). CI: Additional setpoint Defines the source of the additional setpoint which is added to the main setpoint. Common settings: 755 Analog input setpoint 1024 Fixed frequency setpoint 1050 MOP setpoint CI: Additional setpoint scaling Defines the source to scale the additional setpoint. Common settings: 1 Scaling of 1.0 (100 %) 755 Analog input setpoint 1024 Fixed frequency setpoint 1050 MOP setpoint
0:0
0:0
P1076 = ...
1:0
MICROMASTER 440
98
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.6
P0756 = ...
Analog input (ADC)

0 ADC type Defines the analog input type and activates the monitoring function of the analog input.
0 Unipolar voltage input (0 to +10 V) 1 Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V) 2 Unipolar current input (0 to 20 mA) 3 Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 mA) 4 Bipolar voltage input (-10 to +10 V) NOTE For P0756 to P0760, the following applies: Index 0 : Analog input 1 (ADC1), terminals 3, 4 Index 1 : Analog input 2 (ADC2), terminals 10, 11
P0757 =... P0758 =...
Value x1 of ADC scaling
0V 0.0 %
P0761 > 0 0 < P0758 < P0760
|| 0 > P0758 > P0760
Value y1 of ADC scaling This parameter represents the value of x1 as a % of P2000 (reference frequency). Value x2 of ADC scaling
% 100 % ASPmax P0760 4000 h
P0759 =... P0760 =...
10 V
Value y2 of ADC scaling 100.0 % This parameter represents the value of x2 as a % of P2000 (reference frequency). Width of ADC deadband 0 V Defines width of deadband on analog input.
P0758 P0757 P0761 P0757 = P0761 ASPmin
10 V x100% P0759 20 mA
V mA
P0761 =...
P0762 = ...
10 ms Delay, ADC signal loss Defines the delay time between the loss of the analog setpoint and fault message F0080 being displayed.
P0757 P0758 P0759 P0760 ADC channel DIP switch
KL3 ADC+ KL4 ADC
P0756
P0753
r0754 P1000 P0761 Setpoint ADC dead zone P0762

T 0
ADC type
A D
ADC type
ADC scaling
r0755
Pxxxx r0752
P0756
P0761
Wire breakage sensing

1.7 V 1
0
F0080 r0751
3.9 V
P0707
r0722 r0722.6
Pxxxx Function
99
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.7
P0771 = ...
Analog output (DAC)

CI: DAC Defines function of the 0 - 20 mA analog output. 21 CO: Output frequency (scaled according to P2000) 24 CO: Frequency inverter output frequency (scaled according to P2000) 25 CO: Output voltage (scaled according to P2001) 26 CO: DC link voltage (scaled according to P2001) 27 CO: Output current (scaled according to P2002) NOTE For P0771 to P0781, the following applies: Index 0 : Analog output 1 (DAC1), terminals 12, 13 Index 1 : Analog output 2 (DAC2), terminals 26, 27
21
P0773 =...
2 ms Smooth time DAC Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for DAC using a PT1 filter.
P0776 = ...
DAC type Defines the analog output type. 0 Current output 1 Voltage output
NOTE P0776 changes the scaling of r0774 (0 20 mA 0 10 V) Scaling parameters P0778, P0780 and the dead zone are always entered in 0 20 mA For the DAC as voltage output, the DAC outputs must be terminated using a 500 resistor
P0777 = ...
0.0 % Value x1 of DAC scaling Defines the output characteristic value x1 as a %. This parameter represents the lowest analog value as a % of P200x (depending on the setting of P0771).
mA 20 P0780 y2
P0778 = ...
0 P0781 Value y1 of DAC scaling This parameter represents the value for P0778 y1 x1 in mA. 100.0 % Value x2 of DAC scaling Defines the output characteristic value x2 as a %. This parameter represents the lowest analog value as a % of P200x (depending on the setting of P0771).
P0779 = ...
P0777 x1
P0779 x2
100 % %
P0780 = ... P0781 = ...
Value y2 of DAC scaling This parameter represents the value for x2 in mA. Width of DAC deadband Sets width of deadband in [mA] for analog output.
P0777 P0788 P0779 P0780
20
DAC channel
r0774 P0781 DAC dead zone
P0773
Function xxx
r0xxx
P0771
P0771 = xxx
DAC scaling
D A
MICROMASTER 440
100
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.8
P1031 =...
Motor potentiometer (MOP)

0 Setpoint memory of the MOP Saves last motor potentiometer setpoint (MOP) that was active before OFF command or power down. 0 MOP setpoint will not be stored 1 MOP setpoint will be stored (P1040 is updated)
P1032 =...
Inhibit negative MOP setpoints 0 Neg. MOP setpoint is allowed 1 Neg. MOP setpoint inhibited Setpoint of the MOP Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control.
P1040 =...
5.00 Hz
MOP ramp-up and ramp-down times are defined by the parameters P1120 and P1121.
Possible parameter settings for the selection of MOP: Selection DIN P0719 = 0, P0700 = 2, P1000 = 1 or P0719 = 1, P0700 = 2 P0719 = 0, P0700 = 1, P1000 = 1 or P0719 = 11 P0719 = 0, P0700 = 4, P1000 = 1 or P0719 = 41 P0719 = 0, P0700 = 5, P1000 = 1 or P0719 = 51 P0719 = 0, P0700 = 6, P1000 = 1 or P0719 = 61 MOP up P0702 = 13 (DIN2) UP button USS control word r2032 Bit13 USS control word r2036 Bit13 CB control word r2090 Bit13 MOP down P0703 = 14 (DIN3) DOWN button USS control word r2032 Bit14 USS control word r2036 Bit14 CB control word r2090 Bit14
BOP USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB
101
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.9
P1001 = ...
Fixed frequency (FF)

0.00 Hz Fixed frequency 1 Can be directly selected via DIN1 (P0701 = 15, 16) 5.00 Hz Fixed frequency 2 Can be directly selected via DIN2 (P0702 = 15, 16) 10.00 Hz Fixed frequency 3 Can be directly selected via DIN3 (P0703 = 15, 16)
P1002 = ...
P1003 = ...
P1004 = ...
P1005 = ...
P1006 = ...
P1007 = ... P1008 = ... P1009 = ... P1010 = ... P1011 = ... P1012 = ... P1013 = ... P1014 = ... P1015 = ... P1016 = ...
When defining the function of the digital inputs 15.00 Hz Fixed frequency 4 (P0701 to P0703), three different types can be Can be directly selected via DIN4 selected for fixed frequencies: (P0704 = 15, 16) 15 = Direct selection (binary-coded) In this particular mode, the appropriate 20.00 Hz Fixed frequency 5 digital input always selects the associated Can be directly selected via DIN5 fixed frequency, e.g.: (P0705 = 15, 16) Digital input 3 = selects fixed frequency 3. If several inputs are simultaneously active, 25.00 Hz Fixed frequency 6 then these are summed. An ON command is Can be directly selected via DIN6 additionally required. (P0706 = 15, 16) 16 = Direct selection + ON command (binary-coded + On / Off1) 30.00 Hz Fixed frequency 7 In this mode, the fixed frequencies are selected as for 15, however these are 35.00 Hz Fixed frequency 8 combined with an ON command. 17 = Binary coded selection + ON command 40.00 Hz Fixed frequency 9 (BCD-coded + On/ Off1) The BCD-coded operating mode is effective for 45.00 Hz digital inputs 1 to 3. Fixed frequency 10
Fixed frequency 11 Fixed frequency 12 Fixed frequency 13 Fixed frequency 14 Fixed frequency 15
50.00 Hz 55.00 Hz 60.00 Hz 65.00 Hz 65.00 Hz
1 Fixed frequency code - Bit 0 Defines the selection method for fixed frequencies.
P1017 = ... P1018 = ... P1019 = ... P1025 = ... P1027 = ...
Fixed frequency code - Bit 1 Fixed frequency code - Bit 2 Fixed frequency code - Bit 3 Fixed frequency code - Bit 4 Fixed frequency code - Bit 5
1 1 1 1 1
1 Direct selection 2 Direct selection + ON command 3 Binary coded selection + ON command NOTE For settings 2 and 3, all parameters P1016 to P1019 must be set to the selected value so that the drive inverter accepts the ON command.
1 2
Direct selection Direct selection + ON command
MICROMASTER 440
102
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.10
p1058 = ...
JOG
5.00 Hz JOG frequency right Frequency in Hz when the motor is rotating clockwise in the jog mode. 5.00 Hz JOG frequency left Frequency in Hz when the motor is rotating counter-clockwise in the jog mode. 10.00 s JOG ramp-up time Ramp-up time in s from 0 to the maximum frequency (p1082). JOG rampup is limited by p1058 or p1059. 10.00 s JOG ramp-down time Ramp-down time in s from the maximum frequency (p1082) to 0.
t p1060 p1061
JOG
f p1082 (fmax) p1058
p1059 = ...
p1060 = ...
p1061 = ...
A0923 DIN BOP USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link Tippen rechts
P1055 (0)
A0923 t
"1" "0" "1"
Tippen links
P1056 (0)
"0" f
P1082 P1058 t
P1060
P1061
P1060
-P1082
P1061
P1059
103
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.11
p1091 = ...
Ramp function generator (RFG)

Skip frequency 1 (entered in Hz) 0.00 Hz Defines skip frequency 1, which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- p1101 (skip frequency bandwidth). Skip frequency 2 Skip frequency 3 Skip frequency 4 Skip frequency bandwidth (entered in Hz) Ramp-up time (enters the accelerating time in s)
0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 2.00 Hz 10.00 s
p1082 (fmax) f1
fout
p1092 = ... p1093 = ... p1094 = ... p1101 = ... p1120 = ...
p1091 Skip frequency

f
p1101 Skip frequency bandwidth fin
p1121 = ...
Ramp-down time (enters the deceleration time in s)
10.00 s
t p1120 p1121
p1130 = ... p1131 = ... p1132 = ... p1133 = ... p1134 = ...
Rump-up initial rounding time (entered in s)
The rounding times are recommended as abrupt responses can be avoided therefore 0.00 s reducing stress and damage to the mechanical Ramp-up final rounding time system. (entered in s) The ramp-up and ramp-down times are Rump-down initial rounding time 0.00 s extended by the component of the rounding ramps. (entered in s)
Ramp-down final rounding time (entered in s) Rounding type 0 Continuous smoothing 1 Discontinuous smoothing
0.00 s 0
0.00 s
p1135 = ...
5.00 s OFF3 ramp-down time Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command.
MICROMASTER 440
104
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.12
p1080 = ...
Reference/limit frequencies
0.00 Hz Min. frequency (entered in Hz) Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. If the setpoint falls below the value of p1080, then the output frequency is set to p1080 taking into account the sign. 50.00 Hz Max. frequency (entered in Hz) Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. If the setpoint exceeds the value p1082, then the output frequency is limited. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. 50.00 Hz Reference frequency (entered in Hz) The reference frequency in Hertz corresponds to a value of 100 %. This setting should be changed if a maximum frequency of higher than 50 Hz is required. It is automatically changed to 60 Hz if the standard 60 Hz frequency was selected using p0100. NOTE This reference frequency effects the setpoint frequency as both the frequency setpoints via 100 % p2000) refer to this value. USS as well as via PROFIBUS (FB100) (4000H hex 1000 V Reference voltage (entered in V) The reference voltage in Volt (output voltage) corresponds to a value of 100 %. NOTE This setting should only be changed if it is necessary to output the voltage with a different scaling. 0.10 A Reference current (entered in A) The reference current in Amps (output current) corresponds to a value of 100 %. Factory setting = 200 % of the rated motor current (P0305). NOTE This setting should only be changed if it is necessary to output the current with a different scaling. 0.12 Mn Reference torque (entered in Nm) The reference torque in Nm corresponds to a value of 100 %. Factory setting = 200 % of the rated motor torque at a constant motor torque determined from the appropriate motor data. NOTE This setting should only be changed if it is necessary to output the torque with a different scaling.
p1082 = ...
p2000 = ...
P2001 = ...
P2002 = ...
P2003 = ...
105
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.13
p0290 = ...
Inverter protection
Inverter overload reaction Selects reaction of inverter to an internal over-temperature. 0 Reduce output frequency 1 Trip (F0004 / F0005) 2 Reduce pulse frequency and output frequency 3 Reduce pulse frequency then trip (F0004)
Inverter monitoring Inverter overload reaction P0290 i_max control (U/f) Current control (SLVC, VC) A0504 A0505 A0506 f_pulse control F0004 F0005
0
r0036
i2t P0294 Heat sink temperature P0292 IGBT temperature P0292
r0037
P0292 =...
15 C Inverter temperature warning Defines the temperature difference (in C) between the Overtemperature trip threshold and the warning threshold of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be changed by the user.
Temperature warning threshold of inverter T_warn Twarn = Ttrip - P0292 Temperature shutdown threshold of inverter T_trip
Temperature A-C D-F F 600 V MM440, Frame Size FX GX 95 kW 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW 200 kW CT CT CT CT CT 80 C 88 C 91 C 80 C 82 C 88 C 75 C 55 C 65 C 75 C 55 C 65 C 75 C 55 C 65 C 75 C 55 C 65 C 75 C 50 C 65 C
Heat sink IGBT Input rectifier Cooling air Control board
110 C -
95 C -
140 C 145 C 145 C 150 C 150 C 145 C 147 C 150 C
P0295 = ...
0s Delay, fan shutdown This defines the delay time in seconds between powering down the frequency inverter and then powering-down the fan. A setting of 0 means that the fan is immediately shut down (powered-down).
3.5.7.14
Motor protection
In addition to the thermal motor protection, the motor temperature is also included in the adaptation of the motor equivalent circuit diagram data. Especially for a high thermal motor load, this adaptation has a significant influence on the degree of stability of the closed-loop vector control. For MM440 the motor temperature can only be measured using a KTY84 sensor. For the parameter setting P0601 = 0,1, the motor temperature is calculated / estimated using the thermal motor model. If the frequency inverter is permanently supplied with an external 24V voltage, then the motor temperature is also tracked/corrected using the motor temperature time constant even when the line supply voltage is switched-out.
MICROMASTER 440
106
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
A high thermal motor load and when the line supply is frequently switchedout/switched-in requires, for closed-loop vector control
that a KTY84 sensor is used, or an external 24V power supply voltage is connected
P0335 = ...
Motor cooling (Selects motor cooling system used) 0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor 1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan 2 Self-cooled and internal fan 3 Force-cooled and internal fan Motor temperature sensor Selects the motor temperature sensor. 0 No sensor 1 PTC thermistor (PTC) 2 KTY84 When "no sensor" or "PTC thermistor (PTC) is selected, the motor temperature is determined on the basis of the value estimated by the thermal motor model.
Fault F0015 5V T1 = 4 s ADC PTC KTY Signal loss detection
0 1 2
P0601 = ...
P0601 = 2
&
1 0
r0052 Bit13
No sensor PTC KTY
Motor temp. reaction
r0035
V 1 0
P0601 P0610
Equivalent circuit data Power dissipation PV,mot
Thermal motor model
r0631 r0632 r0633
P0604
P0604 = ...
130.0 C Alarm threshold, motor overtemperature Defines the alarm threshold for the motor overtemperature protection. This threshold, where either a shutdown (trip) or Imax reduction is initiated (P0610) always lies 10 % above the alarm threshold.
trip = 1.1 warn = 1.1 P0604
warn : Warning threshold (P0604) trip : Trip threshold (max. permissible temperature)
The alarm threshold should be at least 40 C greater than the ambient temperature P0625.
P0604 P0625 + 40 C
P0610 = ...
Inverter temperature reaction Defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold. 0 No reaction, warning only 1 Warning and Imax reduction (results in a lower output frequency) 2 Warning and trip (F0011)
p0640 = ...
150.0 % Motor overload factor [%] Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to p0305 (rated motor current). Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (p0305), whichever is the lower.
107
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.15
P0400 =...
Encoder
0 Select encoder type Selects the encoder type. 0 Inhibited 1 Single-track pulse encoder 2 Two-track pulse encoder
Parameter P0400 = 1 Terminal A A AN P0400 = 2 A B A AN B BN differential single ended Track Encoder output single ended differential
The table shows the values of P0400 as a function of the number of tracks:
In order to guarantee reliable operation, the DIP switches on the encoder module must be set as follows depending on the encoder type (TTL, HTL) and encoder output:
Type TTL (e.g. 1XP8001-2) HTL (e.g. 1XP8001-1) Output single ended 111111 101010 differential 010101 000000
1024
P0408 =... P0491 =...
Encoder pulses per revolution Specifies the number of encoder pulses per revolution. Reaction on speed signal loss Defines the calculation method. 0 No transition 1 Transition into SLVC
P0492 =...
10.00 Hz Allowed speed difference Parameter P0492 defines the frequency threshold for the loss of the encoder signal (fault F0090). CAUTION p0492 = 0 (no monitoring function): With p0492 = 0, the loss of the encoder signal at high frequency as well as at a low frequency is de-activated. As a result, the system does not monitor for the loss of the encoder signal. 10 ms Delay speed loss reaction P0492 is used to detect the loss of the encoder signal at low frequencies. If the motor speed is less than the value of P0492, the loss of the encoder signal is determined using an appropriate algorithm. P0494 defines the delay time between detecting the loss of the speed signal and initiating the appropriate response. CAUTION p0494 = 0 (no monitoring function): With p0494 = 0, the loss of the encoder signal at low frequencies is de-activated. As a result, at these frequencies, a loss of the encoder signal is not detected (loss of the encoder signal at high frequency remains active as long as parameter p0492 > 0).
P0494 =...
MICROMASTER 440
108
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.16
P1300 =...
V/f control
0 Control mode The control type is selected using this parameter. For the "V/f characteristic" control type, the ratio between the frequency inverter output voltage and the frequency inverter output frequency is defined. 0 V/f with linear 1 V/f with FCC 2 V/f with parabolic characteristic 3 V/f with programmable characteristic ( P1320 P1325) 50.00 % Continuous boost (entered in %) Voltage boost as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) and P0350 (stator resistance). P1310 is valid for all V/f versions (refer to P1300). At low output frequencies, the effective resistance values of the winding can no longer be neglected in order to maintain the motor flux.
V Vmax Vn (P0304) actual VBoost
e ag
P1310 =...
Linear V/f Boost voltage Validity range

olt tv
tpu Ou
ON OFF f
VConBoost,100
VConBoost,50
f V/ ) al = 0 m or 0 N 130 (P
t P1310 active 1 0 t
fBoost,end (P1316)
fn f max (P0310) (P1082)
P1311 =...
0.0 % Acceleration boost (entered in %) Voltage boost for accelerating/braking as a % relative to P0305 and P0350. P1311 only results in a voltage boost when ramping-up/ramp-down and generates an additional torque for accelerating/braking. Contrary to parameter P1312, that is only active for the 1st acceleration operation after the ON command, P1311 is effective each time that the drive accelerates or brakes.
V Vmax Vn (P0304) VAccBoost,100
g un nn pa ss ng a al sg rm 0) Au no 0 = f U/ 30 P1 (
Boost-Spannung
Gltigkeitsbereich
V istBoost
ON OFF f
t P1311 aktiv 1 0 t
VAccBoost,50
0 f Boost,end (P1316)
fn (P0310)
fmax (P1082)
109
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
P1312 =...
0.0 % Starting boost (entered in %) Voltage boost when starting (after an ON command) when using the linear or square-law V/f characteristic as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) or P0350 (stator resistance). The voltage boost remains active until 1) the setpoint is reached for the first time and 2) the setpoint is reduced to a value that is less than the instantaneous ramp-function generator output.
P1320 =...
Programmable V/f freq. 0.0 Hz coord. 1 Sets V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f characteristic. Programmable. V/f volt. 0.0 Hz coord. 1
V Vmax r0071 Vn P0304 P1325 Vmax = f(Vdc, Mmax)
P1321 =... P1322 =... P1323 =... P1324 =... P1325 =...
Programmable V/f freq. 0.0 Hz P1323 coord. 2 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2
0.0 Hz
P1321 P1310
Programmable U/f Freq. 0.0 Hz coord. 3 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3

0.0 Hz
f0 0 Hz f1 f2 P1320 P1322 f3 fn P1324 P0310 fmax f P1082
P1310[V] =
P1310[%] r0395[%] P0304[V ] 100[%] 100[%]
Switch-over
P1333 = ...
10.0 % Starting frequency for FCC (entered as a %) Defines the FCC starting frequency as a function of the rated motor frequency (P0310).
FCC
f FCC =
P0310 P1333 100 P0310 (P1333 + 6%) f FCC+Hys = 100
V/f
NOTE The constant voltage boost P1310 is continually decreased analog to switching-in FCC.
fFCC
fFCC+Hys
P1335 = ...
0.0 % Slip compensation (entered in %) Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor load.
Range of slip compensation :

% P1335
f out fN
6 % 10 %
100 %
P1338 =...
Resonance damping gain V/f Defines resonance damping gain for V/f.
0.00
MICROMASTER 440
110
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.17
Field-orientated control
Limitations
p0640 = ...
150.0 % Motor overload factor [%] Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to p0305 (rated motor current). Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (p0305), whichever is the lower.
p0640max =
min (r0209, 4 p0305) 100 p0305
p1520 = ...
CO: Upper torque limit FC-spec. Resultant Specifies fixed value for upper torque limit torque limitation.
|M|
Power limitation
Stall limitation Torque limitation
P1520 def = 1.5 r0333 P1520 max = 4 r0333

r1526 r1527 ~ 1 f
~ 1 f2
p1521 = ...
CO: Lower torque limit FC-spec. Enters fixed value of lower torque limitation.
P1521 def = 1.5 r0333 P1521 max = 4 r0333
p1530 p1531
|fact| Constant torque Constant power fstall Stall power
p1530 = ...
FC-spec. Motoring power limitation Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power.
P1530 def = 2.5 P0307 P1530 max = 3 P0307
Power limitation (motoring, regenerative) M= P 2f p1531 M
p1530
p1531 = ...
Regenerative power limitation FC-spec. Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active power
P1531def = - 2.5 P0307 P1531 max = - 3 P0307
p1531
p1530
111
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

p1300=20
Control mode 20 Closed-loop Vector control speed without encoder SLVC can provide excellent performance for the following types of application: Applications which require high torque performance Applications which require fast respond to shock loading Applications which require torque holding while passing through 0 Hz Applications which require very accurate speed holding Applications which require motor pull out protection
0
p1452 = ...
4 ms Filter time for act. freq (SLVC) Sets time constant of PT1 filter to filter the frequency deviation of speed controller in operation mode SLVC (sensorless vector control). Decreasing the value leads to a higher dynamic of the speed regulation. Instability is seen if the value is to low (or to high). p1452 = 2 can be set for most applications.
p1470 = ... p1472 = ...
Gain speed controller (SLVC) Enters gain of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC). Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC) Enters integral time of speed controller for sensorless vector control (SLVC).
p1488
r1490
3.0 400 ms
p1489
150 ms Droop
p1492 Precontrol
r1170
Freq. setpoint
Act. frequency from observer model
p1610 = ...
50.0 % Continuous torque boost (SLVC) Sets continuous torque boost in lower frequency range of SLVC (sensorless vector control). Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333. p1610 is only effective in the open-loop mode between 0 Hz and approx. p1755. 0.0 % Acc. torque boost (SLVC) Sets acceleration torque boost in lower frequency range of SLVC (sensorless vector control). Value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor torque r0333. p1611 is only effective in the open-loop mode between 0 Hz and approx. p1755. In opposite to p1610 the acceleration torque boost p1611 is only in operation during acceleration/deceleration.
p1611 = ...
112
0
0
p1496 p0341 p0342

r1518
p1470 p1472
r1084 *)
r1438
Kp
Tn
p1452
r0063 r0064 r1508
Torque setpoint
r0079
*) only active, if pre-control is enabled (p1496 > 0)
MICROMASTER 440
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
p1750 = ...
1 Control word of motor model This parameter controls the operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) at very low frequencies. This therefore includes the following conditions: Bit00 Start SLVC open loop 0 NO 1 YES (Operation directly after an ON command) Bit01 Zero crossing SLVC open loop 0 NO 1 YES (zero crossing)
f Start f Zero crossing
Closed loop p1755 Open loop p1755
Closed loop
Open loop t t
p1755
For most applications the setting of parameter p1750 = 0 gives the best result at low frequency. p1755 = ...
5.0 Hz Start-freq. motor model (SLVC) Enter the start frequency of sensorless vector control (SLVC), thereby SLVC switches over from open-loop to closed-loop at that frequency.
Precontrol r0062 Frequency setpoint p1452 Speed controller p1470 p1472 Flux setpoint closed loop p1610 p1611 Flux setpoint open loop Current measurement p1750/p1755 open/closed loop isd iu iv iw Act. angle
. .
Torque limitation isq Act. output voltage
Current controller
Act. frequency + Slip
Act. output frequency
Observer model closed loop
113
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Vector control with encoder (VC)

First step: Parameterizing the speed encoder (refer to Section 3.5.7.15) When commissioning Vector Control with encoder-feedback (VC), the drive should be configured for V/f mode (see p1300) first. Run the drive and compare r0061 with r0021 that should agree in: - sign - magnitude (with a deviation of only a few percent)
Only if both criteria are fulfilled, change p1300 and select VC (p1300 = 21/23).
Encoder loss detection must be disabled (p0492 = 0) if torque is limited externally., e.g.: - closed-loop winder control - traversing / moving to a fixed endstop - when using a mechanical brake
p1300=21 p1442 = ...
Control mode 21 Vector control with sensor
0
4 ms Filter time for act. speed Sets time constant of PT1 filter to smooth actual speed of speed controller. Decreasing the value leads to a higher dynamic of the speed regulation. Instability is seen if the value is to low. p1442 = 2 can be set for most applications.
p1460 = ... p1462 = ...
Gain speed controller Enters gain of speed controller. Integral time speed controller Enters integral time of speed controller.
p1488
r1490
3.0 400 ms
p1489
150 ms Droop
p1492 Precontrol
r1170
Freq. setpoint
p1442
r0063
Act. frequency from encoder
114
0
0
p1496 p0341 p0342

r1518
p1460 p1462
r1084 *)
r1438
Kp
Tn
r0064 r1508
Torque setpoint
r0079
*) only active, if pre-control is enabled (p1496 > 0)
MICROMASTER 440
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Supplementary torque setpoint

In the vector mode with / without encoder the speed controller can be subordinate to a constant or variable supplementary torque. The supplementary setpoint can be used to advantage for hoisting gear with low intrinsic friction when starting in the vertical direction. The supplementary torque setpoint must always be impressed in the hoisting (raising) direction (please observe the sign!). As a result of the supplementary torque, also when lowering, a slip is immediately established that has a stabilizing effect on the closed-loop control (there is no significant load sag). The sign of the supplementary torque setpoint can be determined as follows in the commissioning phase with the appropriate care and taking into account all of the relevant safety regulations: Hoist (raise) a minimum load using the hoisting gear and read-out the sign from parameter r0079 (the sign of r0079 corresponds to the sign of the supplementary torque setpoint). An empirical value of approx. 40 % of the rated motor torque r0333 has lead to good results for existing hoisting gear (carefully observe the sign!).
P1511=...
0:0 CI: Supplementary torque setpoint Selects the source of the supplementary torque setpoint.
Frequent settings: 2889 Fixed setpoint 1 as a % 2890 Fixed setpoint 2 as a % 755.0 Analog input 1 755.1 Analog input 2 2015. 2 USS (BOP link) 2018. 2 USS (COM link) 2050. 2 CB (e.g. PROFIBUS)
Droop Precontrol
Kp
r1170 r1518
Tn r1538 r1538
*) Ti
Freq. setpoint
r0063
PI Speed controller
r1539
r1508
r1539
r1515
Torque setpoint
r0079
Act. frequency CI: Add. trq. setp P1511.C (0:0) Ti *) only active, if pre-control is enabled (P1496 > 0) SLVC: VC: P1452 P1442 Kp
Tn
P1470 P1460
P1472 P1462
115
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.18
Converter-specific Functions
Flying start
p1200 = ...
Flying start Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the actual motor speed has been found. 0 Flying start disabled 1 Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint 2 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint 3 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint 4 Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint 5 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint 6 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint Motor-current: Flying start (entered in %) Defines search current used for flying start.
0
p1202 = ... p1203 = ?
100 %
100 % Search rate: Flying start (entered in %) Sets factor by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor.
Automatic restart
p1210 = ...
Automatic restart Configures automatic restart function. 0 Disabled 1 Trip reset after power on 2 Restart after mains blackout 3 Restart after mains brownout or fault 4 Restart after mains brownout 5 Restart after mains blackout and fault 6 Restart after mains brown/blackout or fault
1
MICROMASTER 440
116
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Holding brake
Series / commissioning for hazardous loads lower the load to the floor when replacing the frequency inverter, prevent (inhibit) the frequency inverter from controlling the motor holding brake (MHB) secure the load or inhibit the motor holding brake control (so that the brake cannot be controlled) and then and only then carry-out quick commissioning / parameter download using the PC-based tool (e.g. STARTER, AOP) Parameterize the weight equalization for hoisting gear applications magnetizing time P0346 greater than zero min. frequency P1080 should approximately correspond to the motor slip r0330 (P1080 r0330) adapt the voltage boost to the load a) V/f (P1300 = 0 ...3): P1310, P1311 b) SLVC (P1300 =20): P1610, P1611 It is not sufficient to just select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "motor holding brake active" in P0731 P0733. In order to activate the motor holding brake, in addition, parameter P1215 must be set to 1. It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The reason for this is that the brake is generally only dimensioned/designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations. The brake closing / opening times can be taken from the appropriate manual. The following typical values have been taken from Motor Catalog M11 2003/2004, Page 2/51:
Motor size
63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225
Brake type
2LM8 005-1NAxx 2LM8 005-2NAxx 2LM8 010-3NAxx 2LM8 020-4NAxx 2LM8 040-5NAxx 2LM8 060-6NAxx 2LM8 100-7NAxx 2LM8 260-8NAxx 2LM8 315-0NAxx 2LM8 400-0NAxx
Opening time [ms]

25 25 26 37 43 60 50 165 152 230
Closing time [ms]

56 56 70 90 140 210 270 340 410 390
P1215 =...
0 Holding brake enable f Enables/disables holding brake function (MHB). 0 Motor holding brake disabled fmin 1 Motor holding brake enabled (P1080) NOTE The following must apply when P1216 controlling the brake relay via a digital r0052 Point 1 output: P0731 = 52.C (= 52.12) (refer to Bit121 Section 3.5.7.4 "Digital output 0 (DOUT)").
t P1217 Point 2 t
117
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
52.3 P0731=52.C BI: Fct digital output 1 Defines the source for digital output 1. NOTE The brake relay can also be controlled from another digital output (if this is available) or using a distributed I/O module. Analog to DOUT 1, it should be guaranteed that the I/Os are controlled by the status bit MHB active.
Frequent settings:
52.0 52.1 52.2 52.3 52.4 52.5 52.6 52.7 52.8 52.9 52.A 52.B 52.C 52.D 52.E 52.F 53.0 53.1 Ready to power-up 0 Ready 0 Drive operational 0 Fault present 0 OFF2 active (present) 1 OFF3 active (present) 1 Power-on inhibit active (present) 0 Alarm active (present) 0 Deviation, setpoint/actual value 1 PZD / PLC control 0 Maximum frequency reached 0 Alarm: Motor current limit 1 Motor holding brake active 0 Motor overload 1 Motor dir. of rotation, clockwise 0 Frequency inverter overload 1 DC brake active 0 Actual freq. f_act > P2167 (f_off) 0 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
P0748 = 0
0 Inverting digital outputs This parameter allows the signals to be output to be inverted.
: :
DOUT channel
Invert DOUTs 0 ... 7 P0748 (0) BI: Fct. of DOUT 1
CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747.0
int. 24 V max. 100 mA Kl.9 COM Kl.20 NO NC Kl.19 or Kl.18 Kl.28
Function xxxx.y
rxxxx.y
P0731.C (52:3)
P0731 = xxxx.y
-1
Relay : Text DC 30 V / 5 A AC 250 V / 2 A - max. opening / closing time 5 / 10 ms
p1216 = ...
1.0 s Holding brake release delay (entered in s) Defines the time interval during which the frequency inverter runs with the min. frequency p1080 after magnetizing, before the ramp-up starts. P1216 brake opening time + relay opening time 1.0 s Holding time after ramp-down (entered in s) Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (p1080) after ramping down. P1217 brake closing time + relay closing time
p1217 = ...
MICROMASTER 440
118
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Braking functions
Priorities are assigned to the various braking functions. For instance, if a DC brake or a compound brake is activated, then this has a higher priority than the dynamic brake (resistance-type braking).
DC braking P1233 > 0 ? yes DC braking enabled
no
Compound braking P1236 > 0 ? yes Compound braking enabled
no
Dynamic braking P1237 > 0 ? yes Dynamic braking enabled
no
disabled
DC-Bremse
P1230 = ...
BI: Enabling the DC brake This enables DC braking using a signal that was used from an external source. The function remains active as long as the external input signal is active. DC braking causes the motor to quickly stop by injecting a DC current
BI: Enable DC brk. 1 P1230.C (0:0)
f f* DC braking
t f_set
f_act t i P0347
t DC braking active r0053 1 Bit00 0 Note: DC brake can be applied in drive states r0002 = 1, 4, 5
P1232 =...
DC braking current (entered in %) Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
100 %
119
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
P1233 =...
0s Duration of DC braking (entered in s) Defines duration for which DC injection braking is to be active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
ON OFF1/OFF3 P0347 OFF2 t f t
P1234
OFF2 DC braking t
DC braking active r0053 1 Bit00 0
P1233
ON OFF1/OFF3 P0347 OFF2 t f OFF ramp P1234 t
OFF2 DC braking
OFF2 DC braking active r0053 1 Bit00 0 t
P1233
P1234 =...
DC braking start frequency (entered in Hz) Sets the start frequency for the DC brake.
650 Hz
MICROMASTER 440
120
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Compound braking
P1236 =...
0% Compound braking current (entered in %) Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). (see also Vdc controller ").
If P1254 = 0 : Compound braking switch-on level otherwise : Compound braking switch-on level
DC_Comp
= 1.13 2 Vmains = 1.13 2 P0210 = 0.98 r1242
DC_Comp
P1236 = 0 Without Compound braking f f_set f_act f
P1236 > 0 With Compound braking f_set f_act
t i i
t uDC-link uDC-link UDC_Comp t
Dynamic braking
P1237 = ...
0 Dynamic braking Dynamic braking is activated using parameter P1237 the nominal (rated) duty cycle as well as the switch-in duration of the braking resistor are also defined. 0 Inhibited 1 Load duty cycle 5 % 2 Load duty cycle 10 % 3 Load duty cycle 20 % 4 Load duty cycle 50 % 5 Load duty cycle 100 % Using the dynamic brake, the regenerative feedback energy is transferred to the external braking resistor using the chopper control (braking chopper); it is converted into thermal energy (heat) in this resistor. This dynamic braking allows the drive to be braked in a controlled fashion. This function is not available for sizes FX and GX.
Chopper resistor MM4 B+ B-
= ~
Chopper control
= ~
121
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Vdc controller
P1240 =...
Configuration of Vdc controller Enables / disables Vdc controller. 0 Vdc controller disabled 1 Vdc-max controller enabled
1
VDC r1242
P1254 =...
1 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc control functionalities. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled
VDC_max -controller active r0056 Bit14 1 0
t A0911 t
f fact fset t
PID controller
P2200 =...
0.0 BI: Enable PID controller PID mode Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID controller. Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints
P2253 =...
CI: PID setpoint Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input
0.0
P2254 =...
0.0 CI: PID trim source Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint
P2257 =... P2258 =... P2264 =... P2267 =... P2268 =... P2280 =... P2285 =... P2291 =...
Ramp-up time for PID setpoint Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint Ramp-down time for PID setpoint Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint CI: PID feedback Selects the source of the PID feedback signal Max. value for PID feedback Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%] Min. value for PID feedback Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%] PID proportional gain Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller PID integral time Sets integral time constant for PID controller PID output upper limit Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%].
1.00 s 1.00 s 755.0 100.00 % 0.00 % 3.000 0.000 s 100.00 %
MICROMASTER 440
122
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
P2292 =...
PID output lower limit Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%]
P2257 P2258 P2261 P2280 P2285
0.00 %
PID MOP ADC PID FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 P2264 PID PT1 P2265 P2254 P2253 PID SUM
0 1
PID RFG
PID PT1
P2269 P2270
PID
Motor control
PID
PIDOutput
&
P2251
PID SCL P2271
P2200
Example: Parameter Parameter text Example
P2200 P2253 P2264 P2267 P2268 P2280 P2285 P2291 P2292
BI: Enable PID controller CI: PID setpoint CI: PID feedback Max. PID feedback Min. PID feedback PID proportional gain PID integral time PID output upper limit PID output lower limit
P2200 = 1.0 P2253 = 2224 P2264 = 755 P2267 P2268 P2280 P2285 P2291 P2292
PID controller active PID-FF1 ADC Adapt to the application Adapt to the application Determined by optimizing Determined by optimizing Adapt to the application Adapt to the application
123
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Free function blocks (FFB)

P2800 =...
0 Enable FFBs Parameter P2800 is used to activate all free function blocks (generally, P2800 is set to 1). Possible settings: 0 Inhibited 1 Enabled 0.0 Activate FFBs Parameter P2801 is used to individually enable (activate) the free function blocks P2801[0] to P2801[16] (P2801[x] > 0). Further, parameters P2801 and P2802 are used to define the chronological sequence of all of the function blocks. The table below indicates that the priority increases from left to right and from bottom to top. Possible settings: 0 Inactive 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 0 Level 3 Example: P2801[3] = 2, P2801[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2 FFBs are calculated in the following sequence: P2802[3], P2801[3] , P2801[4], P2802[4] The active function blocks are calculated every 132 ms.
P2801 =...
P2802 =...
Activate FFBs Parameter P2802 is used to individually enable (activate) the free function blocks P2802[0] to P2802[13] (P2802[x] > 0). Possible settings: 0 Inactive 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 1 Level 3
low Level Level Level 3 2 1 Inactive 0 CMP 2 CMP 1 DIV 2 DIV 1 MUL 2 MUL 1 SUB 2 SUB 1 ADD 2 ADD 1 Timer 4 Timer 3 Timer 2 Timer 1 RS-FF 3 RS-FF 2 RS-FF 1 D-FF 2 D-FF 1 NOT 3 NOT 2 NOT 1 XOR 3 XOR 2 XOR 1 OR 3 OR 2 OR 1 AND 3 AND 2 AND 1 Priority 2 high Priority 1 P2802 [13] P2802 [12] P2802 [11] P2802 [10] P2802 [9] P2802 [8] P2802 [7] P2802 [6] P2802 [5] P2802 [4] P2802 [3] P2802 [2] P2802 [1] P2802 [0] P2801 [16] P2801 [15] P2801 [14] P2801 [13] P2801 [12] P2801 [11] P2801 [10] P2801 [9] P2801 [8] P2801 [7] P2801 [6] P2801 [5] P2801 [4] P2801 [3] P2801 [2] P2801 [1] P2801 [0]
MICROMASTER 440
124
low
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.19
P0810 =...
Command and drive data set

Command data set CDS bit 0 (local / remote) Selects the command source in which bit 0 should be read-out to select a command data set (CDS).
Selecting CDS
BI: CDS bit 1 P0811 (0:0) BI: CDS b0 loc/rem P0810 (0:0)
3 2 1 0 t Changeover time approx. 4 ms 3 2 1 0 t Changeover time approx. 4 ms
Active CDS r0050
CO: Active CDS r0050
The currently active command data set (CDS) is displayed using parameter r0050:
Select CDS r0055 bit15 1. CDS 2. CDS 3. CDS 3. CDS 0 0 1 1 r0054 bit15 0 1 0 1 Active CDS r0050 0 1 2 2
Most frequent settings: 722.0 = Digital input 1 (P0701 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.1 = Digital input 2 (P0702 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.2 = Digital input 3 (P0703 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.3 = Digital input 4 (P0704 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.4 = Digital input 5 (P0705 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.5 = Digital input 6 (P0706 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.6 = Digital input 7 (via analog input 1, P0707 must be set to 99) 722.7 = Digital input 8 (via analog input 2, P0708 must be set to 99) Example for CDS changeover: CDS1: Command source via terminals and setpoint source via analog input (ADC) CDS2: Command source via BOP and setpoint source via MOP CDS changeover is realized using digital input 4 (DIN 4) Steps: 1. Carry-out commissioning for CDS1 (P0700[0] = 2 and P1000[0] = 2) 2. Connect P0810 (P0811 if required) to the CDS changeover source (P0704[0] = 99, P0810 = 722.3) 3. Copy from CDS1 to CDS2 (P0809[0] = 0, P0809[1] = 1, P0809[2] = 2) 4. Adapt CDS2 parameters (P0700[1] = 1 and P1000[1] = 1)
125
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
DIN4 Terminals BOP ADC MOP
P0810 = 722.3 P0700[0] = 2 P0700[1] = 1 P1000[0] = 2 P1000[1] = 1

0
Sequence control
1
0 1
Setpoint channel
Motor control
P0820 = ...
0 Drive data set (DDS) bit 0 Selects the command source from which bit 0 should be read-out to select a drive data set.
Operation Ready t
Select DDS
BI: DDS bit 1 P0821 (0:0) BI: DDS bit 0 P0820 (0:0)
3 2 1 0 Changeover time approx. 50 ms 3 2 1 0 t Changeover time approx. 50 ms t
Active DDS r0051[1]
CO: Active DDS r0051 .01 [2]
The currently active drive data set (DDS) is displayed using parameter r0051[1]:
Select DDS r0055 r0054 bit05 bit04 1. DDS 2. DDS 3. DDS 3. DDS 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Active DDS r0051 [1] 0 1 2 2
r0051 [0] 0 1 2 2
Most frequent settings: 722.0 = Digital input 1 (P0701 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.1 = Digital input 2 (P0702 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.2 = Digital input 3 (P0703 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.3 = Digital input 4 (P0704 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.4 = Digital input 5 (P0705 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.5 = Digital input 6 (P0706 must be set to 99, BICO) 722.6 = Digital input 7 (via analog input 1, P0707 must be set to 99) 722.7 = Digital input 8 (via analog input 2, P0708 must be set to 99)
MICROMASTER 440
126
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Example: 1. Commissioning steps with a motor: Carry-out commissioning at DDS1. Connect P0820 (P0821 if required) to the DDS changeover source (e.g. using DIN 4: P0704[0] = 99, P0820 = 722.3). Copy DDS1 to DDS2 (P0819[0] = 0, P0819[1] = 1, P0819[2] = 2). Adapt DDS2 parameters (e.g. ramp-up / ramp-down times P1120[1] and P1121[1]).
DIN Sequence control Gating unit
ADC
SUM setpoint
AFM
RFG
Motor control
P0820 = 722.3 DIN4

0 1
P1120 P1121 [1] [2] [0] DDS1 DDS2 DDS3 2. Commissioning steps with 2 motors (motor 1, motor 2):
Commission motor 1; adapt the remaining DDS1 parameters. Connect P0820 (P0821 if required) to the DDS changeover source (e.g. via DIN 4: P0704[0] = 99, P0820 = 722.3). Changeover to DDS2 (check using r0051). Commission motor 2; adapt the remaining DDS2 parameters.
M1
K1
Motor 1
MM4
M2
K2
Motor 2
127
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.7.20
r0035 r0036
Diagnostic parameters
CO: Motor temperature Displays the measured motor temperature in C. CO: Frequency inverter utilization Displays the frequency inverter utilization as a % referred to the overload. In so doing, the value is calculated using the I2t model. The I2t actual value relative to the maximum possible I2t value provides the level of utilization. CO/BO: Act. status word 1 Displays the first active status word (ZSW) of the frequency inverter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose the inverter status. CO/BO: Control word 1 Displays the first control word (STW) of the frequency inverter and can be used to display the active commands. CO: Actual frequency Displays the actual frequency in Hz.
Frequency actual values:
V/f P1300
<20 20,22
r0052
r0054
r0063
60 r0313 Smoothed speed act. value 160 ms r0022 Smoothed freq. actual value r0021 Frequency actual value r0063
SLVC (observer model) r0313 60 P0408 0 Encoder
P0400
0 1,2
21,23
Freq.act.value fr. the encoder r0061 P1300 = 21,23 and P0400 = 0 --> F0090
r1079
CO: Selected frequency setpoint Displays the selected frequency setpoint. The following frequency setpoints are displayed: r1078 total setpoint (HSW + ZUSW) P1058 JOG frequency, clockwise P1059 JOG frequency, counter-clockwise. CO: Freq. setpoint after dir. ctrl. Displays the setpoint (reference) frequency in Hz after the function block to reverse the direction of rotation. CO: : Frequency setpoint after RFG Displays the total frequency setpoint (reference value) in Hz after the ramp-function generator.
r1114
r1170
MICROMASTER 440
128
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.5.7.21
P0971 = 1
Abschluss der Inbetriebnahme

0 Transfer data from RAM to EEPROM 0 Inhibited 1 Start RAM->EEPROM All parameter changes are transferred from the RAM memory into the EEPROM memory and therefore saved in the MICROMASTER in a non-volatile fashion.
NOTE When using a BOP or AOP, MICROMASTER automatically carries-out the RAMEEPROM data save operation. If the parameterization is carried-out using the commissioning tools - STARTER or DriveMonitor then data is not automatically saved in the EEPROM. Automatic RAMEEPROM data save can be selected by pressing the appropriate selection button.
STARTER DriveMonitor
RAM EEPROM
Online-EEPROM
END
NOTE If P0971 is used to start data save from the RAM to EEPROM, then after the data has been transferred, the communications memory is re-initialized. This means that communications via USS as well as also via the CB board are interrupted for the time it takes to reset: The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is displayed. The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel
After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and DriveMonitor and the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically reestablished.
129
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.5.8
Series commissioning
The parameter set can be read-out (upread) from the drive converter via the serial interface and saved on the hard disk / floppy disk or in a non-volatile memory (e.g. EEPROM) using the following PC Tools (e.g. STARTER, DriveMonitor) or the Operator panel AOP (please refer to Fig. 3-28). The interfaces of the drive inverter with USS protocol and the fieldbus interfaces (e.g. PROFIBUS) which can be used to transfer parameters, can be used as serial interface.
AOP 3)* 1) DriveMonitor 2)* 4)* STARTER 2)* 4)* 5)* Parameter transmission from different sources via download * Option is absolutely required for the connection USS on BOP link (RS232) USS on COM link (RS485) CB on COM link (PROFIBUS) CB MM4
1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit for single inverter control 2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit 3) Option: AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control (USS) 4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter 5) With PROFIBUS: SIMATIC NET With CANopen or DeviceNet: see user organisation
Fig. 3-28
Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools
If there is already an appropriate parameter set for the drive, which, for example, was created by either upreading or by programming offline, then this can be downloaded into the drive inverter. This means that it is possible to transfer the parameter set from drive inverter A to drive inverter B which, for identical applications (e.g. series machines, group drives) allows data to be copied and therefore in turn fast commissioning.
MICROMASTER 440
130
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
WARNING For series commissioning, all of the communication interfaces as well as also the digital and analog interfaces are re-initialized. This results in a brief communications failure or causes the digital outputs to switch. Potentially hazardous loads must be carefully secured before starting a series commissioning. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows before starting series commissioning:
Lower the load to the floor, or Clamp the load using the motor holding brake (Caution: During series commissioning, MICROMASTER must be prevented from controlling the motor holding brake). If the motor holding brake (refer to Section 3.14) is controlled by the MICROMASTER, then series commissioning may not be carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications).
3.5.9
Parameter reset to the factory setting

The factory setting is a defined initial state of all of the drive inverter parameters. The drive inverters are shipped from the factory in this state. The drive inverters have the following default settings: Control via the digital inputs a) ON/OFF via DIN1 b) Direction of rotation reversal via DIN2 c) Fault acknowledgement via DIN3 Setpoint input via analog input 1 Signal output via the digital outputs a) Fault active via DOUT 1 b) Warning active via DOUT 2 Actual frequency via the analog output The basic V/f characteristic is the control mode (P1300 = 0) Induction motor (P0300 = 1) When appropriately connected-up and with the appropriate motor drive inverter combination, MICROMASTER drive inverters are ready to run when shipped from the factory without requiring any additional parameterization. You can re-establish the initial state at any time by carrying-out a parameter reset to the factory setting. This undoes all of the parameter changes which were made since the drive inverter was supplied. This value is designated as "Def" in the parameter list.
131
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Reset to the factory setting

START
P0003 = 1 P0004 = 0 P0010 = 30

P0970 = 1
User access level 1 Access level, standard Parameter filter 0 All parameters Commissioning parameter 30 Factory setting Factory reset 1 Parameter reset to the default values
END
The drive inverter carries-out a parameter reset (duration, approx. 10 s) and then automatically exits the reset menu and sets P0970 = 0 : Disabled P0010 = 0 : Ready
NOTE When resetting the parameters to the factory setting, the communications memory is re-initialized. This means that communications via USS as well as also via the CB board are interrupted for the time it takes to make the reset: The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is displayed. The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel
After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and DriveMonitor or the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically reestablished.
MICROMASTER 440
132
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.6
3.6.1
Inputs / outputs
Digital inputs (DIN)
Number: Parameter range: Function chart number: Features: - cycle time: - switch-on threshold: - switch-out threshold: - electrical features: 6+2 r0722 P0725 FP2000, FP2200 2 ms 10.6 V 10.6 V electrically isolated, short-circuit proof
External control signals are required for a drive converter to be able to operate autonomously. These signals can be entered via a serial interface as well as also via digital inputs (refer to Fig. 3-29). MICROMASTER has 6 digital inputs which can be expanded to a total of 8 by using the 2 analog inputs. The digital inputs, as far as their assignment, can be freely programmed to create a function. Whereby, regarding the program, it is possible to directly assign the function via parameters P0701 - P0708 or to freely program the function using BICO technology.
DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - PNP (P0725 = 1))
P0701
24 V
Function
0 1 0 1
24 V
&
r0722 r0722 .0
Pxxxx BI: ...
DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - NPN (P0725 = 0))

P0701
24 V
Function
0 1 0 1
24 V
&
r0722 r0722 .0
Pxxxx BI: ...
Fig. 3-29
Digital inputs
133
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Parameter P0725 is used to define as to whether digital inputs DIN1 - DIN6 are logical "1" when appropriately connected to 0 V or 24 V. The logical states of the digital inputs can be de-bounced using P0724 and read-out using parameter r0722 (BICO monitoring parameter). Further, this parameter is used to parameterize BICO for the digital inputs (refer to BICO parameterization in the following Section). P0701 P0706 (digital inputs 16) or P0707 P0708 (analog inputs 1-2) The possible settings of the individual inputs are listed in Table 3-11.
Table 3-11 Parameters P0701 P0706
Significance
Parameter value
0 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 25 29 33 99
Digital input disabled ON / OFF1 ON+reverse / OFF1 OFF2 coast to standstill OFF3 quick ramp-down Fault acknowledge JOG right JOG left Reverse MOP up (increase frequency) MOP down (decrease frequency) Fixed setpoint (direct selection) Fixed setpoint (direct selection + ON) Fixed setpoint (binary-coded selection + ON) Enable DC braking External trip Disable additional frequency setpoint Enable BICO parameterization
Example: An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1. P0700 = 2 Control enabled via terminal strip (digital inputs) P0701 = 1 ON/OFF1 via digital input 1 (DIN1) NOTE If an analog input (refer to Fig. 3-33) has been configured as digital input, then the following limit values apply: < 1.7 V DC "0" > 3.9 V DC "1"
MICROMASTER 440
134
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
BICO parameterization
If the setting 99 (BICO) is entered into parameters P0701 P0708, then the BICO wiring is enabled for the appropriate digital input. The output parameter number of the function (parameter, included in the parameter text BO) should be entered into the command source (parameter which contains the code BI in the parameter text).
Example: An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1. P0700 = 2 Control enabled via digital inputs P0701 = 99 BICO enabled for DIN1 P0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1 via DIN1 NOTE Only experienced users should use the BICO parameterization and for applications where the possibilities provided by P0701 P0708 are no longer adequate.
135
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.6.2
Digital outputs (DOUT)

Number: Parameter range: Function chart number: Features: - cycle time: 3 r0730 P0748 FP2100 1 ms
Binary states in the drive can be output via the digital outputs. As result of the fast cycle time, it is possible to control external devices and to display the state in real time. In order that higher powers can also be output, the internal signal (TTL level) is amplified using a relay (refer to Fig. 3-30). Relay: - max. opening / closing time: - voltage / current 5 / 10 ms 30 V DC / 5 A 250 V AC / 2 A
Invert DOUTs 0 ... 7 P0748 (0) BI: Fct. of DOUT 1 P0731.C (52:3) 0
CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747.0
1
Invert DOUTs 0 ... 7 P0748 (0)
-1
COM NO CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747.1 NC
Kl.20 Kl.19 Kl.18
BI: Fct. of DOUT 2 P0732.C (52:7) 0
-1
COM NO CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747.2
Kl.22 Kl.21
Invert DOUTs 0 ... 7 P0748 (0) BI: Fct. of DOUT 3 P0733.C (0:0) 0
-1
COM NO NC
Kl.25 Kl.24 Kl.23
Fig. 3-30
Digital outputs
The states, which are to be output, are defined using the "BI" parameters P0731 (digital output 1), P0732 (digital output 2) and P0733 (digital output 3). For the definition, the "BO" parameter number or "CO/BO" parameter number and the bit number of the particular state should be entered into P0731 P0733. Frequently used states including the parameter number and bit are shown in the following Table (refer to Table 3-12).
Table 3-12
Parameters P0731 P0733 (frequently used functions / states)

Significance
Parameter value
52.0
Drive ready
MICROMASTER 440
136
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
52.1 52.2 52.3 52.4 52.5 52.6 52.7 52.8 52.9 52.A 52.B 52.C 52.D 52.E 52.F 53.0 53.1 53.2 53.3 53.6
Drive ready to run Drive running Drive fault active OFF2 active OFF3 active Switch-on inhibit active Drive warning active Deviation, setpoint / actual value PZD control (Process Data Control) Maximum frequency reached Warning: Motor current limit Motor holding brake (MHB) active Motor overload Motor running direction right Inverter overload DC brake active Act. frequency f_act >= P2167 (f_off) Act. frequency f_act > P1080 (f_min) Act. current r0027 >= P2170 Act. frequency f_act >= setpoint
NOTE A complete list of all of the binary status parameters (refer to "CO/BO" parameters) can be taken from the parameter list.
137
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.6.3
Analog inputs (ADC)

Number: Parameter range: Function chart number: Features: - cycle time: - resolution: - accuracy: - electrical features: 2 P0750 P0762 FP2200 4 ms 10 bits 1 % referred to 10 V / 20 mA incorrect polarity protection, short-circuit proof
Analog setpoints, actual values and control signals are read-into the drive inverter using the appropriate analog inputs and are converted into digital signals / values using the ADC converter. The setting as to whether the analog input is a voltage input (10 V) or a current input (20 mA) must be selected using the 2 switches DIP1(1,2) on the I/O board as well as also using parameter P0756 (refer to Fig. 3-31).
Possible settings of P0756: 0 Unipolar voltage input ( 0 to +10 V ) 1 Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V ) 2 Unipolar current input (0 to 20 mA) 3 Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 mA) 4 Bipolar voltage input (-10 V to +10 V) only ADC1
Fig. 3-31
DIP switch and P0756 for ADC current / voltage input
NOTE The setting (analog input type) of P0756 must match that of switch DIP1(1,2) on the I/O board. The bipolar voltage input is only possible with analog input 1 (ADC1).
Depending on the ADC type or source, the appropriate connection must be made. Using, as an example, the internal 10 V voltage source, a connection is shown as an example in the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-32).
MICROMASTER 440
138
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Voltage input
KL1 KL2 > 4.7 k 10 V 0V
Current input
KL1 KL2 10 V 0V
KL3 ADC+ KL4 ADC
A D A D
0 ...20 mA
KL3 ADC+ KL4 ADC
A D A D
KL10 ADC+ KL11 ADC
KL10 ADC+ KL11 ADC
Fig. 3-32
Connection example for ADC voltage / current input
The ADC channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone) (refer to Fig. 3-33).
P0757 P0758 P0759 P0760 r0754 P1000 P0761 ADC dead zone Function r0755 Pxxxx
DIP switch
KL ADC+ ADC KL type ADC
P0756
P0753
A D
ADC type
ADC scaling
r0754
1 0
r0722 r0722.x
Fig. 3-33
ADC channel
NOTE When the filter time constant P0753 (ADC-PT1) is increased, this smooths the ADC input signal therefore reducing the ripple. When this function is used within a control loop, this smoothing has a negative impact on the control behavior and immunity to noise (the dynamic performance deteriorates).
139
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.6.4
Analog outputs (D/A converter)

Number: Parameter range: Function chart number: Features: - cycle time: - resolution: - accuracy: 2 r0770 P0781 FP2300 4 ms 10 bit 1 % referred to 20 mA
Setpoints, actual values and control signals inside the drive inverter are read-out via the D/A converter using these analog inputs. The digital signal is converted into an analog signal. All of the signals can be output via the D/A which contain the "CO" abbreviation in the parameter text (refer to list of all of the BICO parameters in the parameter list). Parameter P0771 defines, by assigning the parameter number, the quantity which is output as analog signal through the D/A converter channel (refer to Fig. 3-34). The smoothed output frequency is output, e.g. via the analog output, if P0771[0] = 21.
r0020 r0021 r0024 r0025 r0026 r0027 ... r0052 r0053 r0054 ... CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG CO: Act. filtered frequency CO: Act. filtered output freq. CO: Act. filtered output voltage CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. CO: Act. filtered output current CO/BO: Act. status word 1 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 CO/BO: Act. control word 1
Function
rxxxx r0755
Pxxxx P0771
D/A conv. channel
D A
KL
D/A conv.+
KL
D/A conv.
Fig. 3-34
Signal output through the D/A converter channel
In order to adapt the signal, the D/A converter channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone) which can be used to modify the digital signal before conversion (refer to Fig. 3-35).
P0777 P0778 P0779 P0780 r0774 P0781
P0773
0 ... 20 mA
KL KL
Function
rxxxx r0755
Pxxxx P0771
D/A conv. scaling
D/A conv. dead zone
D A
D/A conv.+
D/A conv.
Fig. 3-35
D/A converter channel
MICROMASTER 440
140
0 ... 20 mA
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE The analog outputs only provide current outputs (0 ... 20 mA). A 0 ... 10 V voltage signal can be generated by connecting a 500 Ohm resistor across the outputs. The voltage drop across the resistor can be read using parameter r0774 if the parameter P0776 is changed-over from current output (P0776 = 0) to voltage output (P0776 = 1). The D/A scaling parameters P0778, P0780 and the D/A converter dead zone must still be entered in mA (0 ... 20).
141
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.7
Communications
Parameter range: Function chart number: CB at COM link USS at COM link USS at BOP link P2009 r2091 FP2700, FP2710 FP2600, FP2610 FP2500, FP2510
MICROMASTER 440 has 2 serial communication interfaces which can be simultaneously used. These interfaces are designated as follows in the following text: BOP link COM link Different units, such as the BOP and AOP operator panels, PCs with the start-up software DriveMonitor and STARTER, interface modules for PROFIBUS DP, DeviceNet and CAN as well as programmable controls with communication processors can be connected at this interface (refer to Fig. 3-28).
BOP DriveMonitor/ STARTER AOP PROFIBUS board DeviceNet board CAN board AOP DriveMonitor/ STARTER
BOP
USS RS232 2)*
USS RS232 1)
USS RS485 3)* CB CB CB
USS RS485 4)*
1)
BOP link
COM link
Option is absolutely required for the connection 1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit for single inverter control 2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit 3) Option: AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control (USS) 4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter
Fig. 3-36
Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link
MICROMASTER 440
142
29 30
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The BOP, a programming / operator unit (e.g. AOP, PC with DriveMonitor / STARTER) or a programmable control with communications processor can be connected via this BOP link. Data transfer between MICROMASTER and the programming / operator units is realized using the USS protocol via the RS232 interface (point-to-point data coupling). Communications between the BOP and MICROMASTER uses a optimized interface which takes into consideration the somewhat limited resources of the BOP. If the BOP is replaced by an USS unit (PC, AOP), then MICROMASTER automatically identifies the interface of the new unit. This is also true for the inverse replacement sequence. The BOP link interface can be adapted to the particular unit using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-13).
Table 3-13 BOP link
BOP link interface BOP on BOP link
No parameter
USS on BOP link

P2009[1] P2010[1] P2011[1] P2012[1] P2013[1] P2014[1] r2015 P2016 r2024[1] r2025[1] r2026[1] r2027[1] r2028[1] r2029[1] r2030[1] r2031[1] r2032 r2033
Communication modules (CB) such as PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, CANopen and also programming / operator units (e.g. PCs with the DriveMonitor / STARTER start-up software and AOP) as well as programmable controls with communication processor can be connected to the COM link. The plug connector allows the communication modules to be connected to MICROMASTER. On the other hand, the programming / operator units must be connected to the MICROMASTER through terminals 29/30. As for the BOP link, data is transferred between MICROMASTER and the programming / operator unit using the USS protocol. In so doing, for the COM link, the USS protocol is transferred via the bus-capable RS485 interface. Essentially the same as the BOP link, the COM link also automatically defines if a communications module is replaced with a USS unit (PC, AOP). The COM link can be adapted to the particular unit using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-14).
Table 3-14 COM link
COM link interface CB on COM link
P2040 P2041 r2050 P2051 r2053 r2054 r2090 r2091
USS on COM link

P2009[0] P2010[0] P2011[0] P2012[0] P2013[0] P2014[0] r2018 P2019 r2024[0] r2025[0] r2026[0] r2027[0] r2028[0] r2029[0] r2030[0] r2031[0] r2036 r2037
143
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
NOTE A communications (CB) module as well as a programming / operator unit can be simultaneously connected to the COM link interface via terminals 29/30 (USS). This is the reason that the communications module has priority over USS. In this case, the USS node (USS station) via the COM link is de-activated. Contrary to PROFIBUS, the RS485 port (terminals 29/30) is not optically isolated (not floating). When installing the system, it must be ensured that EMC faults do not result in communication failures or damage to the RS485 drivers.
3.7.1
Universal serial interface (USS)

Parameter range: P2009 r2037
Significance
USS basic setting USS baud rate USS address USS-PZD length USS-PKW length PZD data Received data Received control word 1 Received control word 2 Sent data Sent status word 1 Sent status word 2
COM link
P2010[0] P2011[0] P2012[0] P2013[0] r2018[8] r2036 r2037 P2019[8] r0052 r0053
BOP link
P2010[1] P2011[1] P2012[1] P2013[1] r2015[8] r2032 r2033 P2016[8] r0052 r0053
Alarms: Faults: Function chart number: Features: - electrical features:
--F0071, F0072 FP2500, FP2510, FP2600, FP2610
Not electrically isolated USS at the BOP link with PCconverter connecting set Not electrically isolated USS at COM link (terminals 29 /30) - cycle time (MM440): 8 ms (process data PZD) Background (parameter ID value PKW)
MICROMASTER 440
144
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Tcycle,master
T cycle,USS
Tcycle,slave(MM4)
Master
Slave (MICROMASTER)
Baud rate + interval time Telegram length Number of nodes (slave)

NOTE
From the users perspective, the total cycle time between the master and slave is of significance. As shown in the diagram above, this time depends on several factors.
Fig. 3-37
Cycle times
Using the USS protocol, a user can establish a serial point-to-point data link and a serial bus data link between a higher-level master system and several slave systems. Master systems can be, for example, PLCs (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200) or PCs. MICROMASTER drive converters are always the slaves on the bus system. The USS protocol allows the user to implement both automation tasks with cyclical telegram traffic ( a fixed telegram length is necessary) as well as visualization tasks. In this case, the protocol with variable telegram length is advantageous, as texts and parameter descriptions can be transferred in one telegram without chopping up the information.
145
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.7.1.1
Protocol specification and bus structure

The USS protocol has the following significant features: Supports
a multi-point-capable link, e.g. EIA RS 485 hardware or a point-to-point link, e.g. EIA RS 232 Master-slave access technique Single-master system Maximum 32 nodes (max. 31 slaves) Operation with variable or fixed telegram length Simple, reliable telegram frames The same bus mode of operation as with the PROFIBUS (DIN 19245 Part 1) Data interface to the basic unit according to PROFILE variable-speed drives. This means that, when the USS is being used, information is transferred to the drive in the same way as with the PROFIBUS-DP. Can be used for start-up, service and automation PC-based service tools (e.g. STARTER and DriveMonitor) Can be easily implemented in customized systems
Protocol specification
The USS protocol defines an access technique according to the master-slave principle for communications via a serial bus. The point-to-point link is included as a sub-quantity. One master and a maximum of 31 slaves can be connected to the bus. The individual slaves are selected by the master using an address character in the telegram. A slave can never transmit without first being initiated by the master so that direct information transfer between individual slaves is not possible. The master function cannot be transferred (single-master system). The following illustration shows a bus configuration using drive technology as an example.
Higher-level computer "Master"
MICROMASTER
MICROMASTER
MICROMASTER
MICROMASTER
"Slave"
"Slave"
"Slave"
"Slave"
Fig. 3-38
Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer (master)
MICROMASTER 440
146
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The telegram has the following structure: Each telegram begins with the start character STX (= 02 hex), followed by the length information (LGE) and the address byte (ADR). The net characters then follow. The telegram is terminated by the BCC (Block Check Character). For single-word data (16 bit) in the net data block (= net character block), the high byte (first character) is always sent and then the low byte (second character). The same applies to double-word data: the high word is sent first followed by the low word. The necessary settings / parameter assignments must be made both at the master as well as at the slave and can no longer be changed in bus operation. The protocol does not identify tasks in the net characters. The contents of the net characters/data for the MICROMASTER drives is discussed in Section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden. "Structure of the net data".
STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC
n net characters
Fig. 3-39
Telegram structure
Information is coded as follows:

Abbreviation Significance
STX LGE ADR --BCC Start of text Telegram length Address Net characters
Size
ASCII characters 1 byte 1 byte Each one byte
Explanation
02 hex Contains the telegram length Contains the slave address and the telegram type (binary coded) Net data, contents are dependent on the request Data security characters
Block check character 1 byte
147
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
In the address byte, information other than the node number is coded: The individual bits in the address byte are assigned as follows:
STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC
n net characters
Bit No.
Slave nodes No. 0 to 31 = 1: Broadcast, address bits (No. 0 to 4) are not evaluated = 0: No broadcast = 1: Mirror telegram = 0: No mirror telegram = 1: Special telegram (for an explanation, see below) = 0: Standard; bits 0 to 6 are valid and must be evaluated
Fig. 3-40
Assignment of the address byte (ADR)
The master ensures cyclical telegram data transfer. The master addresses all of the slave nodes one after the other with a task telegram. The addressed nodes respond with a reply telegram. In accordance with the master-slave procedure, the slave, after receiving the task telegram, must send the reply telegram to the master before the master can address the next slave node. The sequence of the addressed slave nodes can be specified, for example, by entering the node numbers (ADR) in a circulating list (polling list) in the master. If it is necessary to address several slaves in a faster cycle than the other slaves, their node number can occur several times in the circulating list. A point-to-point link can be implemented by means of the circulating list, in which case only one node is entered into the circulating list.
MICROMASTER 440
148
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Example of configuration
1
0 21
0 1 3 5 7 0 1 7 21 Circulating list in the master
Master
5 0
21
MICROMASTER with the addresses 0, 1, 3, 5, 7 and 21 Nodes 0 and 1 are signalled twice as often as others
Fig. 3-41
Circulating list (Example of configuration)
The length of a cycle time is determined by the time needed for the sequential occurrence of data exchange with the individual nodes.
Cycle time
Telegram run time for reply from node 1 Reply delay time from node 1 Telegram run time for task for node 1 Processing time in the master
Fig. 3-42
Cycle time
Due to inconstant reply delay and processing times, the cycle time is not fixed. The STX start character (= 02 hexadecimal) by itself is not sufficient for the slaves to clearly identify the start of a telegram because the bit combination 02/hexadecimal can also occur in the net characters. For this reason, a nocharacter start interval of at least 2 character run-times before the STX is specified for the master. The start interval is part of the task telegram.
Table 3-15 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates
Baud rate in bit/s Start interval in ms
149
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 93750 115200
9,20 ms 4,60 ms 2,30 ms 1,15 ms 0,57 ms 0,38 ms 0,29 ms 0,24 ms 0,19 ms
Only an STX with a preceding start interval identifies the valid start of a telegram. Data is always transferred in accordance with the diagram illustrated below (halfduplex mode):
STX LGE ADR 1. n
BCC
STX
Master transmits
Start pause Reply delay time
Slave transmits
Start pause
BCC
STX LGE ADR 1.
BCC
Fig. 3-43
Transmit sequence
The time interval between the last character of the task telegram (BCC) and the start of the reply telegram (STX) is known as the reply delay time. The maximum permissible reply delay time is 20 ms, but it must not be less than the start interval. If node x does not respond within the maximum permissible reply delay time, an error message is deposited in the master. The master than sends the telegram for the next slave node.
Bus structure
The data transfer medium and the physical bus interface are essentially determined by what the bus system is used for. The physical interface of the USS protocol is based on the "Recommended Standard RS-485". For point-to-point links, a sub-quantity of EIA RS-232 (CCITT V.24) or TTY (20 mA current loop) can be used as the physical interface. The USS bus is based on a linear topology without branches. Both ends of the line terminate at a node. The maximum cable length (50 m) and therefore the maximum distance between the master and the last slave is limited by the characteristics of the cable, the ambient conditions and the data transfer rate [EIA Standard RS-422A Dezember 1978, Appendix, Page 14] The number of nodes is limited to a maximum of 33 (1 master, 32 slaves).
MICROMASTER 440
150
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Master
Slave First node
Slave
Maximum 32 slaves
Slave Last node
Fig. 3-44
USS bus topology
The two ends of a bus line (first node and last node) must be terminated with bus terminating networks. (refer to Section 3.7.1.3). Point-to-point connections are handled just like bus connections. One node has the master function and the other has the slave function. Data is transferred in accordance with Standard EIA 485. RS 232 can be used for point-to-point links. Data transfer is always half-duplex i.e. alternating between transmitting and receiving and it must be controlled by the software. The halfduplex technique allows the same cables to be used for both data-transfer directions. This permits simple and inexpensive bus cabling, operation in environments subject to interference and a high data transfer rate. A shielded, twisted two-wire cable is used as the bus cable. Table 3-16 Structural data
Conductor diameter Conductor Lay ratio Overall shield Overall diameter - External sheath 2 x 0,5 mm2
16 x 0,2 mm 20 twists / m
Braided, tin-plated copper wire, diameter 1,1 mm2 85 % optical coverage 5 mm Depending on the requirements regarding flame retardation, deposits after burning etc.
NOTE All information should only be considered as a recommendation. Deviations or different measures may be required depending on the particular requirements, the specific application and the conditions on site.
151
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Table 3-17
Thermal and electrical characteristics

40 / 200 M/km 300 V 1500 V
Cable resistance (20C) Insulation resistance (20C) Operating voltage (20C) Test voltage (20C) Temperature range Load capability Capacitance
-40 C T 80 C
5A 120 pF/m
Mechanical characteristics Single bending: Repeated bending:

5 x outer diameter 20 x outer diameter
Recommendations Standard cable, without any special requirements: Two-core, flexible, shielded conductor in accordance with VDE 0812, with colored PVC sheath. PVC insulation resistant to oil, resistant to cold and petroleum products. Type: LiYCY 2 x 0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin Halogen-free cable (no hydrochloric acid is generated when the cable burns): Halogen-free, highly flexible, resistant to extreme heat and cold. Sheath manufactured from a special ASS silicon-based composite. Type: ASS 1 x 2 x 0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin Recommended if halogen-free and silicon-free cables are required: Type: BETAflam 145 C-flex. 2x0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Studer-Kabel-AG, http://www.studer-kabel.ch/ Herrenmattstrasse 20, CH 4658 Dniken
The total cable length of the USS connection may not exceed 50 m (max. cable length). The max. data transfer rate depends on the number of connected nodes (devices) as well as on the closed-loop control technique / function selection (processor utilization). Nominal values can be taken from the following table:
Table 3-18 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate
Max. number of nodes (devices) V/f control Closed-loop vector control
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 7 -
Max. data transfer rate

9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s 93.7 kbit/s 115.2 kbit/s
MICROMASTER 440
152
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE If a higher baud rate or higher number of nodes is required, then the CB option boards (e.g. PROFIBUS, CAN) should be used to ensure disturbance-free operation.
3.7.1.2
The structure of net data

Information which, for example, a SIMATIC S7 control unit (= master) sends to a drive (= slave) or the drive sends to the control unit is placed in the net-data area of each telegram.
General structure of the net-data block

The net-data block is divided into two areas: the PKW (parameter ID value) range the PZD (process data) range The structure of the net data in the USS-protocol telegram is shown below.
Protocol frame
STX
LGE
ADR
Net data Parameter Process data (PKW) (PZD)
BCC
PKW: Parameter ID value (parameter area)
PZD: Process data (process-data area)
Fig. 3-45
Telegram structure
The PKW area relates to the handling of the parameter ID value (PKW) interface. The PKW interface is not a physical interface but a mechanism which handles parameter transfer between two communication partners (e.g. control unit and drive). This involves, for example, reading and writing parameter values and reading parameter descriptions and associated texts. All tasks which are performed via the PKW interface essentially involve operator control and visualization, service and diagnosis. The PZD area contains the signals required for the automation system:
Control word(s) and setpoint(s) from the master to the slave Status word(s) and actual value(s) from the slave to the master.
PKW area PKE IND PKW elements PZD1 PZD area variable length PZD16
variable length
Fig. 3-46
Structure of the PKW and PZD areas
The two areas together make up the net data block. This structure applies to telegrams from the master to the slave and vice versa.
PKW area
153
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
With the help of the PKW mechanism, the following tasks can be performed via any serial interface with the USS protocol: Reading and writing parameters Reading the description of a parameter The PKW area can be varied. Depending on the requirements, the following lengths can be parameterized using parameter P2013: 3 words P2013 = 3 4 words P2013 = 4 variable word length P2013 = 127 The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to single-word (16 bit) parameter values. The PKW area must be permanently set to 3 words at the master and the slave. This setting is made during start-up and should not be altered any more during bus operation.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word
PKE
IND Index
PWE1
Parameter ID
Parameter value 1
The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to double-word (32 bit) parameter values. Parameterization to a fixed length of 4 words applies to telegrams from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word
PKE
IND Index
PWE1
PWE2
Parameter ID
Parameter value (double word)
Telegram data transfer with variable telegram length (refer to the following example) means that the slave responds to a telegram from the master with a telegram whose length does not have to be the same length as the telegram from the master to the slave.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word
(m+2). word
.....
PKE
IND
PWE1
PWE2
With: 1 word m 118 words (maximum) when 8 PZD words (maximum) are contained in the net data block. 1 word m 126 words (maximum) when there is no PZD. The length of elements PEW1 to PWEm in the reply telegram and what is contained in them depends on the task issued by the master. Variable length means that only the number of words necessary to pass on the appropriate information is transferred. The minimum length, however. is always 3 words. If a slave, for example, transfers a parameter value which is a 16-bit quantity (e.g. the status word in parameter r0052; data format: U16), then only 3 words of the PKW area are sent in the telegram from the slave to the master. If, for example, for MICROMASTER the actual frequency is to be read (parameter r0021), then the PKW area in the telegram from the slave to the master is 4 words large; the reason for this is that the speed is represented as 32-bit quantity (data format: Float). It is mandatory to parameterize for a variable word length, if e.g. all values are to be read at once from an indexed parameter (refer to "Index", special setting, index =
MICROMASTER 440
154
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
255). This setting to variable word-length is made during start-up. (refer to parameter P2013).
Parameter ID (PKE)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st word Bit No.:
AK
SP M
PNU1
Parameter index (IND)
2nd word
5 4 3 2 1 0
15
14
13
12
11
10
Bit No.:
PNU2
RES
TXT
Index
Parameter value (PWE)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 (PWE1) (PWE2) 4 3 2 1 0
Bit No.: 3rd word 4th word
Parameter value, high Parameter value, low
The following applies: AK Task or reply ID SPM Toggle bit for processing of parameter-change reports (MICROMASTER does not support this, SPM = 0) PNU Parameter number RES Reserved TXT Read / write from parameter text (MICROMASTER does not support this, TXT = 0)
CAUTION Do not use a variable word length if SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 is the master. This setting must be made both at the master as well as at the slave and cannot be changed while the bus is operational. NOTE The PKW area is transferred in increasing order, always starting with the 1st word. Reserved fields or functions that are not supported should be specifically preassigned zero in the master implementation. The bit 11 (SPM) is the toggle bit for parameter change reports. Parameter change reports when reading/writing parameter texts are not supported by MICROMASTER.
Task or reply ID (AK):

Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the task or reply ID. The task IDs are sent in the telegram from the master to the slave. The meaning of the IDs is listed in the following table. Table 3-19 Task IDs (master -> drive converter)
Task ID Meaning Reply ID
155
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
positive
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2
negative
7 7 or 8 7 or 8 7 7 or 8 7 7 or 8 7 or 8 7 7 or 8 7 or 8 7 or 8 7 or 8 7 or 8
No task Request parameter value Change parameter value (word) and save only in RAM Change parameter value (double word) and save only in RAM Request descriptive element
descriptive 1
0 1 or 2 1 2 3 3 4 or 5 4 5 6 5 4 2 1 15
Changing the element 1 MICROMASTER does not support this Request parameter value (array)1 Change parameter value (array, word)2 and save only in RAM Change parameter value (array, double word)2 and save only in RAM Request the number of array elements Reserved Change parameter value (array, double word) and save in RAM and EEPROM2 Change parameter value (array, word) and save in RAM and EEPROM2 Change parameter value (double word) and save in RAM and EEPROM Change parameter value (word) and save in RAM and EEPROM Read or change text MICROMASTER does not support this
The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
MICROMASTER 440
156
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Entsprechend werden im Telegramm vom Slave an den Master an dieser Stelle die Antwortkennungen bertragen. Abhngig von der Auftragskennung sind nur bestimmte Antwortkennungen mglich.
Table 3-20
Respons e ID
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2
Response ID (converter -> master)

Request ID
0 1, 2 or 14 1, 3 or 13 4 or 5
word) 2 double
Significance
No response Transfer parameter value (word) Transfer parameter value (double word) Transfer descriptive
element 1
Transfer parameter value (array, Transfer parameter value (array,
6, 7 or 12
2
word)
6, 8 or 11 9 1 or 15 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 1114 or 15 15
Transfer the number of array elements Request cannot be executed (with fault number) The PKW interface does not have master authority Parameter change report (word) MICROMASTER does not support this Parameter change report (double word) MICROMASTER does not support this word) 2 Parameter change report MICROMASTER does not support this double word) 2 Parameter change report MICROMASTER does not support this Reserved Reserved Transfer text MICROMASTER does not support this
(array, (array,
The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
157
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Hat die Antwortkennung den Wert 7 (Auftrag nicht ausfhrbar), dann ist im Parameterwert 2 (PWE2) eine Fehlernummer hinterlegt. Die Fehlernummern sind in der folgenden Tabelle dokumentiert.
Table 3-21
Fault No.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 15 17 101
Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed"

Significance
Inadmissible legal parameter number (PNU); if PNU is not available Parameter value cannot be changed; if the parameter is a visualization parameter Lower or upper limit exceeded Erroneous sub-index No array Incorrect type of data Setting not permitted (can only be reset) Descriptive element cannot be changed; not possible No operator control rights Key word missing, device parameter: access keyl and/or special parameter access not appropriately set No text array available Request cannot be executed due to operating states; The frequency inverter state presently does not allow the request that was issued Parameter number presently de-activated; In the present frequency inverter state, the parameter has no function (e.g. closed-loop control type) Channel width too small: Only for short channels; the parameterized length of the PKW area has been selected too large due to the restrictions in the device. This fault message can only occur for the USS protocol on the technology module T 100 if basic device parameters are accessed from this interface Incorrect PKW number; only for G-SST 1/2 and SCB interface (USS). The fault number is transferred in the following two cases:
102
103
If the request involves all indices of an indexed parameter (request index equal to 255) or the complete parameter description is requested and a variable telegram length was not parameterized. If, for the request issue, the parameterized number of PKW data in the telegram is too low (e.g.: Changing from a double word and PKW number equal to 3 (words).
104
Parameter value not permissible; This fault number is transferred if the parameter value that is to be transferred is not assigned any function in the device or at the time of the change it is not able to be transferred for internal reasons (although it lies within the limits). The parameter is indexed e.g. request: PWE, change word for indexed parameters Request not implemented New minimum value New maximum value No BOP/AOP display, Parameter cannot be displayed on the BOP or AOP. The BOP/AOP key word does not match the parameter access stage.
105 106 200 201 203 204
MICROMASTER 440
158
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Parameter number (PNU)

The complete parameter number (refer to the parameter list) is formed from the "basis parameter number PNU1 and the "page parameter number PNU2. The following applies: PNU = PNU1 + 2000 PNU2 With PNU2 definition:
PNU2
15 20 14 23 13 22 12 21
2nd word Bit No.: Weighting
The parameter areas are mapped using PNU1 and PNU2 as follows:
Basis parameter number PNU1 bits 0 10 (PKE)
0 ... 1999 0 ... 1999 0 ... 1999 0 ... 1999 0 ... 1999 ... 0 ... 1999
Page parameter number PNU2 bits 12 15 (IND)

0 1 2 3 4 ... 15
Parameter number (area)

0 ... 1999 2000 ... 3999 4000 ... 5999 6000 ... 7999 8000 ... 9999 ... 30000 ... 31999
Index
The index (bit 0 to 7), depending on the task, describes a definite element: desired array element in the case of indexed parameters, desired element of the parameter description, Special significance of index value 255 For the following requests, the index value 255 has a special significance: "request parameter descriptive element", or. for the requests to read/write indexed parameters (= arrays) Here, the following applies:
Task ID
4 6 7, 8, 11 or 12
Meaning
The complete parameter description is requested All values of the indexed parameters are requested This request can generate fault message 102. All values of the indexed parameters should be changed. These requests can generate fault message 102.
159
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Parameter value (PWE)

The parameter value (PWE) is transferred, depending on the parameterization of the word length (refer to parameter "USS-PKW length" P2013) of the PKW area as word or double word (32 bit). Only one parameter value can be transferred in a telegram. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with 3 words (P2013 = 3), then only 16-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements, that are greater than 16 bit cannot be transferred. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized to be 4 words (P2013 = 4), then 16 and 32-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements that exceed 32 bits cannot be transferred. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with "variable length" (P2013 = 127), then 16, 32-bit parameter and parameter descriptive elements can be transferred. Further, all elements of an indexed parameter can be read or changed with a single request, as well as the complete parameter description requested if the index corresponds to the value 255 (index = 255). Transferring one 16-bit parameter value: 1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words: The value is in PWE1 2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words: The value is in PWE2 (least significant word, 4th word); PWE1 is set to 0. 3. Variable PKW area: The value is in PWE1. PWE2 and higher not available! Transferring one 32-bit parameter value: 1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words: Request is rejected with fault message 103. 2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words: PWE1 (most significant word; 3rd word) contains the high word of the double word, PWE2 (least significant word; 4th word) contains the low word of the double word. 3. Variable PKW area: As for 2.; PWE3 and higher not available!
Process data area (PZD)

Process data is continually exchanged between the master and slaves in this area. At the start of communications it is configured as to which process data is to be exchanged with a slave. For instance, for slave x, the current setpoint is to be transferred in the second PZD (= PZD2). This setting remains for the complete data transfer.
1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word .....
PZD1
PZD2
PZD3
PZD4
PZD8
PZD1 PZD8 = process data = control / status word(s) and setpoint / actual value(s)); The control / status word(s), setpoints and actual values required for the automation are transferred in this area. The length of the PZD area is defined by the number of PZD elements (P2012). Contrary to the PKW area, that can be variable, the length of this area between the communication partners (master and slave) must always be permanently declared.
MICROMASTER 440
160
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The maximum number of PZD words per telegram is, for MICROMASTER, limited to 8 words (USS-PZD length in MICROMASTER is set using parameter P2012). If only PKW data are to be transferred in the net data block, then the number of the PZD can also be 0! Depending on the data transfer direction, always control word 1 or status word 1 are to be transferred in the PZD1. Depending on the data transfer direction, the main setpoint or the main actual value is always transferred in PZD 2. Additional setpoints or actual values are set in the following process data PZD3 to PZDn. For MICROMASTER, if required, control word 2 or status word 2 should be transferred in PZD4. Request telegram, master slave
PZD1 Control word 1 PZD2 Setpoint 1 PZD3 Control word 2 PZD4 Setpoint 2
..... .....
PZD8 Setpoint 6
Response telegram, slave master

PZD1 Status word 1 PZD2 Main actual value 1 PZD3 Actual value 2 PZD4 Actual value
..... .....
PZD8 Actual value
status word 2
NOTE A maximum of 8 PZD words A minimum of 0 PZD words - i.e. no PZD area in the net data area On the USS bus, PZD n is always transferred before PZD n+1. For MICROMASTER, double words cannot be transferred in the PZD section. Data received from MICROMASTER is always interpreted as 16-bit words. The appropriate de-normalization is implemented by assigning the appropriate parameters. If MICROMASTER sends data to the master via the PZD area, then for physical quantities, a normalization is made to a 16-bit value (4000 hex notation). The setpoint can be freely assigned to the actual value; This means for example that the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request telegram in PZD2 so the actual frequency value can be signaled back in PZD2 in the response telegram (this also makes sense from a technological/process perspective); or however, also another actual value such as the actual torque value, actual voltage actual value or actual current value. The setpoint can be freely assigned to the actual value; for example the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request telegram in PZD2, which means that the actual frequency value can be signaled back in the response telegram in PZD2 (this also makes sense from a technological/process perspective) or also another actual value such as actual torque value, actual voltage value or actual current value.
161
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.7.1.3
USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485)

In order to ensure disturbance-free USS operation, the bus cable must be terminated at both ends using bus terminating resistors. In this case, the bus cable from the first USS device [node] up to the last USS device [node] should be considered as one bus cable so that the USS bus should be terminated twice. For the first bus node [device] (e.g. master) and last bus node [device] (e.g. drive converter), th bus terminating resistor must be switched-in.
NOTE
When supplied, the bus terminating resistors are not switched-in! Please note that you only switch-in the bus terminating at the first bus node [device] and last bus note [device]! The bus terminating resistors should be always set with the system in a no-voltage state (e.g. powered-down)! Data transfer errors on the bus are possible! In active bus operation, devices where the terminating resistor is switched-in, may not be in a no-voltage state. The terminating resistor draws the voltage from the connected device. This is the reason that the terminating resistor is no longer effective when the device is in a no-voltage state (e.g. when powered down) .
The following diagram shows the structure of a bus connection through terminals 29, 30:
Potential equilization cable
RS485 terminator
Master
Screening
Screening
Screening
a terminating resistor must be connected at the first and last devices [nodes] on the bus cable no bus termination for other devices [nodes]
Fig. 3-47
Connecting the USS bus cable
MICROMASTER 440
162
RS485 terminator
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
When the MICROMASTER is used in an RS485 bus communications network the following is required: 1. A power supply 2. A terminating resistor between P+ and N- at both bus ends (refer to Fig. 3-48)
Control terminals
+10 V 0 V P+ N-
29
30
RS485 terminator
to terminal 2 of the next slave
\\erlf418a\drivebase$\Team\
MM4_Docu\Graphiken
Fig. 3-48 Connecting the RS485 terminator
If the frequency inverter is the last slave on the bus (refer to Fig. 3-47), then the P+ and N- of the RS485 terminator provided must be connected there to the RS485 terminals (refer to Fig. 3-48). P10 and 0 V can be connected to terminals 1 and 2 for the power supply. If the frequency inverter is the first slave, then the bus should only be terminated there with P+ and N-.
NOTE When making the installation it must be ensured that EMC disturbances/noise cannot result in communication failures/errors or damage to the RS485 drivers. As a minimum, the following measures must be taken: 1) Shield the motor cable and correctly ground the shield at both ends. If at all possible, avoid interruptions in the cables. If this cannot be avoided, then it must be ensured that the shield continues in an EMC-correct fashion at the connecting locations. 2) All node points must be well grounded (EMC ground). 3) All relay coils must be provided with noise suppression elements. 4) The cables should be routed - as far as possible - separately from other cables. For RS485 cables it is especially important that they are kept well away from motor cables. 5) The shields of RS485 cables must be correctly grounded. If the AOP communicates via the USS protocol, then contrary to the BOP, the appropriate USS parameters (Table 3-13 and Table 3-14) should be set. For error-free communications, the appropriate communication parameters must be harmonized with one another and correctly set - in the frequency inverter, the connected device and/or in the connected option board. Please refer to the corresponding Operating Instructions for the AOP and for the communications modules. While RS485 communications is operational the power supply must always be available using pull-up/pull-down resistors.
163
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.8
Fixed frequencies (FF)

Number: Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: 15 P1001 P1028 FP3200, FP3210
A setpoint can be entered via the analog inputs, the serial communication interfaces, the JOG function, the motorized potentiometer as well as also using fixed frequencies. The fixed frequencies are defined using parameters P1001 P1015 and selected via binector inputs P1020 P1023, P1025, P1026. The effective fixed frequency setpoint is available via connector output r1024 which means that it can be connected further. If this is to be used as setpoint source, then either parameter P1000 or P0719 should be modified or BICO parameter r1024 should be connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075. Contrary to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly changes BICO parameters P1070, P1075.
Example:
Fixed frequencies as setpoint source P1000 = 3 a) Standard method P1070 = 1024, P1075 = 0 b) BICO method
3 methods are available when selecting the fixed frequencies.
Direct selection
In this particular mode, the control signal directly selects the fixed frequency. This control signal is entered via the binector inputs. If several fixed frequencies are simultaneously active, then the selected frequencies are added.
Table 3-22 Example for direct coding via digital inputs
DIN6
FF0 FF1 FF2 FF3 FF4 FF5 FF6 FF1+FF2 FF1+FF2+FF3+FF4+FF5+FF6 0 Hz P1001 P1002 P1003 P1004 P1005 P1006 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
DIN5
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
DIN4
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
DIN3
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
DIN2
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
DIN1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
The fixed frequencies can be selected via the digital inputs as well as also via serial communication interfaces. The fixed frequency is selected, when using digital inputs, using 2 techniques. This will be shown in the following example using the fixed frequency P1001 and digital input 1 (refer to Fig. 3-49). a) Standard methods b) BICO methods

P0701 = 15 P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1
MICROMASTER 440
164
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
P0701 = 15 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1 P0702 = 15 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 1 P1016 P1020 DIN1 r0722.0 0
1 2,3
P1017
0 P1001 + 0 P1002 +
P1021 DIN2 r0722.1 0

1 2,3
r1024
....
Fig. 3-49
Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2
Direct selection + ON command

When this fixed frequency is selected, the fixed frequencies are also directly selected whereby the selection is combined with the ON command. When this technique is used, a separate ON command is not required. The following is obtained essentially analog to the example shown above: a) Standard method b) BICO method

P0701 = 16 P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 2
Binary-coded selection + ON command

Using this technique up to 16 fixed frequencies can be selected using 4 control signals. These 4 control signals are either entered via digital inputs or a serial communications interface. The fixed frequencies are indirectly selected using the binary coding (refer to Table 3-23, e.g. selected using the digital DIN inputs), whereby the selection is combined with the ON command.
Table 3-23 Example for binary coding via digital inputs
DIN4 DIN3 DIN2 DIN1
0 Hz P1001 P1002 P1014 P1015
FF0 FF1 FF2 FF14 FF15
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1
...
165
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Contrary to "Direct selection + ON command", the ON command is only active if the setting for the first 4 binary inputs is set to "Binary-coded selection + ON command" or P0701 = P0702 = P0703 = P0704 = 17. The following is obtained analog to the above example: a) Standard method b) BICO method

P0701 = 17 P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3
P0701 = 17 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3 P0702 = 17 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 3 P1016 P1020 DIN1 r0722.0 0
1 2,3
P1017
P1021 DIN2 r0722.1

1
. .. .
2,3
...
0 0 0 1
Festf requenz 1 -650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P1001.D ( 0.00)
. . . Festf requenz 15
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P1015.D ( 65.00)
1 1 1 1
. . .
CO: IstFestf req. r1024
Fig. 3-50
Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded method
MICROMASTER 440
166
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.9
Motorized potentiometer (MOP)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1031 r1050 FP3100
This function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer to enter setpoints. The motorized potentiometer value is adjusted using the "Raise" and "Lower control signal" which is selected using BICO parameters P1035 and P1036 (refer to Fig. 3-51). The value which has been set is available through connector output r1050 so that it can be further connected and used.
"1"
P0840
DIN BOP USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link
"0" "1"
P1035
"0" "1"
P1036
"0" f P1082
P1080
P1120 -P1080
P1121 fact
r1050 -P1082
Fig. 3-51
Motorized potentiometer
Selecting via serial interfaces

The MOP functionality can be selected via the operator panels (refer to Section 3.2), digital inputs as well as via serial interfaces (refer to the example). Parameterization is also possible directly using BICO parameters P1035 and P1036 as well as also parameters P0700 and P0719. In this case, for a value assigned to P0700, the BICO parameter is appropriately modified.
Example:
Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface
a) Standard method
P0700 = 4
b) BICO method
P1035 = 2032.13 P1036 = 2032.14 :::: (refer to P0700 for a complete list)
167
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
If the motorized potentiometer is to be used as setpoint source, then either parameter P1000 or P0719 should be modified or the BICO parameter r1050 should be connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075. Contrary to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly changes BICO parameters P1070, P1075.
Example:
Setpoint via the motorized potentiometer (MOP)
a) Standard method b) BICO method
P1000 = 1
P1070 = 1050 P1075 = 0 The MOP is configured using the following parameters and has the mode of operation as shown in Table 3-24: Limits using the minimum frequency P1080 or maximum frequency P1082 Ramp-up/ramp-down time P1120 or P1121 Inhibits MOP reversing function P1032 Saves the MOP setpoint P1031 MOP setpoint P1040
Table 3-24 Mode of operation of the MOP
Function
Motorized potentiometer Lower Raise
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Setpoint is frozen Raise setpoint Lower setpoint Setpoint is frozen
Selecting via BOP or AOP

The following settings / operator actions should be made when selecting the motorized potentiometer using the BOP or AOP:
Table 3-25 Selecting the motorized potentiometer
BOP
1 1 2032.13 (2032.D) 2032.14 (2032.E)
Parameters / keys
Command source Setpoint source P0700 P1000 P1035 P1036
AOP (at the BOP link)

4
Raise MOP output frequency Lower MOP output frequency
MICROMASTER 440
168
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.10
JOG
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1055 P1061 A0923 FP5000
The JOG function is used as follows: To check the functionality of the motor and drive inverter after commissioning has been completed (the first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.) Positioning a drive / a driven load into a specific position Traversing a drive, e.g. after a program has been interrupted The drive is traversed using this function by entering fixed frequencies P1058, P1059. The JOG mode can be selected either using the operator panel (refer to Section 3.2), digital inputs or also via the serial interfaces (refer to the example). An ON/OFF command is not used to move the drive, but when the "JOG keys" are pressed. These "JOG keys" are selected using the BICO parameters P1055 and P1056.
A0923 DIN BOP USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link JOG right
P1055 (0)
A0923 t
"1" "0" "1"
JOG left
P1056 (0)
"0" f
P1082 P1058 t
P1060
P1061
P1059 -P1082
P1060
Fig. 3-52
JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise
If both JOG keys are simultaneously pressed, then the instantaneous frequency is kept (constant velocity phase) and alarm A0923 is output. When a key is pressed, the drive inverter accelerates the motor to the fixed frequency in the time entered in P1060. This frequency is only exited after the key has been cancelled and the drive then brakes down to 0 Hz in the time entered in P1061. In addition to the explicit parameterization (P1055 and P1056), the JOG functionality is also enabled via parameter P0700 or P0719 (implicit parameterization). In this case, if a value is assigned to P0700, the BICO parameter is appropriately modified.
P1061
169
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Example:
Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface

a) Standard method b) BICO method
P0700 = 4 P1055 = 2032.8 P1056 = 2032.9 :::: (refer to P0700 for a complete list)
3.11
PID controller (technological controller)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: Features: - cycle time: P2200 P2201 P2355 FP3300, FP3400, FP5100 8 ms
In addition to the open-loop/closed-loop control of a three-phase motor (standard application for a frequency inverter), MICROMASTER has a technology controller. This can be used to control process quantities such as pressure or level. Depending on the application, different control structures are required to control process quantities. For MICROMASTER, the following structures have been integrated; these can be selected or de-selected using parameters P2200, P2251 (also refer to Fig. 3-53): a) Variable-speed drive (VSD) b) Closed-loop PID control c) Closed-loop dancer roll control The PID controller integrated in MICROMASTER is required for control structures b) and c). The frequency inverter can address many new applications using the higher-level control (closed-loop PID/dancer roll control). The following typical applications can be implemented: Closed-loop pressure control for extruders Closed-loop water level control for pump drives Closed-loop temperature control for fan drives Closed-loop dancer roll position control for winder applications And similar control tasks
MICROMASTER 440
170
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Application SUM setpoint
Control structure Motor control
1 3
AFM
RFG
v Variable speed drive (VSD)
p2* p2 p2 v2* v2 v1
PID setpoint PID feedback
PID RFG
PID
PID limit
AFM
RFG
Motor control
PID control SUM setpoint PID setpoint PID feedback PID RFG PID PID limit Dancer control AFM RFG Motor control
4 x2
x2* x2
SUM 1 2 3 4 P2200 = 0:0 2) P2251 = 0 P2200 = 1:0 2) P2251 = 0 P2200 = 0:0 1) P2251 = 1 P2200 = 1:0 1) P2251 = 1 VSD
Setpoint via PID controller
RFG ON: active OFF1/3: active ON: OFF1/3: active ON: active OFF1/3: active ON: active OFF1/3: active
PID-RFG ON: OFF1/3: -
PID control
VSD
ON: active OFF1/3: ON: OFF1/3: -
Dancer control
ON: active OFF1/3: active
1) will take change with drive running 2) change only taken when drive stopped
Fig. 3-53
Structure of the technology controller
171
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.11.1
Closed-loop PID control

MICROMASTER has a technology controller (PID controller, enabled using P2200); this can be used to execute basic, higher-level control functions. The technological setpoints and actual values can be entered via the PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP), PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF), analog inputs (ADC, ADC2) or via serial interfaces (USS on BOP link, USS on COM link, CB on COM link) (refer to the example). The appropriate parameterization of the BICO parameter defines which setpoints or actual values are to be used (refer to Fig. 3-54).
PID MOP ADC PID FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 P2264 P2200 P2254 P2253 PID SUM PID PT1 PID RFG PID PT1 PID SCL PID PID PIDOutput
0 1
Motor control
&
P2251
Fig. 3-54
Structure of the technological controller (PID controller)
Important parameter settings for the setpoint and actual value sources of the closed-loop PID control:
Parameter
P2200 P2251 P2253
Parameter text
BI: Enable PID controller PID mode CI: PID setpoint
Setting
1.0 722.x 0 2224 2250 755.0 2015.1 2019.1 2050.1
Meaning
PID controller always active Digital input x PID as setpoint Fixed PID setpoint (PID-FF) PID-MOP Analog input 1 USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB on COM link Analog input 1 Analog input 2
P2264
CI: PID feedback
755.0 755.1
MICROMASTER 440
172
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Example:
Permanent PID controller should fulfill the following secondary conditions: PID controller enable and PID setpoint input via PID fixed frequencies and PID actual value via the analog input Parameterization: a) Permanent PID controller enable: P2200 = 1.0 b) Setpoint input via PID-FF: P2253 = 2224 c) Actual value input via analog input ADC: P2264 = 755 d) Setpoint input via PID: P2251 = 0
The supplementary (additional) setpoint is added to the main setpoint (PID-SUM) and the sum is fed to the setpoint filter (PID-PT1) at the setpoint-actual value summation point via the PID ramp-function generator (PID-RFG). The source of the supplementary setpoint (BICO parameter P2254), the ramp-up / ramp-down times of the PID ramp-function generator (P2257, P2258) as well as also the filter time (P2261) can be adapted to the particular application by appropriately parameterizing the corresponding parameters. Similar to the PID setpoint branch, the actual value branch of the technological controller has a filter (PID-PT1) which can be set using parameter P2265. In addition to the smoothing, the actual value can be modified using a scaling unit (PID-SCL). The technological controller can be parameterized as either P, I, PI or PID controller using parameters P2280, P2285 or P2274.
P2293 P2291 P2263
0
P2280 P2285
Kp Tn y x
PID setpoint
+
1
d dt
+ +
Motor control r2294
r2262 P2274 PID feedback r2272
r2273 P2292 P2293
Fig. 3-55
PID controller
For specific applications, the PID output quantity can be limited to defined values. This can be achieved using the fixed limits - P2291 and P2292. In order to prevent the PID controller output exercising large steps at power-on, these PID output limits are ramped-up with ramp time P2293 from 0 to the corresponding value P2291 (upper limit for the PID output) and P2292 (lower limit for the PID output). As soon as these limits have been reached, the dynamic response of the PID controller is no longer limited by this ramp-up/ramp-down time (P2293).
173
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.11.1.1
PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P2231 r2250 FP3400
The PID controller has a PID motorized potentiometer which can be separately adjusted. The functionality is identical with the motorized potentiometer (refer to Section 3.9), whereby the PID parameters are emulated in the range from P2231 r2250 (refer to the comparison Table 3-26).
Table 3-26 Correspondence between the parameters
Motorized potentiometer P1031[3] P1032 P1035[3] P1036[3] P1040[3] r1050 Setpoint memory of the MOP Inhibit reverse direction of MOP BI: Enable MOP (UP command) BI: Enable MOP (DOWN command) Setpoint of the MOP CO: Act. output freq. of the MOP
PID motorized potentiometer P2231[3] P2232 P2235[3] P2236[3] P2240[3] r2250 Setpoint memory of PID-MOP Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-CMD) BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWNCMD) Setpoint of PID-MOP CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP
MICROMASTER 440
174
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.11.1.2
PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF)

Number: Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: 15 P2201 P2228 FP3300, FP3310
Analog to the fixed frequencies (refer to Section 3.7), the PID controller has separate programmable PID fixed setpoints. The values are defined using parameters P2201 P2215 and are selected using binector inputs P2220 P2223, P2225, P2226. The selected PID fixed setpoint is available via connector output r2224 where it can be further processed (e.g. as PID main setpoint P2253 = 2224). 3 methods are available to select the PID fixed setpoints, analog to the fixed frequencies (Section 3.7): Direct selection Direct selection + ON command Binary-coded selection + ON command The methods are selected using parameters P2216 P2219, P2225, P2227.
P0701 = 15 or P0701 = 99, P2220 = 722.0, P2216 = 1
P2216
P2220 DIN1 r0722.0 0
1 2,3
....
0 P2201
....
....
Fig. 3-56
r2224
Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via DIN1
175
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.11.1.3
PID dancer roll control

For various continuous production processes, e.g. in the paper and pulp industry, or in the manufacture of cables, it is necessary to control (closed-loop) the velocity of stations along the production process so that the continuous material web is not subject to any inadmissible tension levels. It is also important that no folds or creases are formed. For applications such as these, it is practical to provide a type of material buffer in the form of a loop with a defined tension. This provides a decoupling between the individual drive locations. This loop represents the difference between the material fed-in and that fed-out and therefore indicates the process quality. Using the PID dancer roll control, with MICROMASTER 440 it is possible to ensure that continuous material webs have a constant tension.
v2 Application v1
x2
v2* Structure x2* x2
SUM setpoint PID setpoint PID feedback PID RFG PID PID limit
AFM
RFG
Motor control
Fig. 3-57
PID dancer roll control
The velocity v1 is assumed to be an independent disturbance; the input velocity v2 should be controlled using drive rolls A2 so that the length x2 of the loop corresponds, as far as possible, to the setpoint. The structure and important parameters for the PID dancer roll control are listed in Fig. 3-58 and Table 3-27.
MICROMASTER 440
176
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE When selecting the closed-loop dancer roll control it should be noted that neither PID-MOP nor PID-FF should be used - but instead the MOP (motorized potentiometer, refer to Section 3.9) or the FF (fixed frequencies, refer to Section 3.7).
P1120 SUM AFM P2257 P2258 P1121
P1070 MOP ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 P2264 PID PT1 P2265 P2254 P2253 PID SUM P1075
RFG P2261 P2280 P2285
0 1
PID RFG
PID PT1 P2269 P2270
PID PID PIDOutput
Motor control
&
P2251 =1
PID SCL P2271
P2200
Fig. 3-58 Table 3-27

Parameter P1070
Structure of the closed-loop PID-dancer roll control Important parameters for the PID dancer roll control
Parameter text CI: Main setpoint Setting 1024 1050 755.0 2015.1 2019.1 2050.1 MOP Analog input 1 USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB on COM link PID controller always active Digital input x PID as trim Fixed setpoint (FF) MOP Analog input 1 USS on BOP link USS on COM link CB on COM link Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Meaning Fixed setpoint (FF)
P2200 P2251 P2253
BI: Enable PID controller PID mode CI: PID setpoint
1.0 722.x 1 1024 1050 755.0 2015.1 2019.1 2050.1
P2264
CI: PID feedback
755.0 755.1
177
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.12
Setpoint channel
The setpoint channel (refer to Fig. 3-59) forms the coupling element between the setpoint source and the closed-loop motor control. MICROMASTER has a special characteristic which allows the setpoint to be entered simultaneously from two setpoint sources. The generation and subsequent modification (influencing the direction, suppression frequency, up/down ramp) of the complete setpoint is carried-out in the setpoint channel.
MOP ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link ADC2 Setpoint source Setpoint channel Motor control Additonal setpoint SUM Main setpoint AFM Limit RFG Motor control
Fig. 3-59
Setpoint channel
3.12.1
Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM)

Parameter range: Warnings Fault Function chart number: P1070 r1114 FP5000, FP5200
For applications where the control quantities are generated from central control systems, fine tuning is often required locally on-site (correction quantity). For MICROMASTER, this can be very elegantly realized using the summation point where the main and supplementary (additional) setpoint are added in the setpoint channel. In this case, both quantities are simultaneously read-in via two separate or one setpoint source and summed in the setpoint channel. Depending on external circumstances, the supplementary setpoint can be dynamically disconnected or switched-in to the summation point (refer to Fig. 3-60). This functionality can be used to advantage, especially for discontinuous processes.
MICROMASTER 440
178
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
CI: Main setpoint P1070.C (755:0) CI: Main setp scal P1071.C (1:0) + + BI: Disab.add.setp P1074.C (0:0) CI: Add. setp.scal P1076.C (1:0) CI: Add. setpoint P1075.C (0:0) 0 1
r1078 AFM Limit RFG Motor control
Fig. 3-60
Summation
MICROMASTER has the following possibilities to select the setpoint source: 1. P1000 selecting the frequency setpoint source 2. P0719 selecting the command / setpoint source 3. BICO parameterization - P1070 CI: Main setpoint - P1075 CI: Additional setpoint Further, the main setpoint as well as the supplementary (additional) setpoint can be scaled independently of one another. In this case, for example, a user can simply implement an override function using the appropriate parameterization. A scan sequence is generally associated with a forwards and a backwards motion. When selecting the reversing functionality, after reaching the end position, a direction of rotation reversal can be initiated in the setpoint channel (refer to Fig. 3-61). On the other hand, if it is to be prevented that a direction of rotation reversal or a negative frequency setpoint is to be entered via the setpoint channel, then this can be inhibited using BICO parameter P1110.
r1078 P1113
0
P1110 P1091
0
... P1094
Skip
P1080 P1082
SUM
-1
Limit
RFG
P1101
Fig. 3-61
Modifying the frequency setpoint
Driven machines can have one or several resonance points in the range from 0 Hz up to the reference frequency. These resonance points result in oscillations which, under worst case conditions, can damage the driven load. Using suppression frequencies, MICROMASTER allows these resonant frequencies to be passed through as quickly as possible. This means that the suppression frequencies increase the availability of the driven load over the long term.
179
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.12.2
Ramp-function generator (RFG)

Parameter range: P1120, P1121 r1119, r1170 P1130 P1142 FP5000, FP5300
Warnings Faults Function chart number:
The ramp-function generator is used to limit the acceleration when the setpoint changes according to a step function. This therefore helps to reduce the stressing on the mechanical system of the machine. An acceleration ramp and a braking ramp can be set independently of one another using the ramp-up time P1120 and the ramp-down time P1121. This allows a controlled transition when the setpoint is changed (refer to Fig. 3-62).
f
Without rounding
fmax f2
f1
P1120
P1121
f fmax f2
With rounding
f1
P1130
tup
P1131
P1132
tdown
P1133
for
1 f 2 - f1 P1120 (P1130 + P1131) P1082 2 t up = 1 (P1130 + P1131) + f 2 f 1 P1120 2 P1082
for
1 f 2 - f1 P1121 (P1132 + P1133) P1082 2

t down = 1 f -f (P1132 + P1133) + 2 1 P1121 2 P1082
Fig. 3-62
Ramp-function generator
In order to avoid torque surges at the transitions (constant velocity phase accelerating / braking phase), additional rounding-off times P1130 P1133 can be programmed. This is especially important for applications (e.g. transporting/pumping liquids or for cranes) which require an especially "soft", jerkfree acceleration and braking.
MICROMASTER 440
180
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
If the OFF1 command is initiated while the drive is accelerating, then rounding-off can be activated or de-activated using parameter P1134 (refer to Fig. 3-63). These rounding-off times are defined using parameters P1132 and P1133.
P1132 > 0 P1133 > 0
f f Set
P1134 = 0 Setpoint reached
Setpoint not reached
P1132
P1133
P1132
P1133
f Set
Setpoint reached
Setpoint not reached P1134 = 1
t P1132 ON OFF1 t P1133 P1133
Fig. 3-63
Rounding off after an OFF1 command
In addition to the rounding-off times, the ramp-function generator can be influenced using external signals. The ramp-function generator provides the following functionality using BICO parameters P1140, P1141 and P1142 (refer to Table 3-28).
181
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Table 3-28
BICO parameters for ramp-function generator

Parameter Description The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 if the binary signal = 0. The ramp-function generator output keeps its actual value if the binary signal = 0. If the binary signal = 0, then the ramp-function generator input is set to 0 and the output is reduced to 0 via the ramp-function generator ramp.
P1140 P1141 P1142
BI: RFG enable BI: RFG start BI: RFG enable setpoint
The ramp-function generator itself is enabled after the pulses have been enabled (inverter enable) and after the excitation time has expired (P0346). After limiting to the maximum speeds for the positive and negative directions of rotation (P1082, P1082 or 0 Hz for the direction of rotation inhibit) the setpoint speed for the control is obtained (r1170).
NOTE The maximum frequency of the setpoint channel is set using parameter P1080. In V/f mode the maximum frequency is 650 Hz. In vector mode the maximum frequency it is limited to 200 Hz (r1084).
MICROMASTER 440
182
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.12.3
OFF/braking functions
Parameter range: P1121, P1135, P2167, P2168 P0840 P0849 r0052 bit 02 -
The drive inverter and the user must respond to an extremely wide range of situations and stop the drive. In this case, both requirements relating to operations as well as drive inverter protective functions (e.g. electrical and thermal overload) and man-machine protective functions have to be taken into account. As a result of the different OFF/braking functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) MICROMASTER can flexibly respond to the requirements mentioned above.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is closely coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is withdrawn, then OFF1 is directly activated. The drive is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-down time P1121. If the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled.
f act P1082 fmax f2
OFF1
P2167 t P2168 r0052 Bit02 Operation Pulse ncellation t t down, AUS1 = P1121 tdown,AUS1 P1121 f2 P1082
Fig. 3-64
OFF1
183
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
NOTE OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter P0840 (BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing). BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700. The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source. If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input that was last set, is valid, e.g. DIN3 is active. OFF1 is low active When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies: OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1 OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking. When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168 are not taken into account.
OFF2
The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. This means that the motor coasts-down and it is not possible to brake in a controlled fashion.
f act P1082 fmax
OFF2
r0052 Bit02 Operation Pulse ancellation
Fig. 3-65
OFF2
NOTE The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are defined using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2). As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the BOP. This source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as command source P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using DIN2 P0702 = 3). OFF2 is low-active When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies: OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1
MICROMASTER 440
184
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of the autonomous OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled as for the OFF1 command.
f act P1082 fmax f2
OFF3
P2167 t P2168 r0052 Bit02 Operation Pulse ncellation t tdown,AUS3 P1135 t down, AUS3 = P1135 f2 P1082
Fig. 3-66
OFF3
NOTE OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters P0848 (BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3). OFF3 is low active When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies: OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1
185
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.12.4
Manual / automatic operation

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P0700, P1000, P0810, P0811 -
It is necessary to change-over from the automatic mode into the manual mode to load and unload production machines and to feed new materials (e.g. batch processing). The machine operator carries-out the preparatory activities for subsequent automatic operation in the manual mode. In the manual mode, the machine operator locally controls the machine (enters the ON/OFF command as well as also the setpoint). A changeover is only made into the automatic mode after the set-up has been completed. In the automatic mode, the control (open-loop) of the machines and production processes are handled by a higher-level control system (e.g. PLC). This operation is maintained until it is necessary to again load and unload the machine or feed new material into the machine or production process. For MICROMASTER 440, indexed parameters P0700 or P1000 and BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to changeover (toggle between) the manual/automatic modes. The command source is defined using P0700 and the setpoint source is defined using P1000 (refer to Table 3-30), whereby index 0 (P0700[0] and P1000[0]) defines the automatic mode and index 1 (P0700[1] and P1000[1]) the manual mode. BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to changeover (toggle between) the automatic and manual modes. These BICO parameters can be controlled from any control source (refer to Table 3-29). In so doing, in addition to P0700 and P1000, also all of the other CDS parameters are changed over (manual/automatic changeover is generalized as a CDS changeover).
P0810 P0811 Command source P0700 P0700[0] = 2 Terminals BOP USS CB Setpoint source P1000 MOP ADC FF P1000[0] = 2 P1000[1] = 3 P0700[1] = 1 Cmd Remote Cmd Local Cmd 3. CDS Setpoint Remote Setpoint Local Setpoint 3. CDS
0 1 2
Sequence control
0 1 2
Setpoint channel
Motor control
Fig. 3-67
Changing-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811
MICROMASTER 440
186
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Table 3-29
Examples for settings of parameter P0810

Command source
Parameter setting
P0810 = 722.2 requires P0703 = 99 P0810 = 2032.15 P0810 = 2036.15 P0810 = 2090.15 Table 3-30
Digital input 3 USS at the BOP link USS at the COM link CB at the COM link
Possible settings for parameters P0700 and P1000

Valu Setpoint source (P1000) e
Valu Command source (P0700) e
1 2 4 5 6
BOP (keyboard) Terminal strip USS at the BOP link USS at the COM link CB at the COM link
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10
...
MOP setpoint Analog setpoint Fixed frequency USS at the BOP link USS at the COM link CB at the COM link Analog setpoint 2 No main setpoint + MOP setpoint Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
77
187
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.13
Free function blocks (FFB)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: Cycle time: P2800 P2890 FP4800 FP4830 128 ms
For many applications, interlocking logic is required in order to control (open-loop) the drive inverter. This interlocking logic couples several states (e.g. access control, plant/system state) to form a control signal (e.g. ON command). Previously this was implemented using either a PLC or relays. This represented additional costs for the plant or system. In addition to logic operations, increasingly, arithmetic operations and storage elements are required in drive inverters which generate a new unit from several physical quantities. This simplified PLC functionality is integrated in MICROMASTER 440 using the freely programmable function blocks (FFB). The following function blocks are integrated in MICROMASTER 440:
Table 3-31
No.
3
Free function blocks

Type Example
AND 1
P2800 P2801[0] P2810 Index0 Index1
AND
A B
&
r2811
A 0 0 1 1
B 0 1 0 1
C 0 0 0 1
OR
OR 1
P2800 P2801[3] P2816 Index0 Index1
A B
r2817
A 0 0 1 1
B 0 1 0 1
C 0 1 1 1
XOR
XOR 1
P2800 P2801[6] P2822 Index0 Index1
A B
=1
r2823
A 0 0 1 1
B 0 1 0 1
C 0 1 1 0
NOT
NOT 1
P2800 P2801[9]
P2828 Index0
r2829
A 0 1
C 1 0
MICROMASTER 440
188
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
No.
2
Type
D-FlipFlops D-FlipFlop 1
Example
P2800 P2801[12] P2834 Index0 Index1 Index2 Index3 STORE Q RESET (Q=0) r2836 D Q r2835
SET (Q=1)
POWER ON
1
SET RESET 1 0 1 0 0 D STORE x x x Q 1 0 Qn-1 1 0 0 Q 0 1 Qn-1 0 1 1 0 x 1 x 1 x 0 1 0 0 POWER-ON
P2800 P2801[14]
RS-FlipFlops
RS-FlipFlop 1
P2840
Index0 Index1
SET (Q=1)
r2841
POWER ON
RESET (Q=0)
r2842
SET RESET 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 POWER-ON
Q Qn-1 0 1 Qn-1 0
Q Qn-1 1 0 Qn-1 1
Timer
Timer 1
P2800 P2802.0 P2850 (0.000) P2851(0) Delay Time Mode
ON Delay T 0 0
OFF Delay
P2849 Index0
In
ON/OFF Delay T T
Out
2
r2852 r2853
Pulse Gernerator T
NOut 1
189
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
No.
2
Type
ADD ADD 1
Example
P2800 P2802[4] P2869
Index0 Index1 x1 x2
x1 + x2
200% -200%
Result
r2870
Result = x1 + x2 If: x1 + x2 > 200% x1 + x2 < -200% Result = 200% Result = -200%
SUB
SUB 1
P2800 P2802[6] P2873
Index0 Index1 x1 x2
x1 + x2
200% -200%
Result
r2874
Result = x1 - x2 If: x1 - x2 > 200% x1 - x2 < -200% Result = 200% Result = -200%
MUL
MUL 1
P2800 P2802[8] P2877
Index0 Index1 x1 x2 x1 x 2 100% 200% -200% Result
r2878
Result = If:
x1 x2 > 200% Result = 200% 100% x1 x2 < -200% Result = -200% 100%
x1 x2 100%
DIV
DIV 1
P2800 P2802[10] P2881
Index0 Index 1 x1 x2 x1 100% X2 200% -200% Result
r2882
Result = If:
x1 100% x2 Result = 200% Result = -200%
x1 100% > 200% x2 x1 100% < -200% x2
CMP
CMP 1
P2800 P2802[12] P2885
Index0 Index1 x1 x2
CMP
Out = x1 x2
Out
r2886
x1 x2 Out = 1 x1 < x2 Out = 0
FFB setpoints (connector settings)
Connector Setting in %
P2889 P2890
Range : -200% ... 200%
MICROMASTER 440
190
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps: 1. General enable P2800: The function "Free function blocks (FFB)" is enabled using parameter P2800 (P2800 =1). 2. Specific enable P2801, P2802: Using parameter P2801 or P2802, the particular function block is enabled (P2801[x] > 0 or P2802[x] > 0) and the sequence in which they are executed is also defined. All free function blocks are called within the 128 ms time slice (cycle time). Further, to adapt to the application, the chronological sequence in which the FFB are executed, can also be controlled. This is especially important so that the FFB are executed in the sequence which is technologically correct. Parameter P2801 and P2802 are used for the individual enable function as well as to define the priority in which the blocks are executed. The following priority levels can be assigned: 0 Inactive 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 The following Table indicates that the priority decreases from the top towards the bottom (priority 1 level) or from the right to left (priority 2 line) (refer to Table 3-32).
Table 3-32
3 Level 2 Level 1 Inactive 0
Level
FFB priority table

low Priority 2 high Priority 1
CMP 2 CMP 1 DIV 2 DIV 1 MUL 2 MUL 1 SUB 2 SUB 1 ADD 2 ADD 1 Timer 4 Timer 3 Timer 2 Timer 1 RS-FF 3 RS-FF 2 RS-FF 1 D-FF 2 D-FF 1 NOT 3 NOT 2 NOT 1 XOR 3 XOR 2 XOR 1 OR 3 OR 2 OR 1 AND 3 AND 2 AND 1
Example 1: Enabling the FFB: P2800 = 1 Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority: P2801[0] = 1 AND 1 P2801[1] = 2 AND 2 P2801[2] = 3 AND 3 P2802[12] = 2 CMP 1 P2802[13] = 3 CMP 2 The FFB are calculated in the following sequence: AND 3, CMP2, AND 2, CMP 1, AND 1
P2802 [13] P2802 [12] P2802 [11] P2802 [10] P2802 [9] P2802 [8] P2802 [7] P2802 [6] P2802 [5] P2802 [4] P2802 [3] P2802 [2] P2802 [1] P2802 [0] P2801 [16] P2801 [15] P2801 [14] P2801 [13] P2801 [12] P2801 [11] P2801 [10] P2801 [9] P2801 [8] P2801 [7] P2801 [6] P2801 [5] P2801 [4] P2801 [3] P2801 [2] P2801 [1] P2801 [0]
low
191
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Example 2: Enabling the FFB: P2800 = 1 Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority: P2801[3] = 2 OR 1 P2801[4] = 2 OR 2 P2802[3] = 3 Timer 4 P2801[0] = 1 AND 1 The FFB are calculated in the following sequence: Timer 4, OR 1, OR 2, AND 1 The function blocks are interconnected using BICO technology (refer to Section 3.1.2.3). In so doing, the function blocks can be connected with one another as well as to other signals and quantities as long as these signals / quantities have the appropriate attribute (BO, BI, CO and CI).
MICROMASTER 440
192
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.14
Motor holding brake (MHB)

Parameter range: P1215 P0346, P1216, P1217, P1080 r0052 bit 12 -
For drives which must be secured when powered-down to prevent them undesirably moving, the MICROMASTER brake sequence control (enabled via P1215) can be used to control the motor holding brake. Before opening the brake, the pulse inhibit must be removed and a current impressed which keeps the drive in that particular position. In this case, the impressed current is defined by the min. frequency P1080. A typical value in this case is the rated motor slip r0330. In order to protect the motor holding brake from continuous damage, the motor may only continue to move after the brake has been released (brake release times lie between 35 ms and 500 ms). This delay must be taken into account in parameter P1216 "Holding brake release delay" (refer to Fig. 3-68).
ON / OFF1/OFF3:
ON OFF1/OFF3 Motor excitation finished r0056 Bit04 f p0346 t t
fmin (p1080) p1216 r0052.C Bit 12 1 Brake Status 0 open closed Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time t t t p1217
Fig. 3-68
Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1
193
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
The motor holding brake is either closed using OFF1 / OFF3 or OFF2. For OFF1 / OFF3, when the minimum frequency P1080 is reached, the motor is operated at this frequency until the brake has been applied (closing times of brakes lie between 15 ms and 300 ms). The actual time is specified using parameter P1217 "Holding time after ramp down" (refer to Fig. 3-68). If, on the other hand, an OFF2 command has been output, then independent of the drive state, the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" is reset. This means that the brake immediately closes after OFF2 (refer to Fig. 3-69).
ON / OFF2:
Inactive OFF2 Active ON OFF1/OFF3 Motor excitation finished r0056 Bit04 f p0346 t
fmin (p1080) t p1216 r0052.C Bit 12 1 0 open closed Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time t
Brake Status
Fig. 3-69
Motor holding brake after OFF2
The mechanical brake is controlled using the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" of the brake control. This signal can be output as follows: Via digital outputs The status signal is output via the digital output. In this case, the internal MICROMASTER relay (if the specification is sufficient) or also an external contactor or relay can be used to control the brake. Via status signal using the serial interface (USS or PROFIBUS) The master must process the status signal. The signal must be connected to the digital output of the master to which the contactor / relay for the motor holding brake is connected.
MICROMASTER 440
194
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE Motors have optional holding brakes which are not designed to be used as brakes for normal operation. The holding brakes are only designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations / motor revolutions with the brake closed (refer to the Catalog data).
When commissioning a drive with integrated holding brake it is therefore absolutely imperative that it is ensured that the holding brake functions perfectly. A "clicking noise" in the motor indicates that the brake has been correctly released.
Parameter settings:
To open/close, the digital output controls the motor holding brake at point 1/2 (refer to Fig. 3-68). In this case the prerequisite is that the motor holding brake P1215 has been activated as well as the selection of the motor holding brake at the digital output. Brake opening time P1216 is greater than/equal to the time to open the holding brake. Brake delay time P1217 is greater than/equal to the time to close the holding brake. Select the min. frequency P1080 so that it acts just like a weight equalization function. A typical value for the min. frequency P1080 for the motor holding brake is the slip frequency of the motor r0330. The rated slip frequency can be calculated using the following formula:
fSlip[Hz] = r0330 nsy n nn P0310 = fn nsy n 100
The following control parameters should be noted in conjunction with the motor holding brake: for V/f control (open-loop) P1310, P1311, P1333, P1335 for closed-loop vector control (SLVC) P1610, P1611, P1750, P1755
195
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
WARNING It is not sufficient to select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" in P0731 P0733. In order to activate the motor holding brake, in addition, parameter P1215 must also be set to 1. If the frequency inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the load has been secured. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows before commissioning is started:
Lower the load to the floor During the commissioning phase or after the frequency inverter has been replaced, the frequency inverter must be inhibited from controlling the motor holding brake (it is not permissible that the frequency inverter controls the holding brake). Quick commissioning or a parameter download using STARTER etc. may only be carried-out after this has been absolutely ensured. The motor holding brake terminals can then be re-assigned (in this case, it is not permissible that digital output P0748 is inverted for the motor holding brake). In order to hold the motor against the mechanical brake at a specific frequency, it is important that the min. frequency P1080 approximately corresponds to the slip frequency. If the value is selected to be too high, then the current drawn can be too high so that the frequency inverter shutsdown (trips) due to an overcurrent. If the value selected is too low, then it is possible that not enough torque is produced to hold the load. It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The reason for this is that generally it is only dimensioned/designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations.
Motor with motor holding brake (example)

A motor with motor holding brake for a hanging (suspended) axis is connected to the frequency inverter. This holding brake is to be controlled using the 1st digital output.
Which settings have to be made?

Select the "motor holding brake active" function (52.12) at digital output P0731. Activate the brake sequence control in the frequency inverter (P1215 = 1). Set parameter P1216 to open the holding brake after an ON command. The brake opening time P1216 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than the time required to open the holding brake. The opening time of the brake (refer to the Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay opening time can be used as nominal value for P1216. Set parameter P1217 to close the holding brake after an OFF1/3 command. The brake delay time P1217 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than the time required to close the holding brake. The closing time of the brake (refer to Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay closing time can be used as nominal value for P1217. Set the load holding The opening / closing times of mechanical brakes are subject to certain fluctuations; this is the reason that a weight equalization function must be parameterized in the frequency inverter for the time P1216 and P1217. The following parameters must be defined so that the axis cannot sag (i.e. the axis cannot drop/fall).
MICROMASTER 440
196
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
In order that the motor can immediately establish a torque after an ON command, the magnetizing time P0346, determined with the quick commissioning, may not be reset. This is the reason that parameter P0346 should be checked for the weight equalization. Typical magnetizing times for 4-pole 1LA7 motors are: 0.12 kW 50 ms 7.50 kW 300 ms 1.50 kW 100 ms 55.0 kW 700 ms 5.50 kW 250 ms The min. frequency P1080 should approximately correspond to the rated motor slip (P1080 r0330[Hz]) In addition, the voltage boost should be adapted: V/f mode (P1300 = 0 ... 3)
constant voltage boost voltage boost when accelerating
P1310 90 % P1311 50 %
(empirical value) (empirical value) (empirical value) (empirical value)
SLVC mode (P1300 = 20)

-
constant torque boost torque boost when accelerating
P1610 90 %
P1611 50 % Connecting-up the motor holding brake control

Directly connected to the 1st relay output
COM 20 19 18 NO NC
=
Motor with M motor 3~ holding brake
COM 22 21 COM 25 24 23 NO NC NO
CPU
MICROMASTER 440
Fig. 3-70
Direct motor holding brake connection
197
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
If the frequency inverter directly controls the motor holding brake using the relay integrated in the frequency inverter, then the max. load capability of this relay should be carefully taken into consideration in conjunction with the voltage/current data of the holding brake. The following applies for the relay integrated in the frequency inverter: 30 V DC / 5 A 250 V AC / 2 A If this value is exceeded, an additional relay should, for example, be used.
Indirectly connecting 1st relay output via an additional relay
24 V 9 0V
Surge absorber diode Relay
28
Output +24 V, max. 100 mA (isolated) Output 0 V, max. 100 mA (isolated)
COM 20 19 18 COM 22 NO NC
=
Motor with M motor 3~ holding brake
NO
CPU
21 COM 25 24 23 NO NC
MICROMASTER 440
Caution The relay may not overload the internal 24 V power supply!
Fig. 3-71
Indirect motor holding brake connection
Hoisting gear applications

For high loads and low mechanical friction, especially when lowering a load, energy is regenerated that can cause the DC link voltage to increase. This increase can be prevented using dynamic braking (refer to Section 3.15.3; P1237). In order that there is no negative effect when using dynamic braking, the following functions should be disabled for hoisting gear applications:
Vdc_max controller P1240 Compound brake P1236
MICROMASTER 440
198
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.15
Electronic brakes
MICROMASTER 440 has 3 electronic brakes: DC braking (refer to Section 3.15.1) Compound braking (refer to Section 3.15.2) Dynamic braking (refer to Section 3.15.3) These brakes can actively brake the drive and avoid a possible DC link overvoltage condition. An inter-dependency as shown in Fig. 3-72 is present.
DC braking P1233 > 0 ? yes DC braking enabled
no
Compound braking P1236 > 0 ? yes Compound braking enabled
no
Dynamic braking P1237 > 0 ? yes Dynamic braking enabled
no
disabled
Fig. 3-72
Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes
3.15.1
DC braking
Parameter range: P1230, P1233 P1232, P1234 r0053 Bit00 -
The drive decelerates along a parameterized braking ramp if an OFF1 / OFF3 command is output. A "flat" ramp must be selected so that the drive inverter is not tripped (shutdown) due to the high regenerative energy which would cause a DC link overvoltage condition. The DC brake should be activated while the OFF1 / OFF3 command is present if the drive is to be braked faster. For DC braking, instead of continually reducing the output frequency / voltage during the OFF1 / OFF3 phase, from a selectable frequency, a DC voltage / current is input (refer to sequence a). The drive can be brought to a standstill in the shortest time using DC current braking (DC brake). DC braking is selected as follows: After OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233) Sequence Directly selected using BICO parameter P1230 Sequence For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a significant braking torque for an induction motor. The magnitude, duration and frequency at which braking starts can be set for the braking current and therefore braking torque by setting the appropriate parameters.
199
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
The DC brake can therefore support a braking operation from approx. < 10 Hz or prevents / minimizes the increase in the DC link voltage for regenerative braking. This is realized because energy is directly absorbed in the motor. The essential advantage and the main application of the DC brake is the fact that a holding torque can be generated at standstill (0 Hz). For instance, this is important for applications where after positioning, any motion in the mechanical system / product itself can result in waste. DC braking is especially used for: Centrifuges Saws Grinding machines Conveyor belts
Sequence
1. Enabled using P1233 2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (refer to Fig. 3-73) 3. The drive inverter frequency is ramped-down along the parameterized OFF1 / OFF3 ramp down to the frequency at which DC braking is to start - P1234. This means that the kinetic energy of the motor can be reduced without endangering the drive. However, if the ramp-down time is too short, there is a danger that a fault will be output as a result of an overvoltage condition in DC link - F0002. 4. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347. 5. The required braking current P1233 is then impressed for the selected braking time P1232. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00. The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.
ON OFF1/OFF3 P0347 OFF2 t ?f? t
P1234
OFF2 DC braking t
DC braking active r0053 1 Bit 00 0
P1233
Fig. 3-73
DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3
MICROMASTER 440
200
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Sequence
1. Enabled and selected using BICO parameter P1230 (refer to Fig. 3-74) 2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347. 3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed for the time selected and the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00. 4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the drive accelerates back to the setpoint frequency until the motor speed matches the drive inverter output frequency. If there is no match, then there is danger that a fault will be output as a result of overcurrent - F0001. This can be avoided by activating the flying restart function.
ON/OFF1
BI: Enable DC brk. 1 P1230.C (0:0)
f f* DC braking
t f_set
f_act t i P0347
t DC braking active r0053 1 Bit 00 0
Fig. 3-74
DC braking after external selection
NOTE 1. The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors ! 2. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads ! 3. For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in the motor. If braking lasts too long, then the drive can overheat ! 4. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the drive speed using an external control. When parameterizing and setting the drive system, then as far as possible, it should be tested using real loads !
201
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.15.2
Compound braking
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1236 -
For compound braking (this is enabled using P1236) DC braking is superimposed with regenerative braking (where the drive regenerates into the line supply as it brakes along a ramp). If the DC link voltage exceeds the compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp (refer to Fig. 3-75), then a DC current is impressed as a function of P1236. In this case, braking is possible with a controlled (closed-loop) motor frequency and minimum regenerative feedback. Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for OFF3) and using compound braking P1236. Compound braking is suitable for: Horizontal motion (e.g. traversing drives, conveyor belts) Vertical motion (e.g. hoisting gear)
P1236 = 0 Without Compound braking f f_set f_act f P1236 >0 With Compound braking f_set f_act
t i i
t u
DC-link
t u
DC-link
UDC-Comp t P1254 = 0 :
P1254 0 :
t UDC - Comp = 1.13 2 P0210

UDC - Comp = 0.98 r1242
Fig. 3-75
Compound braking
The compound braking switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is calculated as a function of parameter P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels) either directly using the line supply voltage P0210 or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242 (refer to the formula in Fig. 3-75).
MICROMASTER 440
202
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
WARNING For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and driven load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. If this power loss is too high or if the braking operation takes too long, then this can cause the drive to overheat !
When using compound braking it must be expected that there is a higher level of noise above the compound braking switch-in threshold.
NOTE Only active in conjunction with V/f control. Compound braking is de-activated, if - flying restart is active, - DC braking is active, and - Vector control (SLVC, VC) is selected. The compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is dependent on P1254 VDC-Comp(P1254 = 0) VDC-Comp(P1254 0) a) Auto-detect circuit enabled (P1254 = 1): - VDC-Comp (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter runs-up - i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected - Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation location. b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0):
UDC, Comp = 1.13 2 P0210
The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210 P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location
3.15.3
Dynamic braking
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1237 A0535 F0022 -
For several drive applications, in certain operating states, the motor can regenerate. Examples of these applications include: Cranes Traction drives Conveyor belts which transport loads downwards When the motor is in the regenerative mode, the energy from the motor is fed back into the DC link of the drive converter via the inverter. This means that the DC link voltage increases and when the maximum threshold is reached, the drive inverter is shutdown (tripped) with fault F0002. This shutdown (trip) can be avoided by using dynamic braking. Contrary to DC and compound braking, this technique requires that an external braking resistor is installed.
203
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
The advantages of dynamic resistor braking include: The regenerative energy is not converted into heat in the motor It is significantly more dynamic and can be used in all operating states (not only when an OFF command is output)
Chopper resistor MM4 B+ B-
= ~
Chopper control
= ~
Fig. 3-76
Connecting the chopper (braking) resistor
The braking energy in the DC link is converted into heat when dynamic braking is activated (enabled using P1237). The energy is converted into heat using the voltage-controlled chopper resistor (ballast resistor). Chopper resistors are used if regenerative energy is dissipated in the DC link for a short time, e.g. when a drive brakes and the drive should be prevented from being shutdown (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC link overvoltage"). In this case, when the DC link threshold VDC chopper is exceeded, then the chopper resistor is switched-in using an electronic switch (semiconductor switch). Switch-in threshold of the chopper resistor: If P1254 = 0 : Otherwise :
VDC, Chopper = 1.13 2 Vline sup ply = 1.13 2 P0210
VDC, Chopper = 0.98 r1242
The chopper switch-in threshold VDC chopper is calculated as a function of parameter P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels), either directly using the line supply voltage P0210 or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242.
VDC, act VDC, Chopper
1 0
100 % V V
0 1
tChopper, ON =
x t 100 Chopper
P1237 Duty cycle monitoring

1 0
Alarm A0535
Mains 200 - 240 V 380 - 480 V 17.0 V 500 - 600 V 21.3 V
9.8 V
Fig. 3-77
Mode of operation of the dynamic braking
MICROMASTER 440
204
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The regenerative (braking) energy is converted into thermal energy using the chopper resistor. A braking module (chopper control) is integrated in the DC link for this purpose. The chopper of the braking module switches the resistor with a markspace ratio corresponding to the regenerative power to be dissipated. The braking module is only active if, as a result of the regenerative operation, the DC link voltage lies above the chopper switch-in threshold VDC chopper. This means that the braking module is not active in normal operation when motoring. The chopper resistor is only designed for a specific power and a certain load duty cycle and can only absorb a limited amount of braking energy within a specific time period. The chopper resistors, specified in MICROMASTER Catalog DA51.2, have the following load duty cycle.
Power P100 1
PDB 0.05 12 240 PDB = continuous power P100 = 20 PDB = permissable power for 12 s every 240 s
t [s]
Fig. 3-78
Load duty cycle chopper resistors (MICROMASTER Catalog DA51.2)
This load duty cycle (P1237 = 1 5 %) is saved in MICROMASTER. If the values are exceeded due to the load required, then when the maximum acceptable braking energy is reached, the load duty cycle monitoring controls the chopper so that the value is reduced to the value entered in parameter P1237. This means that the energy to be dissipated in the chopper resistor is reduced which means that the DC link voltage quickly increases due to the regenerative energy available and the drive inverter is shutdown (tripped) due to a DC link overvoltage condition. If the continuous power or the load duty cycle for a resistor is too high, then the continuous rating can be quadrupled using 4 resistors in a bridge circuit configuration. In this case, in addition, the load duty cycle must be increased using parameter P1237 from P1237 = 1 ( 5 %) to P1237 = 3 ( 20 %). When using the bridge circuit, the overtemperature switch of the resistors should be connected in series and incorporated in the fault circuit. This guarantees, that when a resistor overheats, the complete system / drive inverter is shut down.
205
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
R R B+ Chopper control P1237 = 1 (5 %) BB+ Chopper control P1237 = 3 (20 %) R
R R B-
Fig. 3-79
Increasing the level of braking energy which can be absorbed
The continuous power and the load duty cycle are modified using parameter P1237 (setting values, refer to Fig. 3-80a). If the load duty cycle monitoring switches from the peak power (100%) to the continuous power, then this is dissipated for an unlimited length of time in the braking resistor (refer to Fig. 3-80b). Contrary to the braking resistor, as listed in Catalog DA51.2, the chopper control can be permanently operated with 100% power.
a P1237
5% 10 % PDB tON tOFF tcycle 20 % t 50 % 100 %
P100
tON
12.0 12.6 14.2 22.8 Infinite
tOFF
228.0 114.0 57.0 22.8 0
tcycle
240.0 126.6 71.2 45.6 Infinite
PDB
0.05 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00
P100
PDB t100 tP1237 tcycle tOFF t
Fig. 3-80
Chopper load duty cycle
For MICROMASTER 440, up to and including Size FS F, the braking module is integrated in the drive inverter and the braking resistor can be connected via external terminals B+, B-.
MICROMASTER 440
206
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
NOTE The switch-on threshold VDC chopper of the dynamic resistor braking is dependent on P1254 VDC chopper(P1254 = 0) VDC chopper(P1254 0). a) Auto-detect circuit enabled (P1254 = 1): - UDC-Chopper (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter runs-up - i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected. - Using the auto-detect function, the UDC-Chopper threshold automatically adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation location. b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0):
UDC, Chopper = 1.13 2 P0210
The UDC-Chopper threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210 - P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location External braking modules (chopper units) including braking resistor can be used with all of the sizes, FS FX and FS GX. When engineering the system, the particular braking module / resistor must be taken into consideration.
WARNING Braking resistors, which are to be mounted on MICROMASTER 440, must be designed so that they can tolerate the power dissipated. If an unsuitable braking resistor is used there is a danger of fire and that the associated drive inverter will be significantly damaged. The chopper control, integrated in the drive converter is designed for the braking resistor value assigned in Catalog DA51.2, e.g.: MICROMASTER 440 6SE6440-2UD23-0BA1 brake resistor 6SE6400-4BD12-0BA0 brake resistor value 160 A brake resistor with a lower resistance value will destroy the drive converter. In this case, an external braking unit must be used. When operational, the temperature of braking resistors increases do not touch ! Ensure that there is sufficient clearance around the unit and there is adequate ventilation. A temperature protection switch must be used to protect the units against overheating.
207
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.16
Automatic restart
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1210 P1211 A0571 F0035 -
After a power failure (F0003 "Undervoltage"), the "Automatic restart" function (enabled using P1210) automatically powers-up the drive inverter again. Any faults are automatically acknowledged by the drive inverter. When it comes to power failures (line supply failure), then a differentiation is made between the following conditions:
Line undervoltage (brownout)

"Line undervoltage" is a situation where the line supply is interrupted and returns before (if installed) the BOP display has gone dark (this is an extremely short line supply interruption where the DC link hasn't completely collapsed).
Line failure (blackout)

"Line failure" is a situation where the display has gone dark (this represents a longer line supply interruption where the DC link has completely collapsed) before the line supply returns. The automatic restart function P1210 is shown in the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-81) as a function of external states / events.
P1210 ON always active (permanent) Fault F0003 on Blackout Brownout 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart All other faults on Blackout Brownout Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart ON in no-voltage condition All faults on Blackout Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart Fault acknowl. + restart No faults on Blackout Restart
Restart Restart
Fig. 3-81
Automatic restarts
MICROMASTER 440
208
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The number of start attempts is specified using parameter P1211. The number is internally decremented after each unsuccessful attempt. After all attempts have been made (as specified in parameter P1211), automatic restart is cancelled with message F0035. After a successful start attempt, the counter is again reset to the initial value.
NOTE The "Flying restart" function (refer to Section 3.17) must be additionally activated if, for an automatic restart, the drive inverter is to be connected to a motor which may already be spinning. DANGER For longer line supply failures (blackouts)and when the automatic restart function is activated, over a longer period of time it may be assumed that MICROMASTER is powered-down. However, when the line supply returns, motors can automatically start to run again without any operator intervention. If the operating range of the motors is entered in this status, this can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
209
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.17
Flying restart
Parameter range: P1200 P1202, P1203 r1204, r1205 -
The "Flying restart" function (this is enabled using P1200, refer to Table 3-33) allows the drive inverter to be switched to a motor which is still spinning. If the drive inverter was to be powered-up without using the flying restart function, there would be a high possibility that a fault with overcurrent F0001 would occur. The reason for this is that the flux must first be established in the motor and the V/f control or closed-loop Vector control must be set corresponding to the actual motor speed. The drive inverter frequency is synchronized with the motor frequency using the flying restart function. When the drive inverter is normally powered-up it is assumed that the motor is stationary and the drive inverter accelerates the motor from standstill and the speed is ramped-up to the setpoint which has been entered. However, in many cases this condition is not fulfilled. A fan drive is a typical example. When the drive inverter is powered-down the air flowing through the fan can cause it to rotate in any direction.
Parameter P1200 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Disabled Always For line supply on and fault For fault and OFF2 Always For line supply on, fault and OFF2 For fault and OFF2 Flying restart active Search direction Start in the direction of the setpoint Start in the direction of the setpoint Start in the direction of the setpoint Only in the direction of the setpoint Only in the direction of the setpoint Only in the direction of the setpoint
Table 3-33
Settings for parameter P1200
Flying restart without speed encoder

a) Depending on parameter P1200, after the de-magnetizing time has expired P0347, flying restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max (refer to Fig. 3-82).
f
search, max
= f
max
+ 2f
slip, standard
= P1802 + 2
r0330 P0310 100
This is realized either after the line supply returns when the automatic restart function has been activated or after the last shutdown with the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit). V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20): The search frequency is reduced, as a function of the DC link current with the search rate which is calculated from parameter P1203. In so doing, the parameterizable search current P1202 is impressed. If the search frequency is close to the rotor frequency, the DC link current suddenly changes because the flux in the motor establishes itself. Once this state has been reached, the search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is changed to the voltage value of the V/f characteristic with the magnetizing time P0346 (refer to Fig. 3-82).
MICROMASTER 440
210
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Closed-loop Vector control without encoder (SLVC): Starting from the initial value, the search frequency approaches the motor frequency with the impressed current P1202. The motor frequency has been found if both frequencies coincide. The search frequency is then kept constant and the flux setpoint is changed to the rated flux with the magnetizing time constant (dependent on P0346). After the magnetizing time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the speed actual value and the motor is operated with the actual reference frequency.
f fsearch,max
Setpoint frequency
Demagnetizing Flying restart P1202 time P1203 P0347
Magnetizing time P0346
Ramp up
Fig. 3-82
Flying restart
Flying restart with speed encoder

Depending on parameter P1200, after the de-magnetizing time P0347 expires a) After the line supply returns with the automatic restart active, or b) After the last shutdown using the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit) flying restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max. V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20): For V/f control, the output voltage of the drive inverter is linearly increased from 0 to the V/f characteristic value within the magnetizing time P0347. Closed-loop Vector control with speed encoder (VC): For the closed-loop Vector control, the necessary magnetizing current is established within the magnetizing time P0347. After the magnetizing time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the speed actual value and the motor is operated at the actual setpoint frequency.
NOTE If a higher value is entered for the search velocity P1203 this results in a flatter search curve and therefore to an extended search time. A lower value has the opposite effect. For "Flying restart", a braking torque is generated which can cause drives, with low moments of inertia, to brake. For group drives, "Flying restart" should not be activated due to the different characteristics of the individual motors when coasting down. WARNING When "Flying restart" is activated (P1200 > 0), although the drive is at a standstill and the setpoint is 0, it is possible that the drive is accelerated as a result of the search current ! If the operating range of the motors is entered when the drive is in this state, this can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
211
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.18
Closed-loop Vdc control

In addition to DC, compound and dynamic braking, for MICROMASTER it is possible to prevent a DC link overvoltage condition using the closed-loop Vdc controller. With this technique, the output frequency is automatically modified during operation using the closed-loop Vdc controller so that the motor doesn't go too far into the regenerative mode.
DC link overvoltage
Cause: The drive regenerates and feeds too much energy back into the DC link. Remedy: The DC link voltage is further reduced using the Vdc_max controller (refer to Section 3.18.1) by reducing the regenerative torque down to zero. Using the Vdc controller, it is also possible to prevent the drive converter being shut down (tripped) during brief line supply dips which cause a DC link undervoltage condition. Also in this case, the output frequency is automatically modified by the Vdc controller during operation. Contrary to an overvoltage condition, in this case the motor is operated with increased regenerative operation in order to support and buffer the DC link voltage.
DC link undervoltage
Cause: Line supply voltage failure or dip (blackout or brownout) Remedy: A regenerative torque is entered for the operational drive which compensates the existing losses and therefore stabilizes the voltage in the DC link. This technique is carried-out using the Vdc_min controller (refer to Section ) and is known as kinetic buffering.
3.18.1
Vdc_max controller
Parameter range: P1240, r0056 bit 14 r1242, P1243 P1250 P1254 A0502, A0910 F0002 FP4600
A brief regenerative load can be handled using this function (enabled using P1240) without the drive inverter being shut down (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC link overvoltage"). In this case, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop) so that the motor doesn't go too far into regenerative operation. If the drive inverter regenerates too much when braking the machine due to a fast ramp-down time P1121, then the braking ramp / ramp time are automatically extended and the drive inverter is operated at the DC link voltage limit r1242 (refer to Fig. 3-83). If the DC link threshold r1242 is again fallen below, then the Vdc_max controller withdraws the extension of the braking ramp.
MICROMASTER 440
212
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
VDC r1242
VDC_max -controller active r0056 Bit 14 1 0
t A0911 t
f f act f set
Fig. 3-83
Vdc_max controller
On the other hand, if the Vdc_max controller increases the output frequency (e.g. for a steady-state regenerative load), then the Vdc_max controller is disabled by an internal drive inverter monitoring function and warning A0910 is output. If the regenerative load continues, the drive inverter is protected using fault F0002. In addition to controlling the DC link (closed-loop), the Vdc_max controller supports the stabilizing processes of the speed at the end of an acceleration phase. This is especially the case if there is an overshoot and the motor therefore briefly goes into regenerative operation (damping effect). The automatic increase of the braking ramp (refer to Fig. 3-83) can be contradictory to the objective of the application. This behavior is not required, especially for positioning drives and hoisting gear (e.g. cranes). A DC link overvoltage condition can still be avoided by disabling the Vdc-max controller (P1240 = 0) and by activating the following functions: Extending the braking ramp (P1121) Activating the compound brake (P1236) or dynamic brake (P1230)
213
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
NOTE If the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 (switch-on level of Vdc_max.) of the Vdc_max controller in the "Ready" state, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and warning A0910 is output. Cause: The line supply voltage does not match the application situation. Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254 and P0210.
If, in the "Run" state, the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 and if the Vdc_max controller output is limited by parameter P1253 for approx. 200 ms, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and warning A0910 and, where relevant, fault F0002 are output. Cause: Line supply voltage P0210 or ramp-down time P1121 too low The moment of inertia of the driven load is too high Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254, P0210, P1121 Use a braking resistor The Vdc_max switch-in threshold VDC_max depends on P1254 VDC_max(P1254 = 0) VDC_max(P1254 0) a) Auto-detect function enabled (P1254 = 1): - VDC_max (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter runs-up, i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected - Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation location. b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0): UDC _ max = 1.15 2 P0210
The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210 P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location.
MICROMASTER 440
214
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.18.2
Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)

Parameter range: P1240 r0056 bit 15 P1245, r1246, P1247 P1250 P1253 P1256, P1257 A0503 F0003 FP4600
Brief line supply failures can be buffered using the kinetic buffering function (enabled using P1240). Line supply failures are buffered using the kinetic energy (i.e. moments of inertia) of the driven load. In this case the prerequisite is that the driven load has a sufficiently high flywheel mass or is rotating at an appropriately high speed i.e. has adequate kinetic or rotating energy.
Kinetische Energie : Wkin = 1 mv 2 2 Rotationse nergie : Wrot = 1 2 J 2
Using this technique, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop), so that energy is fed to the drive inverter from the regenerating motor thus covering the system losses. The losses during the line supply failure still remain which means that the motor speed decreases. When using kinetic buffering it has to be taken into consideration that the motor speed reduces.
VDC 100 % 5% Power failure
2 P0210 P1245 2 P0210 100
P1245 Vdc_min
Power restoration
t KIB active r0056 Bit 15 1 0 t
IfI
f1 tb = f2 f1 - f 2 P1120 P1082
tb
Fig. 3-84
Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)
When the line supply returns, the energy feed is again from the line side and the output frequency of the drive inverter returns to the selected setpoint along the ramp defined by the ramp-function generator.
215
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
NOTE When the minimum DC link voltage VDC_min is fallen below, fault F0003 "Undervoltage" is output and the drive inverter is shut down. The shutdown threshold VDC_min depends on the drive inverter type / line supply voltage.
Table 3-34 DC link undervoltage shutdown threshold
Shutdown threshold VDC_min
215 V 215 V 430 V 530 V
Drive inverter type / line supply voltage

1-ph. 200 V 240 V AC 10 % 3-ph. 200 V 240 V AC 10 % 3-ph. 380 V 480 V AC 10 % 3-ph. 500 V 600 V AC 10 %
3.19
Positioning down ramp

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P0500 P2480 r2489 -
The positioning down ramp (enabled using P0500) can be used for applications where it is necessary that a residual distance is moved-through up to the stop dependent on an external event (e.g. BERO switch). In this case, MICROMASTER 440 generates a continuous braking ramp by selecting OFF1 depending on the actual load speed / velocity. The drive is then stopped/positioned along this braking ramp (refer to Fig. 3-85).
Motor
Gear
f fOFF1 OFF1
s = P2488 =
1 . .t f 2 OFF1 P2488
t tP2488
Fig. 3-85
Positioning down ramp
In this case, the remaining distance P2488 moved through must be entered, referred to the load. In order to carry-out the residual distance calculation on the load side, the mechanical arrangement of the axis (gearbox ratio, linear or rotary axis) must be appropriately parameterized (refer to Fig. 3-86).
MICROMASTER 440
216
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Fig. 3-86
Rotary or linear axis
Using this data, MICROMASTER 440 calculates the ratio between the distance and the motor revolutions and can therefore consider the movement on the load side. NOTE When the positioning down ramp is enabled using parameter P0500 = 3, then implicitly the control mode P1300 is reset as follows as a function of parameter P0205: a) P0205 = 0 P1300 = 0 b) P0205 = 1 P1300 = 2 This change can be undone again after the positioning down ramp has been enabled by modifying parameter P1300.
217
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.20
3.20.1
Monitoring functions / messages

General monitoring functions / messages
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P2150 P2180 r0052, r0053, r2197, r2198 FP4100, FP4110
MICROMASTER has an extensive range of monitoring functions / messages which can be used for open-loop process control. The control can either be implemented in the drive inverter or also using an external control (e.g. PLC). The interlocking functions in the drive inverter (refer to Section 3.1.2.3) as well as the output of signals (refer to Section 3.6.2 or 3.7) for external control are implemented using BICO technology. The status of the individual monitoring functions / messages are emulated in the following CO/BO parameters: r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word r0050 CO/BO: Active command data set r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1 r0053 CO/BO: Status word 2 r0054 CO/BO: Control word 1 r0055 CO/BO: Supplementary (additional) control word r0056 CO/BO: Status word closed-loop motor control r0403 CO/BO: Encoder status word r0722 CO/BO: Status, digital inputs r0747 CO/BO: Status, digital outputs r1407 CO/BO: Status 2 closed-loop motor control r2197 CO/BO: Messages 1 r2198 CO/BO: Messages 2 Frequently used monitoring functions / messages including parameter number and bit are shown in the following Table.
MICROMASTER 440
218
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Table 3-35
Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages

Parameter / bit number
52.0 52.1 52.2 52.3 52.4 52.5 52.6 52.7 52.8 52.9 52.A 52.B 52.C 52.D 52.E 52.F 53.0 53.9 53.A 53.B 53.E 53.F 53.2 2197.0 53.5 2197.1 53.4 2197.2 2197.3 53.6 2197.4 53.1 2197.5 2197.6 2197.7 53.3 2197.8 53.7 2197.9 53.8 2197.A 2197.B 2198.0 2198.1 2198.2 2198.3 2198.4 2198.5 2198.6 2198.7 2198.8 2198.9 2198.A 2198.B 2198.C
Functions / states
Drive ready Drive ready to run Drive running Drive fault active OFF2 active OFF3 active On inhibit active Drive warning active Deviation setpoint actual value PZD control Maximum frequency reached Warning: Motor current limit Motor holding brake active Motor overload Motor runs right Drive inverter overload DC brake active Ramping finished PID output R2294 == P2292 (PID_min) PID output R2294 == P2291 (PID_max) Download data set 0 from AOP Download data set 0 from AOP |f_act| > |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) P2155 (f_1) |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) f_act > zero f_act >= setpoint (f_set) |f_act| >= P2167 (f_off) |f_act| > P1082 (f_max) f_act == setpoint (f_set) i_act r0068 >= P2170 Approx. Vdc_act < P2172 Approx. Vdc_act > P2172 No-load operation |f_act| <= P2157 (f_2) |f_act| > P2157 (f_2) |f_act| <= P2159 (f_3) |f_act| > P2159 (f_3) |f_set| < P2161 (f_min_set) f_set > 0 Motor blocked Motor stalled |i_act r0068| < P2170 |m_act| > P2174 & setpoint reached |m_act| > P2174 Load torque monitoring: Warning Load torque monitoring: Fault
Function chart
FP5100 FP5100 FP4100 FP4110 FP4110 FP4110 FP4100 FP4110 FP4100 FP4110 FP4110 FP4100 -
219
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.20.2
Load torque monitoring

Parameter range: P2181 P2182 P2192 r2198 A0952 F0452 -
This function allows the mechanical force transmission between the motor and driven load to be monitored. Typical applications include, for Drive example, pulley belts, flat belts or shaft chains, or pulleys for toothed wheels Deflection of drive-in and drive-out shafts which roll then transmit circumferential velocities and circumferential forces (refer to Fig. 3-87 Shaft drive with flat belts Fig. 3-87). The load torque monitoring function can then detect whether the driven load is locked or the force transmission has been interrupted. For the load torque monitoring function, the actual frequency/torque characteristic is compared with the programmed frequency/torque characteristic (refer to P2182 P2190). If the actual value lies outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth, then, depending on parameter P2181, either warning A0952 or fault F0452 is generated. Parameter P2192 can be used to delay the output of the warning or fault message. This avoids erroneous alarms which could be caused by brief transient states (refer to Fig. 3-88).
Torque [Nm] P2189 P2190 P1082
P2187 P2188 P2185 P2186 Actual torque
P2182 r2198 1 Bit 11 0 P2192
P2183 A0952 P2192
Frequency P2184 [Hz]
Fig. 3-88
Load torque monitoring (P2181 = 1)
MICROMASTER 440
220
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The frequency/torque tolerance bandwidth is defined by the gray shaded area in Fig. 3-89. The bandwidth is determined by the frequency values P2182 P2184 and the torque limits P2186 P2189. When defining the tolerance bandwidth it should be ensured that a specific tolerance is taken into account in which the torque values are allows to vary corresponding to the application.
|Torque| [Nm] P1080 Min. frequency P2189 Upper torque threshold 3 P2190 Lower torque threshold 3 P1082 Max. frequency
P2187 Upper torque threshold 2 P2188 Lower torque threshold 2 P2185 Upper torque threshold 1 P2186 Lower torque threshold 1
|Frequency| [Hz] P2183 P2182 P2184 Threshold frequency 2 Threshold frequency 1 Threshold frequency 3 Boundary zones De-activated monitoring Envelope curve Active monitoring
Fig. 3-89
Frequency/torque tolerance bandwidth
Commissioning steps
1. In order to define the position of the tolerance bandwidth, different characteristics must be determined as a function of the required load torque monitoring (P2181). A differentiation can be made between the following cases: a) P181 = 1 / 4 Load torque monitoring to detect a broken belt, i.e. under fault conditions, the actual load torque is below the permissible tolerance bandwidth. In this case, the load torque characteristic with minimum permissible load should be determined.
221
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
|Torque| [Nm] Rated load characteristic
P2185+P2187+P2189 P2190
Permissible min. load characteristic
P2188 P2186 |Frequency| [Hz]
P2182 P2183 P2184
Fig. 3-90
Load torque characteristic with minimum permissible load
b) P2181 = 2 / 5 Load torque monitoring as anti-stall protection. This means that when a fault occurs, the actual load torque is above the permissible tolerance bandwidth. In this case, the load torque characteristic with maximum permissible load should be determined.
|Torque| [Nm] P2185 P2187 P2189 P2186+P2188+P2190 P2182 P2183 Permissible max. load characteristic Rated load characteristic |Frequency| [Hz] P2184
Fig. 3-91
Load torque characteristic with maximum permissible load
c) P2181 = 3 / 6 Load torque monitoring to detect whether the drive is blocked (stalled) or a transmission belt has broken. This means that when a fault occurs, the load torque is either above or below the permissible tolerance bandwidth. In this case, the load torque characteristic with the minimum and maximum permissible load should be determined.
MICROMASTER 440
222
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
|Torque| [Nm] P2185+P2187+P2189
Permissible max. load characteristic Rated load characteristic
P2186+P2188+P2190
Permissible min. load characteristic |Frequency| [Hz] P2184
P2182
P2183
Fig. 3-92
Load torque characteristic with minimum and maximum permissible load
2. The permissible load torque characteristic must be determined in the operating range of the plant or system. This characteristic can be determined as follows: a) Theoretical determination In this case, the prerequisite is that the load torque characteristic in the operating range must first be known. Frequently, this is not the case in practice. Especially changing mechanical effects involve investigations that require considerable time and costs if they are to be forecast in advance. b) Practical determination The load torque characteristic is directly determined at the plant/system using a "teach-in technique". In this case, the operating range is passedthrough step-by-step and the value pair comprising the actual output frequency r0021 and actual torque r0031 are read-out in the steady-state condition. If necessary, this should be carried-out for both directions of rotation. 3. The position of the tolerance bandwidth (P2182 - P2190) is determined by defining the 3 points along the characteristic. 4. In order to prevent the torque monitoring responding unnecessarily, dynamic states should be suppressed using delay time P2192. As a rule of thumb, P2192 should be > P1120. Note The load torque monitoring is active in all 4 quadrants If it is not possible to determine the min. or max. load torque characteristic at the drive in operation, then the load torque characteristic should be determined for operation at rated load. By taking into account the tolerances, the max. or min. permissible load characteristic can be calculated (e.g. the max. load characteristic is obtained from the 120% rated load characteristic). If only a specific frequency range is to be monitored, then it is sufficient to plot the load characteristic between the frequency thresholds of the envelope curve (P2182, P2184). If the drive is only permitted to have one direction of rotation, then the load characteristic should only be determined for the permissible direction of rotation. The load characteristic and/or envelope curve determined should be represented in a frequency-torque diagram, e.g. using Microsoft Excel.
223
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.21
Thermal motor protection and overload responses

Parameter range: P0601 P0640 P0344 P0350 P0360 r0035 A0511 F0011, F0015 -
MICROMASTER 440 has a completely new integrated concept for thermal motor protection. There are numerous possibilities of effectively protecting the motor but at the same time ensuring high motor utilization. The basic philosophy of this innovative concept is to detect critical thermal states, output warnings and initiate the appropriate responses. By responding to critical states it is possible to operate the drive at the thermal power limit and to avoid, under all circumstances, an immediate shutdown (where the drive inverter is tripped).
Features
The protective concept (refer to Fig. 3-93) distinguishes itself as a result of the following individual features: Protection is effective without using any temperature sensor (P0601 = 0). The temperatures of various locations in the motor are indirectly determined using a temperature model. It is possible to evaluate temperature sensors. This has the advantage that after a line supply failure, precise initial temperatures are immediately available. Both PTC sensors (P0601 = 1) as well as KTY84 sensors (P0601 = 2) can be connected and evaluated (refer to Section 3.21.2). When using a KTY84 sensor, the drive inverter can be parameterized so that a sensor wire breakage or short-circuit F0015 is detected and the system automatically changes-over to the temperature model. This means that the drive inverter is not shut down (tripped) and operation can continue. Selectable temperature warning thresholds P0604 (default: 130 C) for operation with the temperature model or KTY84 sensor. The drive inverter is shut down or the current reduced depending on P0610 for a value of P0604 +10%. Selectable responses P0610 which are to be initiated when the warning threshold is exceeded in order to prevent an overload condition. The motor protection has been designed to be completely independent of the drive inverter protection. Warning thresholds and responses for drive inverter protection must be separately parameterized. Various data sets are taken into account in the model. The model is separately calculated for each data set so that when changing-over between various motors the cooling of the presently non-active (fed) motors are taken into account.
MICROMASTER 440
224
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Fault F0015 5V T1 = 4 s ADC PTC KTY Signal loss detection

0 1 2
P0601 = 2
&
1 0
r0052 Bit13
No sensor PTC KTY

?
r0035
V 1 0
Motor i2t temp. reaction
P0601 P0610
Equivalent circuit data Power dissipation PV,mot
Thermal motor model
r0631 r0632 r0633
P0604
Fig. 3-93
Thermal motor protection
Temperature rise classes

In drive technology, temperature rise issues play a decisive role when dimensioning electrical machinery. Different temperature limits apply for the various materials used in electric motors. Depending on the insulating material being used, a differentiation is made according to thermal classes (refer to the motor rating plate) with defined limit temperatures. An excerpt from IEC85 is provided in Table 3-36.
Excerpt from IEC 85 Thermal Class Y A E B F H Max.perm.temperature 90 C 105 C 120 C 130 C 155 C 180 C
Table 3-36
Thermal classes
For the temperature model or the KTY84 sensor, the appropriate value warn must be calculated and entered into parameter P0604 (temperature warning threshold, default: 130C). The following applies:
P0604 = warn = trip 1 .1
225
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.21.1
Thermal motor model

The data, required for the thermal motor model, is estimated from the rating plate data entered during the quick commissioning (refer to Section 3.5.3). This data permits reliable, stable operation for standard Siemens motors. If required, parameter changes must be made for motors from third-party manufacturers. We always recommend that an automatic motor data identification run is made after quick commissioning so that the electrical equivalent circuit diagram data can be determined. This allows a more precise calculation of the losses which occur in the motor which has a positive impact on the accuracy of the thermal motor model. Example: A stator resistance, which is parameterized to be too high, would result, in the model, to higher losses than in a real motor and an excessively high calculated motor temperature would be displayed. If changes are required in order to optimize the thermal model, then as a first step, the motor weight (P0344) should be checked for plausibility. Generally, the motor weight is taken from the Catalog data of the motor manufacturer. The thermal model can be further optimized by adapting the standard overtemperatures for the stator iron P0626, the stator winding P0627 and the rotor P0628. The standard overtemperatures represent the steady-state temperatures to be expected in rated operation with respect to the environment and are used to estimate the thermal resistances. Generally, these overtemperatures are not listed in the Catalog. The ambient temperature P0625 is another important parameter which influences the precision of the thermal model. NOTE In addition to the thermal motor protection, the motor temperature is also included in the adaptation of the motor equivalent circuit diagram data. This adaptation has a significant influence on the degree of stability of the closedloop vector control especially for a high thermal motor load. When switching-in the line supply voltage (i.e. powering-up), depending on whether a KTY sensor is being used or not, the motor temperature model is either initialized with the ambient temperature P0625 saved in the frequency inverter or with the actual motor temperature. If the frequency inverter is continually supplied with an external 24 V voltage, then the motor temperature is tracked/corrected using the motor temperature time constant even when the line supply voltage is shutdown (powered-down). For closed-loop vector control, a high thermal motor load and if the line supply voltage is frequently switched-out/switched-in, then the following is required
a KTY84 sensor should be used, or an external 24 V power supply should be connected
MICROMASTER 440
226
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.21.2
Temperature sensor
When the motor is operated below the rated speed the cooling effect of the shaft-mounted fan is reduced. As a result, for most motors when continually operated at lower frequencies, the power has to be reduced. Under these PTC/ conditions, motor protection against KTY overheating can only be guaranteed if either a temperature sensor (PTC or KTY84 sensor) is integrated in the motor and is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of the MICROMASTER 440 (refer to Fig. 3-94) Fig. 3-94 or the motor temperature model was determined (refer to Section 3.21.1).
5V 574 Kl. 14 A D Kl. 15
Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER
NOTE In order to avoid EMC noise from being coupled-in to the drive converter electronics and the associated disturbances it is not permissible to use free conductors in the motor cable to connect the temperature sensor to the drive converter. The temperature sensor must be connected to the drive converter using a separate cable (if at all possible, this cable should be shielded).
227
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
With PTC temperature sensor (P0601 = 1)

The PTC is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of the MICROMASTER 440. PTC monitoring is activated with the parameter setting P0601 = 1. If the resistance value, connected at the terminals, is less than 1500 , then neither alarm nor fault is generated. If this value is exceeded, the drive inverter outputs alarm A0511 and fault F0011. The resistance value where the alarm and fault are output does not lie below 1000 and not above 2000 . Response thresholds: 4.0 V 0 1 3.8 V 1 0
Fig. 3-95
With KTY84 temperature sensor (P0601 = 2)

The KTY84 must be connected so that the diode is in the conductive direction. This means that the anode is connected to terminal 14 and the cathode to terminal 15. If the temperature monitoring function is activated with the setting P0601 = 2, the temperature of the sensor (i.e. of the motor windings) is written into parameter r0035 (refer toFig. 3-93). The threshold temperature trip (refer to Table 3-36) of the motor can now be set using the warning threshold, motor overtemperature warn (parameter P0604) (the factory setting is 130 C). The following applies:
P0604 = warn =
trip
PTC characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors
1. 1
Fig. 3-96
KTY84 characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors
Wire breakage or short-circuit

If the circuit between the drive inverter and PTC or KTY84 sensor is interrupted or there is a short-circuit, the drive inverter is shut down (tripped) and fault F0015 is displayed.
MICROMASTER 440
228
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.22
3.22.1
Power module protection

General overload monitoring
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P0640, r0067, r1242, P0210 A0501, A0502, A0503 F0001, F0002, F0003, F0020 -
Just the same as for motor protection, MICROMASTER provides extensive protection for the power components. This protection concept is also sub-divided into 2 levels: Warning and response Fault and shutdown Using this concept, a high utilization of the power module components can be achieved without the drive inverter being immediately shut down. The power module components are monitored as follows:
Table 3-37 General protection of the power components
Warning and response
Overcurrent / short circuit Imax controller for V/f A0501 r0056 bit 09 r0056 bit 13 (refer to Section 3.23.1.2) Current controller for SLVC / VC --r0056 bit 09 r1407 bit 08 r1407 bit 09 Vdc_max controller A0502 (refer to Section 3.18.1) DC link undervoltage Vdc_min controller A0503 (refer to Section ) --F0003
Fault and shutdown

F0001
DC link overvoltage
F0002
Line phase failure detection (refer to P0291)
F0020
The monitoring thresholds for the righthand column in the table above are permanently saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user. On the other hand, the threshold levels for the "Warning and response" column can be modified by the user to optimize the system. These values have default settings so that the "Fault and shutdown" thresholds do not respond.
229
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.22.2
Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P0290 P0294 r0036 r0037 A0504, A0505 F0004, F0005, F0012, F0020, F0022 -
Similar to motor protection, the main function of the thermal power module monitoring is to detect critical states. Parameterizable responses are provided to the user which allows the drive system to be still operated at the power limit thus avoiding immediate shutdown. However, the possibilities of assigning parameters only involves interventions below the shutdown threshold which cannot be changed by users. MICROMASTER 440 has the following thermal monitoring functions: i2t monitoring The i2t monitoring is used to protect components which have a long thermal time constant in comparison to the semiconductors. An overload with reference to i2t is present if the drive inverter utilization r0036 indicates a value greater than 100 % (utilization as a % referred to rated operation). Heatsink temperature The monitoring of the heatsink temperature r0037[0] of the power semiconductor (IGBT). Chip temperature Significant temperature differences can occur between the barrier junction of the IGBT and the heatsink. These differences are taken into account by the chip temperature r0037[1] and monitored. When an overload occurs regarding one of these three monitoring functions, initially, a warning is output. The warning threshold P0294 (i2t monitoring) and P0292 (heatsink temperature and chip temperature monitoring) can be parameterized relative to the shutdown values. Example The warning threshold P0292 for the temperature monitoring (chip / heatsink temperature) is set to 15 C in the factory. This means that warning A0504 is output 15 C below the shutdown threshold. At the same time that the warning is output, the parameterized responses are initiated via P0290. Possible responses include: Reducing the pulse frequency (P0290 = 2, 3) This is an extremely effective method to reduce losses in the power module, as the switching losses represent a very high proportion of the overall losses. In many applications, a temporary reduction of the pulse frequency can be tolerated in favor of maintaining the process.
MICROMASTER 440
230
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Disadvantage The current ripple is increased when the pulse frequency is reduced. This can result in an increase of the torque ripple at the motor shaft (for low moments of inertia) and an increase in the noise level. When the pulse frequency is reduced this has no influence on the dynamic response of the current control loop as the current control sampling time remains constant ! Reducing the output frequency (P0290 = 0,2) This is advantageous if it is not desirable to reduce the pulse frequency or if the pulse frequency is already set to the lowest level. Further, the load should have a characteristic similar to that of a fan, i.e. a square-law torque characteristic for decreasing speed. When the output frequency is reduced, this significantly reduces the drive inverter output current and in turn reduces the losses in the power module. No reduction (P0290 = 1) This option should be selected if neither a reduction in the pulse frequency nor a reduction in the output current is being considered. In this case, the drive inverter does not change its operating point after the warning threshold has been exceeded so that the drive can be further operated until the shutdown values are reached. After the shutdown threshold has been reached, the drive inverter shuts down (trips) with fault F0004. The time which expires up to shutdown is however not defined and depends on the magnitude of the overload. Only the warning threshold can be changed in order to obtain an earlier warning and, if required, externally intervene in the drive process (e.g. by reducing the load, lowering the ambient temperature). NOTE If the drive inverter fan fails, this would be indirectly detected by the measurement of the heatsink temperature. A wire breakage or short circuit of the temperature sensor(s) is also monitored.
231
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23
Open-loop/closed-loop control technique

There are several open-loop/closed-loop techniques for closed-loop speed and torque control for drive inverters with induction and synchronous motors. These techniques can be roughly classified as follows: V/f characteristic control (briefly: V/f control) Field-orientated closed-loop control technique (briefly: Vector control) The field-orientated control technique also known as Vector control can be further sub-divided into two groups: Vector control without speed feedback (sensorless Vector control (SLVC)) Vector control with speed feedback (Vector control (VC)) These techniques differ from one another both regarding the control quantity as also in the complexity of the technique, which in turn are obtained as a result of the requirements associated with the particular application. For basic applications (e.g. pumps and fans), to a large extent, V/f control is used. Vector control is mainly used for sophisticated applications (e.g. winders), where a good control and behavior in noisy conditions are required regarding the speed and torque. If these requirements are also present in the range from 0 to approx. 1 Hz, then the speed/torque accuracy without encoder is not sufficient. In this case, Vector control with speed feedback must be used.
3.23.1
V/f control
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1300 P1310 P1350 FP6100
The V/f characteristic represents the simplest control technique. In this case the stator voltage of the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled proportionally to the stator frequency. This technique has proven itself for a wide range of "basic" applications, such as Pumps, fans Belt drives and similar processes. The goal of V/f control is to keep the flux constant in the motor. In this case, this is proportional to the magnetizing current I and the ratio between voltage V and frequency f.
~ I ~ V/f The torque M, developed by induction motors, is proportional to the product (precisely the Vectorial product x I) of flux and current. M~ I In order to generate the highest possible torque from a given current, the motor must operate with a constant flux which is as high as possible. In order to keep the flux constant, when frequency f changes, the voltage V must be changed in proportion so that a constant magnetizing current I flows. The V/f characteristic control is derived from these basic principles.
MICROMASTER 440
232
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
U, M, P, U, P Mn, n U, P Rated motor operating point
M,
Voltage control range fn
Field control range fmax
Fig. 3-97
Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from a drive inverter
There are several versions of the V/f characteristic as shown in Table 3-38.
Table 3-38 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300)
Parameter Significance Use / property value

0 Linear characteristic Standard case
V Vn
P1300 = 0
fn
FCC
Characteristic which compensates the voltage losses of the stator resistance for static (steady-state) or dynamic loads (flux current control FCC). This is especially used for small motors which have a relatively high stator resistance.
V Vn
Square-law This is a characteristic which character- takes into consideration the istic torque characteristic of the driven load (e.g. fan / pump) a) Square-law characteristic 2 (f characteristic) b) Energy saving as the lower voltage also results in lower currents and losses.
P1300 = 2 0 fn
V Vmax r0071 Vn P0304 P1325 P1323 P1321 P1310 f
Programmable characteristic
Characteristic which takes into consideration the torque characteristic of the motor / driven load (e.g. synchronous motor).
P1300 = 3
f0 0 Hz
f2 f1 P1320 P1322
f3 fn P1324 P0310
fmax P1082
233
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Application adaptation
This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications), a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the output voltage and not the output frequency, and b) By inhibiting the slip compensation This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications), a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the output voltage and not the output frequency, and b) By inhibiting the slip compensation
Application adaptation with FCC
19
Independent The user can enter the output voltage of the drive inverter, independently of voltage the frequency, using a BICO parameter P1330 via the interfaces (e.g. input analog input P1330 = 755).
3.23.1.1
Voltage boost
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1310, P1311, P1312 r0056 bit 05 FP6100
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only output a low output voltage. Even at low frequencies, the ohmic resistances of the stator winding play a role, which are neglected when determining the motor flux in Section 3.23.1. This means that the output voltage can be too low in order to implement the magnetization of an induction motor, to hold the load to compensate voltage drops (ohmic losses in the winding resistances) in the system or to provide a breakaway / accelerating / braking torque. The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in MICROMASTER using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-39):
MICROMASTER 440
234
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Table 3-39
Parameter
P1310
Voltage boost
Voltage boost
Constant voltage boost
Explanation
The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency range whereby the value continually decreases at high frequencies.
V
Linear V/f
Vmax
Vn (P0304)
tpu Ou
olt tv
e ag
actual VBoost
VContBoost,100
f V/ ) al 0 m = or 0 N 130 (P
VContBoost,50
fBoost,end (P1316)
fn (P0310)
f max (P1082)
P1311
Voltage boost when accelerating- / braking
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.

V
Linear V/f
Vmax
Vn (P0304)
VAccBoost,100
actual VBoost
ut tp Ou
lt vo
e ag
f V/ al 0) rm 0 = No 130 (P
VAccBoost,50
fBoost,end (P1316)
fn (P0310)
fmax (P1082)
P1312
Voltage boost when starting
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill)
V
Linear V/f
Vmax
Vn (P0304)
VStartBoost,10
0
actual V
Boost
u tp Ou
tv
o lt
ag
f V/ a l 0) rm 0 = N o 13 0 (P
VStartBoost,50
fBoost,end (P1316)
fn (P0310)
fmax (P1082)
NOTE Especially at low frequencies, the motor temperature is additionally increased as a result of the voltage boost (the motor overheats) ! The voltage value at 0 Hz is determined from the product of rated motor current P0305, stator resistance P0350 and the appropriate parameters P1310 P 1312.
235
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.1.2
Slip compensation
Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1335 FP6100
In the V/f characteristic operating mode the motor frequency is always lower than the drive inverter output frequency by the slip frequency fs. If the load (the load is increased from M1 to M2) is increased with a constant output frequency, then the slip s when motoring increases and the motor frequency decreases (from f1 to f2). This behavior, typical for an induction motor, can be compensated using slip compensation P1335. This therefore eliminates the speed reduction, caused by the load, by boosting (increasing) the drive inverter output frequency (refer to Fig. 3-98).
Without Slip compensation With Slip compensation
M2
M2
M1 f f2 f1 f
M1 f f2 f1 f fout M1 fout M2
Fig. 3-98
Slip compensation
MICROMASTER 440
236
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.23.1.3
V/f resonance damping

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1338 -
For variable-speed drives, resonance effects can occur in the upper frequency range (> 20 Hz). These resonance effects result in an increased noise level and also can damage / destroy the mechanical system. These resonance effects can occur for: Geared motors Reluctance motors Large motors (low stator resistance poor electrical damping) Contrary to the "skip frequency" function (refer to Section 3.12.1 and parameters P1091 to P1094), where the resonance frequency is passed through as quickly as possible, for the V/f resonance damping (parameter P1338), the resonance effects are dampened from a control-related perspective. The advantage of this function is that by using this active damping, operation is possible in the resonance range. The V/f resonance damping is activated and adjusted using parameter P1338. This parameter represents a gain factor that is a measure for the damping of the resonance frequency. The following oscillogram indicates the effect of the resonance damping function using as an example a reluctance motor with gearbox. The phase output currents are displayed for an output frequency of 45 Hz.
Without V/f resonance damping (P1338 = 0) Fig. 3-99 Effect of V/f resonance damping
V/f resonance damping active (P1338 = 1)
237
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.1.4
V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1300, P1333 -
An improved current measurement function has been i load i total developed for our MICROMASTER drive inverters. This permits the output current to be precisely determined referred to the motor voltage. This measurement guarantees that the output current is sub-divided into a load component and a flux component. Using this sub-division, the motor flux can be controlled and can be appropriately adapted and optimized ini flux line with the prevailing conditions. FCC operation is only activated after the FCC starting frequency P1333 has been exceeded. The FCC starting frequency P1333 is entered as a percentage to the rated motor frequency P0310. For a rated motor frequency of 50 Hz and a factory setting of P1333 = 10 %, this results in an FCC starting frequency of 5 Hz. The FCC starting frequency may not be selected too low as this has a negative impact on the control characteristics and can result in oscillation and system instability. The "V/f with FCC" control type (P1300 = 1) has proven itself in many applications. It has the following advantages with respect to the standard V/f control: Higher motor efficiency Improved stabilizing characteristics
higher dynamic response improved behavior to disturbances / control
NOTE Contrary to closed-loop vector control with / without speed encoder (VC / SLVC), for the V/f open-loop control mode with FCC, it is not possible to specifically influence the motor torque. This is the reason that it isnt always possible to avoid the motor stalling even when using "V/f with FCC". An improvement in the stabilizing behavior and in the motor efficiency can be expected when using the closed-loop vector control with / without speed encoder when compared to V/f control with FCC.
MICROMASTER 440
238
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.23.1.5
Current limiting (Imax controller)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1340 P1346 r0056 bit 13 A0501 F0001 FP6100
In the V/f characteristic mode, the drive inverter has a current limiting controller in order to avoid overload conditions (Imax controller, refer to Fig. 3-100). This controller protects the drive inverter and the motor against continuous overload by automatically reducing the drive inverter output frequency by fImax (r1343) or the drive converter output voltage by VImax (r1344). By either reducing the frequency or voltage, the stressing on the drive inverter is reduced and it is protected against continuous overload and damage.
Imax ctrl prp gain Imax ctrl int time 0.000 ... 0.499 0.000 ... 50.000 [s] P1340.D (0.000) P1346.D (0.300)
Kp
Tn
Motor temperatur Inverter temperatur i2t inverter

Motor ovl fact [%] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] P0640.D (150.0) Motor ovl fact [%] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] P0640.D (150.0)
fI_max CO:Imax ctrl Foutp

r1343
Imax controller setpoint
? +
r0067 CO: Outp cur limit [A]
Kp
Tn
UI_max CO:Imax ctrl Voutp

r1344
Current feedback
r0068 CO: Output current [A] Imax ctrl prp gain Imax ctrl int time 0.000 ... 5.499 0.000 ... 50.000 [s] P1345.D (0.250) P1346.D (0.300)
Fig. 3-100
Imax controller
NOTE The drive inverter load is only reduced when the frequency is reduced if the load decreases at lower speeds (e.g. square-law torque speed characteristic of the driven load).
239
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.2
Vector control
Field-orientated Vector control (briefly: Vector control) significantly improves torque control when compared to V/f control. The Vector control principle is based on the fact that for a specific load situation or required torque, the required motor current is impressed with respect to the motor flux so that the appropriate torque is obtained. If the stator current is emulated in a circulating coordinate system, linked with the rotor flux , then it can be broken-down into flux-generating current component id in-line with the rotor flux and in a torque-generating current component iq, vertical to the rotor flux. These components are corrected to track their setpoints in the current controller using their own dedicated PI controllers and are equal quantities in steady-state operation.
Measured steady state trajectories iS(t) Rotor axis
iq
ib
Flux axis
id
imR
mR
Stator axis
ia
Fig. 3-101
Current Vector diagram in a steady-state condition
In the steady-state condition, the field-generating current component id is proportional to the flux and the torque is proportional to the product of id and iq. M ~ iq
~ id,stat
M ~ id iq When compared to V/f control, Vector control has the following advantages: Stable during load and setpoint changes Short rise times for setpoint changes ( better control performance) Short rise times for load changes ( better noise/disturbance characteristics) Accelerating and braking are possible with a max. adjustable torque The motor and driven machine are protected using the adjustable torque limit, both when motoring and regenerating (refer to Section 3.23.2.4) The drive and braking torque are controlled independently of the speed Full holding torque is possible at 0 speed These advantages are, under certain circumstances, already achieved without using speed feedback. The Vector control can be used both with and without speed encoder.
MICROMASTER 440
240
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The following criteria provide a basis as to when a speed actual value encoder is required: High speed accuracy is required High requirements are placed on the dynamic response Improved control performance Improved immunity to disturbances The torque is to be controlled over a control range greater than 1:10 A defined and/or a changing torque has to be maintained for speeds below approx. 10 % of the rated motor frequency P0310 When it comes to entering a setpoint, the Vector control (refer to Table 3-40) is sub-divided into Closed-loop speed control, and Closed-loop torque/current control (briefly: Closed-loop torque control).
Table 3-40 Vector control versions
Without encoder
P1300 = 20, P1501 = 0 P1300 = 20, P1501 = 1 P1300 = 22
Vector control (closed-loop)

Closed-loop speed control Closed-loop torque control
With encoder
P1300 = 21, P1501 = 0 P1300 = 21, P1501 = 1 P1300 = 23
When closed-loop speed control is used, the closed-loop torque control is secondary. This type of cascaded closed-loop control has proven itself in practice regarding commissioning and increased transparency.
241
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.2.1
Vector control without speed encoder (SLVC)

Parameter range: P1400 P1780 P1610, P1611 P1755, P1756, P1758 P1750 FP7000
When Vector control is used without speed encoder (refer to Table 3-40) then the position of the flux and the actual speed must be determined using the motor model. In this case, the model is supported by the accessible currents and voltages. At low frequencies ( 0 Hz), the model is not able to determine the speed. This is the reason and also due to uncertainty in the model parameters and measuring inaccuracy, that a changeover is made from closed-loop to open-loop controlled operation in this range. The changeover between closed-loop controlled / open-loop controlled operation is controlled using the time and frequency conditions (P1755, P1756, P1758) (refer to Fig. 3-102). The system does not wait for the time condition if the setpoint frequency at the ramp-function generator input and the actual frequency simultaneously lie below P1756.
f_act
P1755 P1756 [Hz] t
SLVC open loop SLVC closed loop P1758 P1756 [%] 100 [%] t
P1756 [Hz] = P1755 [Hz]
Fig. 3-102
Changeover condition for SLVC
In the open-loop controlled mode, the speed actual value is the same as the setpoint. For suspended loads or when accelerating, parameter P1610 (constant torque boost) and P1611 (torque boost when accelerating) must be modified in order to allow the drive to provide the steady-state and/or dynamic load torque. If P1610 is set to 0 %, then only the magnetizing current r0331 is impressed for a value of 100 % of the rated motor current P0305. In order that the drive does not stall when accelerating, P1611 can be increased or the acceleration pre-control can be used for the speed controller (refer to Section 3.23.2.3). This is also practical in order that the motor is not thermally overloaded at low speeds. For Vector control without speed actual value encoder MICROMASTER 440 has, in the low frequency range, the following outstanding features with respect to other AC drive inverters:
MICROMASTER 440
242
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Closed-loop controlled operation down to 1 Hz Can start in the closed-loop controlled mode (immediately after the drive has been energized) The low frequency range (0 Hz) is passed-through in closed-loop controlled operation
f Start f Zero crossing
Closed loop P1755 Open loop P1755
Closed loop
Open loop t t
P1755
Fig. 3-103
Starting and passing-through 0 Hz in closed-loop controlled operation
The following advantages are obtained as a result of closed-loop controlled operation down to approx. 1 Hz (this can be selected using parameter P1755) as well as also the possibility to immediately start closed-loop controlled at 0 Hz or to reverse closed-loop controlled (this can be set using parameter P1750): No changeover operation is required within the closed-loop control (smooth behavior no frequency dips) Continuous closed-loop speed-torque control is possible down to approx. 1 Hz. NOTE For closed-loop controlled reversing or closed-loop controlled starting from 0 Hz it must be taken into account that when staying too long (> 2 s or > P1758) in the range around 0 Hz, that the closed-loop control automatically changes-over from closed-loop into the open-loop controlled mode.
243
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.2.2
Vector control with speed encoder (VC)

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1400 P1740 P0400 P0494 FP7000
For Vector control with speed encoder (refer to Table 3-40), a pulse encoder evaluation (option module) as well as a pulse encoder, e.g. encoder with 1024 pulses/revolution are required. In addition to the correct wiring, the pulse encoder module must be activated, corresponding to the encoder type, using the parameter range P0400 P0494 or using the DIP switch on the module (refer to Fig. 3-104).
Parameter P0400 = 1 Terminal A A AN P0400 = 2 A B A AN B BN differential single ended Track Encoder output single ended differential
Type TTL (e.g. 1XP8001-2) HTL (e.g. 1XP8001-1)
Output single ended 111111 101010 differential 010101 000000
Fig. 3-104
P0400 and DIP switch on the pulse encoder module
Advantages of Vector control with encoder: The speed can be closed-loop controlled down to 0 Hz (i.e. at standstill) Stable control behavior over the complete speed range Constant torque in the rated speed range When compared to closed-loop speed control without encoder, the dynamic response for drives with encoder is significantly higher as the speed is directly measured and is incorporated in generating the model of current components id, iq.
MICROMASTER 440
244
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
3.23.2.3
Speed controller
Parameter range: SLVC: VC: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1300, P1400 P1780 P1470, P1472, P1452 P1460, P1462, P1442 FP7500, FP7510
Both of the control techniques (SLVC, VC) have the same speed controller structure which includes the following components as kernel: PI controller Speed controller pre-control Droop The sum of the output quantities forms the speed setpoint, which is reduced to the permissible level using the torque setpoint limiting function (refer to Section 3.23.2.4).
Speed controller (SLVC: P1470, P1472, P1452
VC: P1460, P1462, P1442)
The speed controller (refer to Fig. 3-105) receives its setpoint r0062 from the setpoint channel (refer to Section 3.12), the actual value r0063 either directly from the speed actual value encoder or, for VC, also directly through the motor model for SLVC. The system error is amplified by the PI controller and, together with the pre-control, forms the torque setpoint. For increasing load torques, when the droop function is active, the speed setpoint is proportionally reduced so that the load on an individual drive within a group (where two or several motors are mechanically coupled) is reduced when excessively high torques occur.
Droop Precontrol Speed control
r0062
Kp r1084 *)
r0063
Tn
Freq. setpoint
Ti
PI Speed controller
r1538
r1538
r1539 Act. frequency Ti *) only active if pre-control is activated (P1496 > 0) SLVC: VC: P1452 P1442
r1539
Torque setpoint
Kp P1470 P1460
Tn
P1472 P1462
Fig. 3-105
Speed controller
245
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
If the moment of inertia was entered, the speed controller (Kp,Tn) can be calculated using the automatic parameterization (P0340 = 4) (refer to Section 3.5.4). The controller parameters are defined according to the symmetrical optimum as follows: Tn = 4 * T Kp = * r0345 / T = 2 * r0345 / Tn T = sum of the low delay times If oscillations occur with these particular settings, then the speed controller gain Kp should be manually reduced. It is also possible to increase the speed actual value smoothing (this is the usual procedure for gearbox play or high-frequency torsional oscillations) and then re-call the controller calculation as the value is incorporated in the computation of Kp and Tn. The following interrelationships apply for the optimization routine: If Kp is increased then the controller becomes faster and the overshoot is reduced. However, the signal ripple and oscillations in the speed controller loop are increased. If Tn is reduced, then the controller also becomes faster. However, the overshoot increases. When manually adjusting the speed control, the simplest procedure is to initially define the possible dynamic response using Kp (and the speed actual value smoothing) in order to then reduce the integral action time as far as possible. In this case it is important to ensure that the closed-loop control must also remain stable in the field-weakening range. When oscillations occur in the closed-loop speed control, it is generally sufficient to increase the smoothing time in P1452 for SLVC or P1442 for VC (or to reduce the controller gain) in order to dampen oscillations. The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored using r1482 and the unlimited controller output can be monitored using r1508 (torque setpoint). NOTE When compared to closed-loop control with encoder (refer to Section 3.23.2.2), the dynamic response for sensorless drives is significantly reduced. This is because the speed can only be derived from the drive inverter output quantities for current and voltage which have the appropriate noise level.
MICROMASTER 440
246
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Speed controller pre-control (P1496, P0341, P0342)

The control behavior of the speed control loop can be improved if the speed controller of the drive inverter also generates values for the current setpoints (corresponds to the torque setpoint) from the speed setpoint. This torque setpoint dn dn mv, which is calculated as follows mv = P1496 = P1496 P0341 P0342
dt dt
is entered into the current controller through an adaptation element directly as additive control quantity (this is enabled using P1496). The motor moment of inertia P0341 is directly calculated during the quick commissioning (refer to Section 3.5.8) or the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1, refer to Section 3.5.4). The factor P0342 between the total moment of inertia and motor moment of inertia must be manually determined.
Droop Pre-control P0341 P0342
r1518
P1496 r1084 Freq. setpoint Ti Act. frequency

>0 =0
Kp
Tn r1538 r1538
PI Speed controller
r1539
Ti Kp
r1539
Torque setpoint
Tn
SLVC: VC:
P1452 P1442
P1470 P1460
P1472 P1462
Fig. 3-106
Speed controller with pre-control
When correctly adapted, then the speed controller only has to correct noise quantities/disturbances in its control loop and this is achieved with a relatively low manipulated quantity change. On the other hand, speed setpoint changes bypass the speed controller and are therefore executed faster. The effect of the pre-control quantity can be adapted, depending on the particular application, using the pre-control factor P1496. Using P1496 = 100 %, the precontrol is calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia (P0341, P0342). In order that the speed controller does not work against the torque setpoint which is entered, a balancing filter is automatically used. The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control loop. The speed controller pre-control is correctly set (P1496 = 100 %, calibration via P0342), if the I component of the speed controller (r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or ramp-down in the range n > 20% * P0310. This means, using the precontrol, it is possible to approach a new speed setpoint without overshoot (prerequisite: The torque limiting does not intervene and the moment of inertia remains constant).
247
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
If the speed controller is pre-controlled, then the speed setpoint (r0062) is delayed with the same smoothing (P1442 or P1452) as the actual value (r1445). This ensures that when accelerating, there is no setpoint actual value difference (r0064) at the controller input which would have been exclusively caused by the signal propagation time. When the speed pre-control is activated, it must be ensured that the speed setpoint is continuously entered and without any significant noise level (avoid torque surges). An appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the analog signal P0753 (refer to Section 3.6.3) or by activating the rounding-off function of the rampfunction generator P1130 P1133 (refer to Section 3.12.2). NOTE The ramp-up and ramp-down times (P1120; P1121) of the ramp-function generator (refer to Section 3.12.2) in the setpoint channel should only be set so fast that when accelerating and braking, the motor speed can follow the setpoint. This then guarantees the optimum functioning of the speed controller pre-control. The starting time r0345 is a measure for the overall moment of inertia of the machine and describes that time in which the unloaded drive can accelerate from standstill to the rated motor speed P0311 with the rated motor torque r0333.
r0345 = Tstarting = 2 n 60 M
Mot, rated
= P0341 P0342
Mot, rated
2 P0311 60 r0333
If these secondary conditions match the particular application, then the starting time can be used as the shortest value for the ramp-up and ramp-down times.
MICROMASTER 440
248
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Droop (P1488 P1492)

The droop (enabled using P1488) means that with increasing load torque, the speed setpoint is proportionally reduced.
Droop
P1489
0
0
1
P1488
0
0 1 2
r1490
150 ms
P1492 Precontrol
r1482
Kp
Tn
r1538 Freq. setpoint

Ti
*)
PI Speed controller
r1538 r1539 r1539
r1538 Torque setpoint

Tn
r1539
Act. frequency *) only active if the pre-control is activated (P1496 > 0) SLVC: VC:
Ti P1452 P1442
Kp P1470 P1460
P1472 P1462
Fig. 3-107
Speed controller with droop
Droop is the simplest method to implement load sharing control. However, this load sharing control can only be used if the drives only motor and are operated more or less under steady-state conditions (i.e. at constant speed). For drives, which are frequently accelerated and braked with high speed changes, this technique is only conditionally suitable. The most simple load sharing control is, e.g., used for applications where two or several motors are mechanically coupled or operate on a common shaft and which have to fulfill the requirements above. In this case, the droop controls torsional stressing associated with the mechanical coupling by changing the speeds of the individual motors (excessive torques are reduced for an individual drive). Prerequisite All of the drives must be operated with closed-loop Vector speed control (with or without speed actual value encoder) The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator must be identical for all of the drives.
249
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
3.23.2.4
Closed-loop torque control

Parameter range: Warnings Faults Function chart number: P1300, P1500 P1511 P1400 P1780 FP7200, FP7210, FP7700, FP7710
For sensorless closed-loop speed control SLVC (P1300 = 20) or for closed-loop speed control with sensor VC (P1300 = 21), it is possible to changeover to closedloop torque control (slave drive) using BICO parameter P1501. It is not possible to changeover between closed-loop speed and torque control if the closed-loop torque control is directly selected using P1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and supplementary torque setpoint can be selected using parameter P1500 and also using BICO parameter P1503 (CI: Torque setpoint) or P1511 (CI: Supplementary torque setpoint). The supplementary torque acts both for the closed-loop torque control as well as for the closed-loop speed control (refer to Fig. 3-108). As a result of this feature, a pre-control torque for the speed control can be implemented using the supplementary torque setpoint. NOTE For safety reasons, it is presently not possible to assign fixed torque setpoints.
Droop Precontrol
Kp T n0
Freq. setpoint
*)
Ti
PI Speed controller
r1538
r1538
r1539 Act. frequency CI: Torque setp. P1503.C (0:0) BI:-> torque ctrl. P1501.C (0:0) CI: Add. trq. setp P1511.C (0:0)
Ti
r1539
Torque setpoint
Kp P1470 P1460
Tn P1472 P1462
*) only active if pre-control is activated (P1496 > 0)
SLVC: VC:
P1452 P1442
Fig. 3-108
Closed-loop speed/torque control
MICROMASTER 440
250
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
The sum of both torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the torque setpoint of the speed control (refer to Section 3.23.2.5). Above the maximum speed (plus 3 %), a speed limiting controller reduces the torque limits in order to prevent the drive accelerating any further. A "real" closed-loop torque control (with automatically set speed) is only possible in the closed-loop controlled range but not in the open-loop controlled range. In the open-loop controlled range, the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed through a ramp-up integrator (integration time ~ P1499 * P0341 * P0342). This is the reason that sensorless closed-loop torque control in the area around standstill (0 speed) is only suitable for applications which require an accelerating torque there and not a load torque (e.g. traversing drives). For closed-loop torque control with sensors, this restriction does not apply. If the closed-loop torque control is active, and a fast stop command (OFF3) is output, then the system automatically changes-over to closed-loop speed control and the drive is braked. If a normal stop command (OFF1) is output, there is no changeover. Instead, the system waits until a higher-level control has brought the drive to a standstill, in order to inhibit the pulses there. This is necessary in order to allow the master and slave drives to be shut down together. For P1300 = 22 or 23, for OFF1, the drive is directly powered-down (as for OFF2).
3.23.2.5
Limiting the torque setpoint

Parameter range: P1520 P1531 P0640, r0067 r1407 bit 08, r1407 bit 09 FP7700, FP7710
All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint which is either entered at the speed controller output for closed-loop speed control or as torque input for closedloop torque control. The minimum is used from the various limits. This minimum is cyclically computed in the drive inverter and displayed in parameters r1538, r1539. r1538 Upper torque limit r1539 Lower torque limit This means that these cyclic values limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output / torque input and indicate the instantaneously maximum possible torque. If the torque setpoint is limited in the drive inverter, then this is displayed using the following diagnostic parameters r1407 bit 08 Upper torque limit active r1407 bit 09 Lower torque limit active
251
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
Torque limiting
The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits are parameterizable for motoring and regenerative operation. P1520 CO: Upper torque limit value P1521 CO: Lower torque limit value P1522 CI: Upper torque limit value P1523 CI: Lower torque limit value P1525 Scaling, lower torque limit value The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters: r1526 CO: Upper torque limit value r1527 CO: Lower torque limit value
Resultant torque limit |M|
Power limitation
Stall limitation Torque limitation
r1526 r1527
1 f
1 f2
P1530 P1531
|f act | Constant torque Constant power f stall Stall power
Fig. 3-109
Torque limits
Power limits
This value specifies the maximum permissible power, whereby different limits can be parameterized for motoring and regenerative operation. P1530 Motor power limit P1531 Regenerative power limit
Stall limiting (locked rotor limiting)

The stall limiting is internally calculated in the drive from the motor data.
MICROMASTER 440
252
Issue 07/05
3 Functions
Current limiting
The current limiting additionally limits the maximum torque which the motor can provide. If the torque limit is increased, more torque is only available if a higher current can flow. It may be necessary to also adapt the current limit. The current limiting is influenced by: P0640 motor overload factor Thermal motor protection (refer to Section 3.21) Thermal drive inverter protection (refer to Section 3.22) After limiting, the instantaneous maximum possible drive inverter current is displayed in parameter r0067 (limited output current).
253
3 Functions
Issue 07/05
MICROMASTER 440
254
Issue 07/05
4 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
An overview of the operating statuses of the inverter with the SDP Notes on troubleshooting with the BOP Information and instructions on alarms and fault messages
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 256 Troubleshooting with the BOP .............................................................................. 257 Fault messages..................................................................................................... 258 Alarm messages ................................................................................................... 258
255
4 Troubleshooting
Issue 07/05
WARNING Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by repair centers authorized by Siemens or by qualified personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual. Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant spare parts list. Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access
4.1
Troubleshooting with the SDP

Table 4-1 explains the meaning of the various states of the LEDs on the SDP.
LEDs for indicating the drive state Off On approx. 0,3 s, flashing approx. 1 s, twinkling
Table 4-1
Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP
Mains not present
Fault inverter temperature Warning current limit - both LEDs twinkling same time Other warnings - both LEDs twinkling alternatively Undervoltage trip / undervoltage warning Drive is not in ready state ROM failure - Both LEDs flashing same time RAM failure - Both LEDs flashing alternatively
Ready to run Inverter fault - other than the ones listed below Inverter running
Fault overcurrent
Fault overvoltage
Fault motor overtemperature
MICROMASTER 440
256
Issue 07/05
4 Troubleshooting
4.2
Troubleshooting with the BOP

Warnings and faults are displayed on the BOP with Axxx and Fxxx respectively. The individual messages are shown in the Parameter list. If the motor fails to start when the ON command has been given: Check that P0010 = 0. Check that a valid ON signal is present. Check that P0700 = 2 (for digital input control) or P0700 = 1 (for BOP control). Check that the setpoint is present (0 to 10V on Terminal 3) or the setpoint has been entered into the correct parameter, depending upon the setpoint source (P1000). See the Parameter List for further details. If the motor fails to run after changing the parameters, set P0010 = 30 then P0970 = 1 and press P to reset the inverter to the factory default parameter values. Now use a switch between terminals 5 and 9 (Figure 3-14). The drive should now run to the defined setpoint by analogue input. NOTICE Motor data must relate to the inverter data power range and voltage.
257
4 Troubleshooting
Issue 07/05
4.3
Fault messages
In the event of a failure, the inverter switches off and a fault code appears on the display. NOTE To reset the fault code, one of three methods listed below can be used: 1. Cycle the power to the drive. button on the BOP or AOP. 2. Press the 3. Via Digital Input 3 (default setting) Fault messages are stored in parameter r0947 under their code number (e.g. F0003 = 3). The associated error value is found in parameter r0949. The value 0 is entered if a fault has no error value. It is furthermore possible to read out the point in time that a fault occurred (r0948) and the number of fault messages (P0952) stored in Parameter r0947. A detailed description of the fault messages is provided in the parameter list.
4.4
Alarm Messages
Alarm messages are stored in parameter r2110 under their code number (e.g. A0503 = 503) and can be read out from there. A detailed description of the alarm messages is provided in the parameter list.
MICROMASTER 440
258
Issue 07/05
5 MICROMASTER 440 specifications
MICROMASTER 440 specifications

Table 5.1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Table 5-5 contains the general technical specifications for the MICROMASTER 440 inverter contains dimensions, the required cooling air flow and tightening torque for power connections contains current values, depending on the pulse frequency contains data for the braking resistors includes various tables of specific technical data for individual MICROMASTER 440 inverters
259
Issue 07/05
Table 5-1 Feature
MICROMASTER 440 Performance Ratings Specification

1 AC 200 to 240 V 10 % 3 AC 200 to 240 V 10 % 3 AC 380 to 480 V 10 % 3 AC 500 to 600 V 10 % CT: CT: VT: CT: VT: CT: VT: 0,12 kW 3,0 kW 0,12 kW 45,0 kW 5,50 kW 45,0 kW 0,37 kW 200 kW 7,50 kW 250 kW 0,75 kW 75,0 kW 1,50 kW 90,0 kW (0,16 hp 4,0 hp) (0,16 hp 60,0 hp) (7,50 hp 60,0 hp) (0,50 hp 268 hp) (10,0 hp 335 hp) (1,00 hp 100 hp) (2,00 hp 120 hp)
Mains Operating Voltage & Power Ranges
Input Frequency Output frequency Power Factor Inverter Efficiency Constant Torque (CT)
47 to 63 Hz 0 Hz to 650 Hz 0.95 Frame Sizes A to F: 96 % to 97 % Frame Sizes FX and GX: 97 % to 98 % Frame Sizes A to F: 1.5 x Nominal output current (i.e. 150 % overload) for 60 s every 300 s and 2 x Nominal output current (i.e 200 % overload) for 3 s every 300 s Frame Sizes FX and GX: 1.36 x Nominal output current (i.e 136 % overload) for 57 s every 300 s and 1.6 x Nominal output current (i.e 160 % overload) for 3 s every 300 s Frame Sizes A to F: 1.1 x Nominal output current (i.e. 110 % overload) for 60 s every 300 s and 1.4 x Nominal output current (i.e 140 % overload) for 3 s every 300 s Frame Sizes FX and GX: 1.1 x Nominal output current (i.e. 110% overload) for 59 s every 300 s and 1.5 x Nominal output current (i.e 150% overload) for 1 s every 300s Less than rated input current Frame Sizes A to E: every 30 s Frame Size F: every 150 s Frame Sizes FX and GX: every 300 s V/f control, output frequency between 0 Hz and 650 Hz: Linear V/f control, Linear V/f control with FCC, Parabolic V/f control, Multi-point V/f control, V/f control for textile applications, V/f control with FCC for textile applications, V/f control with independent voltage setpoint, Vector control, output frequency between 0 Hz and 200 Hz: Sensorless Vector Control, Sensorless Vector Torque Control, Speed control with Encoder Feedback, Torque control with Encoder Feedback Frame Sizes A to C: Frame Sizes A to F: 1/3AC 200 V to 5,5 kW (Standard 16 kHz) other powers and voltages 2 kHz to 16 kHz (2 kHz steps) (Standard 4 kHz) power reduction see Table 5-3 Frame Sizes FX and GX: 2 kHz to 4 kHz (2 kHz steps) (Standard 2 kHz (VT), 4 kHz (CT)) power reduction see Table 5-3 15, programmable 4, programmable 0.01 Hz Digital, 0.01 Hz Serial, 10 bit Analogue (motor potentiometer 0.1 Hz [0.1% (in PID mode) 6, programmable (isolated), switchable active high / active low (PNP/NPN) 2, programmable, both are parameterizable as 7th and 8th digital inputs 0 V to 10 V, 0 mA to 20 mA and 10 V to +10 V (ADC1) 0 V to 10 V and 0 mA to 20 mA (ADC2) 3, programmable 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive), 250 V AC 2 A (inductive) 2, programmable (0 to 20 mA)
Overload Capability
Variable Torque (VT)
Inrush Current Maximum starting frequency
Control Method
Pulse Frequency
Fixed Frequencies Skip Frequencies Setpoint Resolution Digital Inputs Analog Inputs
Relay Outputs Analogue Output
MICROMASTER 440
260
Issue 07/05
Feature
Serial Interface Electromagnetic Compatibility
Specification
RS485, optional RS232 Frame Sizes A to C: optional class A or B filters available according to EN55011 Frame Sizes A to F: inverter with integrated class A filter available Frame Sizes FX and GX: With EMI filter (available as an option) the limiting values of the EN 55011, Class A are fulfilled for conducted emission. (line commutating choke required)
Braking
DC braking, compound braking Dynamic braking Frame Sizes A to F with integrated chopper Frame Sizes FX and GX with external chopper IP20 -10 C to +50 C (14 F to 122 F) (CT) -10 C to +40 C (14 F to 104 F) (VT) Frame Sizes FX and GX: 0 C to +40 C (32 F to 104 F), up to 55 C (131 F) Power reduction see Figure 2.2 Frame Sizes A to F: -40 C to +70 C (-40 F to 158 F) < 95 % RH non-condensing Frame Sizes A to F: Up to 1000 m above sea level without derating Frame Sizes FX and GX: Up to 2000 m above sea level without derating Undervoltage , Overvoltage, Overload, Ground Faults, Short circuit, Stall Prevention, Motor Blocking Protection, Motor Overtemperature, Inverter Overtemperature, Parameter Interlock Frame Sizes A to F: UL, cUL, CE, C-tick Frame Sizes FX and GX: UL (in preparation), cUL (in preparation), CE Conformity with EC Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and filtered versions also Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC
Protection Level Temperature range
Storage Temperature Humidity Operational Altitudes Protection Features
Standards CE Marked
261
Issue 07/05
Table 5-2 Frame Size

A
Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals Dimensions
WxHxD mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm 73 173 149 2.87 6.81 5.87 149 202 172 5.87 7.95 6.77 185 245 195 7.28 9.65 7.68 275 520 245 10.82 20.47 9.65 275 650 245 10.82 25.59 9.65 350 850 Height with filter 1150 13.78 33.46 12.60 Height with filter 45.28 326 1400 356 12.80 55.12 12.83 326 1533 545 12.80 60.35 21.46
Required cooling air flow

l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM l/s CFM 4.8 10.2 24 51 54.9 116.3 2 54.9 2 116.3 2 54.9 2 116.3 150 317.79 225 478.13 440 935
Tightening torque for power connections

Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm 1.1 1.5 2.25 10 (max.) 10 (max.)
B C D E
WxHxD WxHxD WxHxD WxHxD
Nm
50
WxHxD inch
FX GX
WxHxD WxHxD
mm inch mm inch
Nm Nm
25 25
MICROMASTER 440
262
Issue 07/05
Table 5-3
Current reduction depending on pulse frequency Power (CT) [kW]

0.12 to 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Mains voltage
1/3 AC 200 V
Output current in A with a switching frequency of;

4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 19.6 25.2 32.4 47.6 48.0 62.4 78.0 92.4 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.5 4.1 4.6 6.1 7.9 13.3 15.6 22.4 22.8 27.0 43.4 45.0 40.5 49.5 58.0 0.7 1.1 1.2 1.8 2.7 4.4 5.1 8.8 8.1 9.6 16.4 15.6 37.2 46.2 59.4 14 kHz 16.8 21.0 27.0 40.8 40.0 57.2 71.5 84.7 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.9 2.1 3.5 3.9 5.1 6.6 11.4 13.0 19.2 19.0 22.5 37.2 37.5 33.8 41.3 50.8 0.6 0.9 1.0 1.5 2.3 3.9 4.3 7.7 6.8 8.0 14.4 13.0 32.6 42.4 52.0 16 kHz 14.0 16.8 21.6 34.0 32.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.6 3.0 3.1 4.1 5.3 9.5 10.4 16.0 15.2 18.0 31.0 30.0 27.0 33.0 43.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.8 3.3 3.4 6.6 5.4 6.4 12.3 10.4 27.9 38.5 44.6 Factory setting 16 kHz no derating necessary 28.0 26.6 25.2 22.4 42.0 37.8 33.6 29.4 54.0 48.6 43.2 37.8 68.0 64.6 61.2 54.4 80.0 72.0 64.0 56.0 104.0 91.0 78.0 70.2 130.0 113.8 97.5 87.8 154.0 134.8 115.5 104.0 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.6 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.0 3.1 2.9 2.8 2.5 4.1 3.7 3.3 2.9 5.9 5.6 5.3 4.7 7.7 6.9 6.2 5.4 10.2 9.2 8.2 7.1 13.2 11.9 10.6 9.2 19.0 18.1 17.1 15.2 26.0 23.4 20.8 18.2 32.0 30.4 28.8 25.6 38.0 34.2 30.4 26.6 45.0 40.5 36.0 31.5 62.0 58.9 55.8 49.6 75.0 67.5 60.0 52.5 90.0 76.5 63.0 51.8 110.0 93.5 77.0 63.3 145.0 112.4 79.8 68.9 178.0 205.0 250.0 302.0 370.0 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8 2.7 2.2 1.6 1.4 3.9 2.9 2.0 1.6 6.1 4.6 3.1 2.4 9.0 6.8 4.5 3.6 11.0 8.8 6.6 5.5 17.0 12.8 8.5 6.8 22.0 17.6 13.2 11.0 27.0 20.3 13.5 10.8 32.0 24.0 16.0 12.8 41.0 32.8 24.6 20.5 52.0 39.0 26.0 20.8 62.0 52.7 43.4 40.3 77.0 67.4 57.8 52.0 99.0 84.2 69.3 64.4
3 AC 400 V
3 AC 500 V
NOTE When using output reactors, the pulse frequency may not be set higher than 4 kHz.
Table 5-4 Data for braking resistors
263
Issue 07/05
Rated voltage 230 V 400 V 575 V
VDC_max 410 - 420 V 820 - 840 V 1020 V
IDC_max for Frame Size A 2,33 A (180 ) 2,15 A (390 ) B 6,18 A (68 ) 5,25 A (160 ) C 10,77 A (39 ) 15,56 A (27 ) 15 A (56 ) 8,5 A (120 ) 12,4 A (82 ) D 41,0 A (10 ) 30,4 A (27 ) 26,2 A (39 ) E 60,3 A (6,8 ) 54,7 A (15 ) 37,8 A (27 ) F 124,2 A (3,3 ) 100,0 A (8,2 ) 85,0 A (12 )
Table 5-5
MICROMASTER 440 Specifications
In order that the system is in compliance with UL, UL-certified fuses must be used with the appropriate rated current.
Input voltage range (with built in Class A Filter)
Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 6SE6440- 2AB11 -2AA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] 3NA [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
1 AC 200 V 240 V, 10 %
2AB12 -5AA1 0.25 0.33 0.7 3.2 1.7 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2AB13 -7AA1 0.37 0.5 1.0 4.6 2.3 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2AB15 -5AA1 0.55 0.75 1.3 6.2 3.0 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2AB17 -5AA1 0.75 1.0 1.7 8.2 3.9 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2AB21 -1BA1 1.1 1.5 2.4 11.0 5.5 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AB21 -5BA1 1.5 2.0 3.2 14.4 7.4 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AB22 -2BA1 2.2 3.0 4.6 20.2 10.4 32 3812 * 4.0 12 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AB23 -0CA1 3.0 4.0 6.0 35.5 13.6 40 3817 * 6.0 10 10.0 8 1.5 16 10.0 8 5.7 12.5
0.12 0.16 0.4 1.8 0.9 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 240 V without line commutating reactor. If a line commutating reactor is used. the specified values are reduced by between 55 % and 70 %.
UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
MICROMASTER 440
264
Issue 07/05
Input voltage range (Unfiltered)

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 6SE6440[kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] 3NA [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
1 AC 200 V 240 V. 10 %
2UC11 -2AA1 0.12 0.16 0.4 1.8 0.9 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC12 -5AA1 0.25 0.33 0.7 3.2 1.7 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC13 -7AA1 0.37 0.5 1.0 4.6 2.3 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC15 -5AA1 0.55 0.75 1.3 6.2 3.0 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC17 -5AA1 0.75 1.0 1.7 8.2 3.9 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC21 -1BA1 1.1 1.5 2.4 11.0 5.5 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC21 -5BA1 1.5 2.0 3.2 14.4 7.4 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC22 -2BA1 2.2 3.0 4.6 20.2 10.4 32 3812 * 4.0 12 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC23 -0CA1 3.0 4.0 6.0 35.5 13.6 40 3817 * 6.0 10 10.0 8 1.5 16 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
Input voltage range 3 AC 200 V 240 V. 10 % (with built in Class A Filter)

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT-Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 6SE6440- 2AC230CA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
2AC240CA1 4.0 5.0 7.7 19.7 17.5 28.3 22.0 32 3812 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.7 12.5
2AC255CA1 5.5 7.5 9.6 26.5 22.0 34.2 28.0 35 3814 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.7 12.5
3.0 4.0 6.0 15.6 13.6 25 3810 * 2.5 14 10.0 8 1.5 16 10.0 8 5.7 12.5
265
Issue 07/05

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
3 AC 200 V 240 V. 10 %
2UC11 -2AA1 0.12 0.16 0.4 1.1 0.9 10 3NA 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC12 -5AA1 0.25 0.33 0.7 1.9 1.7 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC13 -7AA1 0.37 0.5 1.0 2.7 2.3 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC15 -5AA1 0.55 0.75 1.3 3.6 3.0 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC17 -5AA1 0.75 1.0 1.7 4.7 3.9 16 3805 * 1.5 16 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9 2UC21 -1BA1 1.1 1.5 2.4 6.4 5.5 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC21 -5BA1 1.5 2.0 3.2 8.3 7.4 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC22 -2BA1 2.2 3.0 4.6 11.7 10.4 25 3810 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3 2UC23 -0CA1 3.0 4.0 6.0 15.6 13.6 25 3810 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 1.5 16 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
6SE6440[kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A]
Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power
6SE6440- 2UC24- 2UC25- 2UC27- 2UC31- 2UC31- 2UC31- 2UC32- 2UC33- 2UC33- 2UC340CA1 5CA1 5DA1 1DA1 5DA1 8EA1 2EA1 0FA1 7FA1 5FA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg]
2 2
4.0 5.0 7.7 19.7 17.5 28.3 22.0 32 3812 * 4.0 12
5.5 7.5 9.6 26.5 22.0 34.2 28.0 35 3814 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
7.5 10.0 12.3 34.2 28.0 38.0 42.0 50
11.0 15.0 18.4 38.0 42.0 50.0 54.0 80
15.0 20.0 23.7 50.0 54.0 62.0 68.0 80
18.5 25.0 29.8 62.0 68.0 71.0 80.0 100
22.0 30.0 35.1 71.0 80.0 96.0 104.0 125
30.0 40.0 45.6 96.0 104.0 114.0 130.0 200
37.0 50.0 57.0 114.0 130.0 135.0 154.0 200
45.0 60.0 67.5 135.0 154.0 164.0 178.0 250
CT Input Current 1) CT-Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight
3820 3824 3824 3830 3032 3140 3142 3144 1817-0 1820-0 1820-0 1021-0 1022-0 1225-0 1225-0 1227-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 17.0 37.0 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 50.0 1/0 150.0 300 55.0 121.0 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 55.0 121.0 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 55.0 121.0
[mm ] 10.0 [awg] 8 [mm ] [awg]

2 2
4.0 12
[mm ] 10.0 [awg] 8 [kg] [lbs] 5.5 12.1
MICROMASTER 440
266
Issue 07/05
Input voltage range (with built in Class A Filter)

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT-Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 6SE6440[kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs] 6SE6440[kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 AC 380 V 480 V. 10 %
2AD222BA1 2.2 3.0 4.5 7.5 5.9 16 3805 * 1.5 16 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AD318DA1 18.5 25.0 29.0 37.0 38.0 43.0 45.0 63 3822 1818-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 17.0 37.0 2AD230BA1 3.0 4.0 5.9 10.0 7.7 16 3805 * 1.5 16 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AD322DA1 22.0 30.0 34.3 43.0 45.0 59.0 62.0 80 3824 1820-0 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 17.0 37.0 2AD240BA1 4.0 5.0 7.8 12.8 10.2 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.4 7.5 2AD330EA1 30.0 40.0 47.3 59.0 62.0 72.0 75.0 100 3830 1021-0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 22.0 48.0 2AD255CA1 5.5 7.5 10.1 15.6 13.2 17.3 20.2 20 3807 * 2.5 14 10.0 8 2.5 14 10.0 8 5.7 12.5 2AD337EA1 37.0 50.0 57.2 72.0 75.0 87.0 90.0 125 3832 1022-0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 22.0 48.0 2AD275CA1 7.5 10.0 14.0 22.0 18.4 23.1 29.0 32 3812 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.7 12.5 2AD345FA1 45.0 60.0 68.6 87.0 90.0 104.0 110.0 160 3836 1224-0 35.0 2 150.0 300 50.0 1/0 150.0 300 75.0 165.0 2AD311CA1 11.0 15.0 19.8 23.1 26.0 33.8 39.0 35 3814 * 6.0 10 10.0 8 6.0 10 10.0 8 5.7 12.5 2AD355FA1 55.0 75.0 83.8 104.0 110.0 139.0 145.0 200 3140 1225-0 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 75.0 165.0 2AD315DA1 15.0 20.0 24.4 33.8 32.0 37.0 45.2 50 3820 1817-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 17.0 37.0 2AD375FA1 75.0 100.0 110.5 139.0 145.0 169.0 178.0 250 3144 1227-0 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 75.0 165.0
Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT-Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight
267
Issue 07/05

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight
3 AC 380 V 480 V. 10 %
6SE6440- 2UD13 2UD15 2UD17 2UD21 2UD21 2UD22 2UD23 2UD24 2UD25 2UD27 -7AA1 -5AA1 -5AA1 -1AA1 -5AA1 -2BA1 -0BA1 -0BA1 -5CA1 -5CA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
0.37 0.5 0.9 2.2 1.3 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
0.55 0.75 1.2 2.8 1.7 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
0.75 1.0 1.6 3.7 2.2 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
1.1 1.5 2.3 4.9 3.1 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
1.5 2.0 3.0 5.9 4.1 10 3803 * 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.0 18 2.5 14 1.3 2.9
2.2 3.0 4.5 7.5 5.9 16 3805 * 1.5 16 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3
3.0 4.0 5.9 10.0 7.7 16 3805 * 1.5 16 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3
4.0 5.0 7.8 12.8 10.2 20 3807 * 2.5 14 6.0 10 1.0 18 6.0 10 3.3 7.3
5.5 7.5 10.1 15.6 13.2 17.3 19.0 20 3807 * 2.5 14 10.0 8 2.5 14 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
7.5 10.0 14.0 22.0 19.0 23.1 26.0 32 3812 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 1) Secondary conditions:
6SE6440- 2UD31 2UD31 2UD31 2UD32 2UD33 2UD33 2UD34 2UD35 2UD37 -1CA1 -5DA1 -8DA1 -2DA1 -0EA1 -7EA1 -5FA1 -5FA1 -5FA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
11.0 15.0 19.8 23.1 26.0 33.8 32.0 35 3814 * 6.0 10 10.0 8 6.0 10 10.0 8 5.5 12.1
15.0 20.0 24.4 33.8 32.0 37.0 38.0
18.5 25.0 29.0 37.0 38.0 43.0 45.0
22.0 30.0 34.3 43.0 45.0 59.0 62.0
30.0 40.0 47.3 59.0 62.0 72.0 75.0
37.0 50.0 57.2 72.0 75.0 87.0 90.0
45.0 60.0 68.6 87.0 90.0 104.0 110.0
55.0 75.0 83.8 104.0 110.0 139.0 145.0
75.0 100.0 110.5 139.0 145.0 169.0 178.0
50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 3820 3822 3824 3830 3832 8036 3140 3144 1817-0 1818-0 1820-0 1021-0 1022-0 1224-0 1225-0 1227-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 25.0 3 35.0 2 25.0 3 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 35.0 2 150.0 300 35.0 2 150.0 300 56.0 123.0 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 70.0 2/0 150.0 300 56.0 123.0 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 95.0 3/0 150.0 300 56.0 123.0
Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 400 V without line commutating reactor. If a line commutating reactor is used. the specified values are reduced by between 70 % and 80 %.
MICROMASTER 440
268
Issue 07/05

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT Output Current Recommended Fuse Pipe cable shoe to DIN 46235 6SE6440- 2UD38-8FA1 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NE [mm] [mm ] Input Cable Min. [awg] or [kcmil] [mm ] Input Cable Max. [awg] or [kcmil] [mm ] Output Cable Min. [awg] or [kcmil] [mm ] Output Cable Max. [awg] or [kcmil] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2
3 AC 380 V 480 V. 10 %
2UD41-1FA1 2UD41-3GA1 2UD41-6GA1 2UD42-0GA1 110 150 180 205 205 245 250 315 1230-0 10 1 x 150 or 2 x 50 1 x 300 or 2 x 1/0 1 x 185 or 2 x 120 1 x 350 or 2 x 4/0 1 x 150 or 2 x 50 1 x 300 or 2 x 1/0 1 x 185 or 2 x 120 1 x 350 or 2 x 4/0 110 242 132 200 214.8 245 250 297 302 400 1332-0 10 1 x 185 or 2 x 70 1 x 400 or 2 x 2/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 1 x 185 or 2 x 70 1 x 400 or 2 x 2/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 170 418 160 250 263.2 297 302 354 370 450 1333-0 10 1 x 240 or 2 x 70 1 x 500 or 2 x 2/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 1 x 240 or 2 x 70 1 x 500 or 2 x 2/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 170 418 200 300 339.4 354 370 442 477 560 1435-0 10 2 x 95 2 x 4/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 2 x 95 2 x 4/0 2 x 240 2 x 400 170 418
90 125 145.4 169 178 205 205 250 1227-0 10 1 x 95 or 2 x 35 1 x 4/0 or 2x2 1 x 185 or 2 x 120 1 x 350 or 2 x 4/0 1 x 95 or 2 x 35 1 x 4/0 or 2x2 1 x 185 or 2 x 120 1 x 350 or 2 x 4/0 110 242
Weight
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk 2.33 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 400 V without line commutating reactor.
269
Issue 07/05
Input voltage range

Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight 6SE6440 [kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs] 6SE6440[kW] [hp] [kVA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 3NA 3NE [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [mm ] [awg] [kg] [lbs]
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 AC 500 V 600 V. 10 % (Unfiltered). Part 1

2UE175CA1 0.75 1.0 1.3 2.0 1.4 3.2 2.7 10 3803-6 * 1.0 18 10.0 8 1.0 18 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE318DA1 18.5 25.0 25.7 30.0 27.0 35.0 32.0 50 3820-6 1817-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 6.0 10 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 2UE215CA1 1.5 2.0 2.6 3.7 2.7 4.4 3.9 10 3803-6 * 1.0 18 10.0 8 1.0 18 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE322DA1 22.0 30.0 30.5 35.0 32.0 48.0 41.0 63 3822-6 1818-0 10.0 8 35.0 2 10.0 8 35.0 2 16.0 35.0 2UE222CA1 2.2 3.0 3.7 5.3 3.9 6.9 6.1 10 3803-6 * 1.0 18 10.0 8 1.0 18 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE330EA1 30.0 40.0 39.1 48.0 41.0 58.0 52.0 80 3824-6 1820-0 16.0 6 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 2UE240CA1 4.0 5.0 5.8 8.1 6.1 9.4 9.0 16 3805-6 * 1.5 16 10.0 8 1.0 18 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE337EA1 37.0 50.0 49.5 58.0 52.0 69.0 62.0 80 3824-6 1820-0 25.0 3 35.0 2 16.0 6 35.0 2 20.0 44.0 2UE255CA1 5.5 7.5 8.6 11.1 9.0 12.6 11.0 16 3805-6 * 1.5 16 10.0 8 1.0 18 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE345FA1 45.0 60.0 59.1 69.0 62.0 83.0 77.0 125 3132-6 1022-0 25.0 3 150.0 300 25.0 3 150.0 300 56.0 123.0 2UE275CA1 7.5 10.0 10.5 14.4 11.0 18.1 17.0 25 3810-6 * 2.5 14 10.0 8 2.5 14 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE355FA1 55.0 75.0 73.4 83.0 77.0 113.0 99.0 160 3136-6 1024-0 50.0 1/0 150.0 300 35.0 2 150.0 300 56.0 123.0 2UE311CA1 11.0 15.0 16.2 21.5 17.0 24.9 22.0 32 3812-6 * 4.0 12 10.0 8 4.0 12 10.0 8 5.5 12.1 2UE375FA1 75.0 100.0 94.3 113.0 99.0 138.0 125.0 160 3136-6 1224-0 50.0 1/0 150.0 300 50.0 1/0 150.0 300 56.0 123.0 2UE315DA1 15.0 20.0 21.0 24.9 22.0 30.0 27.0 35 3814-6 1803-0 6.0 10 35.0 2 4.0 12 35.0 2 16.0 35.0
Order No. Output Rating (CT) Output Power CT Input Current 1) CT Output Current VT Input Current 1) VT-Output Current Fuse Recommended for UL specified Input Cable Min. Input Cable Max. Output Cable Min. Output Cable Max. Weight
MICROMASTER 440
270
Issue 07/05
6 Options
Options
An overview of the options available for the MICROMASTER 440 is given in this section. For further information about options. please refer to the catalog or the documentation CD.
6.1
Inverter-independent options
Basic Operator Panel (BOP) Advanced Operator Panel (AOP) DeviceNet module CANopen option module Pulse encoder evaluation module PROFIBUS module PC to inverter connection kit PC to AOP connection kit Operator panel door mounting kit for single inverter control AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control DriveMonitor and "Starter" commissioning tool
6.2
Inverter-dependent options
EMC filter. Class A EMC filter. Class B Additional EMC filter. Class B Low leakage Class B filter Line commutating choke Output choke Gland plate
Frame Sizes A to F

Line commutating choke EMC filter. Class A (power commutating choke required)
271
6 Options
Issue 07/05
MICROMASTER 440
272
Issue 07/05
7 Electro-magnetic compatibility
Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)

EMC information.
7.1
Electro-magnetic compatibility .............................................................................. 274
273
Issue 07/05
7.1
Electro-magnetic compatibility
(EMC) All manufacturers / assemblers of electrical apparatus which performs a complete intrinsic function and is placed on the market as a single unit intended for the end user must comply with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC. There are three routes for the manufacturer/assembler to demonstrate compliance:
7.1.1
Self-certification
This is a manufacturer's declaration that the European standards applicable to the electrical environment for which the apparatus is intended have been met. Only standards that have been officially published in the Official Journal of the European Community can be cited in the manufacturer's declaration.
7.1.2
Technical construction file

A technical construction file can be prepared for the apparatus describing its EMC characteristics. This file must be approved by a Competent Body appointed by the appropriate European government organization. This approach allows the use of standards that are still in preparation.
7.1.3
EC type examination certificate

This approach is only applicable to radio communication transmitting apparatus. All MICROMASTER units are certified for compliance with the EMC directive. when installed in accordance with the recommendations in Section 2.
MICROMASTER 440
274
Issue 07/05
7.1.4
EMC Directive Compliance with Imminent Harmonics Regulations

From 1st January 2001 all electrical apparatus covered by the EMC Directive will have to comply with EN 61000-3-2 "Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input 16 A per phase)". All Siemens variable speed drives of the MICROMASTER. MIDIMASTER. MICROMASTER Eco and COMBIMASTER ranges. which are classified as "Professional Equipment" within the terms of the standard. fulfill the requirements of the standard. The allowed harmonic currents for professional equipment with an input power > 1 kW are not yet defined. Therefore. any electrical apparatus containing the above drives which has an input power > 1 kW will not require connection approval.
Only Frame Sizes A to C

Special considerations for 250 W to 550 W drives with 230 V 1ac mains supplies when used in non-industrial applications: Units in this voltage and power range will be supplied with the following warning: This equipment requires supply authority acceptance for connection to the public supply network. Please refer to EN 61000-3-12 sections 5.3 and 6.4 for further information. Units connected to Industrial Networks1 do not require connection approval (see EN 61800-3. section 6.1.2.2). The harmonic current emissions from these products are described in the table below:
Table 7-1 Rating Permissible harmonic current emissions Typical Harmonic Current (A) Typical Harmonic Current (%) Typical Voltage Distortion
Distribution Transformer Rating 10 kVA 3
rd
100 kVA THD (%) 0.077 0.11 0.15
1 MVA THD (%) 0.008 0.011 0.015
th
th
th
11
th
rd
th
th
th
11 7 7 7
th
THD (%) 0.77 1.1 1.5
250 W 1AC 230 V 2.15 1.44 0.72 0.26 0.19 370 W 1AC 230 V 2.96 2.02 1.05 0.38 0.24 550 W 1AC 230 V 4.04 2.70 1.36 0.48 0.36
83 83 83
56 56 56
28 28 28
10 10 10
NOTE The allowed harmonic currents for professional equipment with an input power > 1 kW are not yet defined. Therefore. any electrical apparatus containing the above drives which has an input power > 1 kW will not require connection approval. Alternatively. the necessity to apply for connection approval can be avoided by fitting the input chokes recommended in the technical catalogues (except 550 W 230 V 1ac units).
1 Industrial Networks are defined as those which do not supply buildings used for domestic purposes.
275
Issue 07/05
7.1.5
Classification of EMC performance

General classes of EMC performance are available as detailed below:
Class 1: General Industrial

Compliance with the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN 68100-3 for use in Second Environment (Industrial) and Restricted Distribution.
Table 7-2 Class 1 - General Industrial Standard
Frame Sizes A - F EN 55011 Frame Sizes FX. GX EN 68100-3 Conducted Emissions Frame Sizes A - F EN 55011 Frame Sizes FX. GX EN 68100-3 Immunity: Electrostatic Discharge Burst Interference Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 1000-4-3
EMC Phenomenon
Emissions: Radiated Emissions
Level
Level A1 Second Environment Level A1 Second Environment 8 kV air discharge 2 kV power cables. 1 kV control 26-1000 MHz. 10 V/m
Class 2: Filtered Industrial

This level of performance will allow the manufacturer/assembler to self-certify their apparatus for compliance with the EMC directive for the industrial environment as regards the EMC performance characteristics of the power drive system. Performance limits are as specified in the Generic Industrial Emissions and Immunity standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2.
Table 7-3 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial Standard
EN 55011 EN 55011 IEC 1000-2-4 (1993) IEC 1000-2-1 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-4 ENV 50 140 ENV 50 204 50 Hz. 30 A/m 8 kV air discharge 2 kV power cables. 2 kV control 80-1000 MHz. 10 V/m. 80% AM. power and signal lines 900 MHz. 10 V/m 50% duty cycle. 200 Hz repetition rate
EMC Phenomenon
Emissions: Immunity: Radiated Emissions Conducted Emissions Supply Voltage Distortion Voltage Fluctuations. Dips. Unbalance. Frequency Variations Magnetic Fields Electrostatic Discharge Burst Interference Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field. amplitude modulated Radio-frequency Electromagnetic Field. pulse modulated
Level
Level A1 Level A1
MICROMASTER 440
276
Issue 07/05
Only Frame Sizes A to F Class 3: Filtered - for residential. commercial and light industry
This level of performance will allow the manufacturer / assembler to self-certify compliance of their apparatus with the EMC directive for the residential. commercial and light industrial environment as regards the EMC performance characteristics of the power drive system. Performance limits are as specified in the generic emission and immunity standards EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-1.
Table 7-4 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential. Commercial and Light Industry Standard
EN 55011 EN 55011 IEC 1000-2-4 (1993) IEC 1000-2-1 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-4 ENV 50 140 ENV 50 204 50 Hz. 30 A/m 8 kV air discharge 2 kV power cables. 2 kV control 80-1000 MHz. 10 V/m. 80% AM. power and signal lines 900 MHz. 10 V/m 50% duty cycle. 200 Hz repetition rate
EMC Phenomenon
Emissions: Immunity: Radiated Emissions* Conducted Emissions Supply Voltage Distortion Voltage Fluctuations. Dips. Unbalance. Frequency Variations Magnetic Fields Electrostatic Discharge Burst Interference Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field. amplitude modulated Radio-frequency Electromagnetic Field. pulse modulated
Level
Level B Level B
These limits are dependent on the inverter being correctly installed inside a metallic switchgear enclosure. The limits will not be met if the inverter is not enclosed.
NOTES To achieve these performance levels. you must not exceed the default Pulse frequency nor use cables longer than 25 m. The MICROMASTER inverters are intended exclusively for professional applications. Therefore. they do not fall within the scope of the harmonics emissions specification EN 61000-3-2. Maximum mains supply voltage when filters are fitted is 460 V.
277
Issue 07/05
Table 7-5
Compliance Table
Frame Sizes A to F
Model
6SE6440-2U***-**A1
Remarks
Unfiltered units. all voltages and powers.
Class 1 General Industrial Class 2 Filtered Industrial

6SE6440-2A***-**A1 6SE6440-2A***-**A1 with 6SE6440-2FA00-6AD1 All units with integral Class A filters Frame size A units 400-480 V with external Class A footprint filters
Class 3 Filtered for residential. commercial and light industry

6SE6440-2U***-**A1 with 6SE6400-2FB0*-***1 Unfiltered units fitted with external Class B footprint filters.
* denotes any value is allowed.
Frame Sizes FX to GX
Model
6SE6440-2U***-**A1
Remarks
Unfiltered units. all voltages and powers.
Class 1 General Industrial Class 2 Filtered Industrial

6SE6440-2U***-**A1 With EMI filter (available as an option) the limiting values of the EN 55011. Class A are fulfilled for conducted emission. (line commutating choke required)
MICROMASTER 440
278
Issue 07/05
Changing the Operator Panel
Appendices
Changing the Operator Panel
Fn
1 0
3
Fn
1 0
P
1 0
Fn
279
Removing Front Covers
Issue 07/05
B
B.1

Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes A
MICROMASTER 440
280
Issue 07/05
B.2
Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes B and C
281
Issue 07/05
B.3
Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes D and E
MICROMASTER 440
282
Issue 07/05
B.4
Removing Front Covers. Frame Size F
19 mm AF
283
Issue 07/05
B.5
Removing Front Covers. Frame Sizes FX and GX
MICROMASTER 440
284
Issue 07/05
Removing the I/O Board
Removing the I/O Board
NOTICE 1. Only a small amount of pressure is required to release the I/O Board catch. 2. Currently. the I/O Board is removed using the same technique regardless of frame size.
285
Removing Y Cap
Issue 07/05
D
D.1
Removing Y Cap
Removing Y Cap. Frame Size A
LK 700
MICROMASTER 440
286
Issue 07/05
Removing Y Cap
D.2

Removing Y Cap. Frame Sizes B and C
287
Removing Y Cap
Issue 07/05
D.3
Removing Y Cap. Frame Sizes D and E
MICROMASTER 440
288
Issue 07/05
Removing Y Cap
D.4
Removing Y Cap. Frame Size F
289
Removing Y Cap
Issue 07/05
D.5
Removing Y Cap. Frame Size FX
MICROMASTER 440
290
Issue 07/05
Removing Y Cap
D.6
Removing Y Cap. Frame Size GX
291
Removing fan
Issue 07/05
E
E.1
Removing fan
Removing fan. Frame Size A
MICROMASTER 440
292
Issue 07/05
Removing fan
E.2
Removing fan. Frame Sizes B and C
293
Removing fan
Issue 07/05
E.3
Removing fan. Frame Size D and E
MICROMASTER 440
294
Issue 07/05
Removing fan
E.4
Removing fan. Frame Size F
295
Removing fan
Issue 07/05
E.5
Removing fan. Frame Size F with filter
MICROMASTER 440
296
Issue 07/05
Removing fan
E.6
Removing fan. Frame Sizes FX and GX

When replacing the fans for sizes FX and GX. refer to the documentation CD ROM. directory - "Spares".
297
Standards
Issue 07/05
Standards
European Low Voltage Directive The MICROMASTER product range complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended by Directive 98/68/EEC. The units are certified for compliance with the following standards: EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor inverters - General requirements and line commutated inverters EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines European Machinery Directive The MICROMASTER inverter series does not fall under the scope of the Machinery Directive. However. the products have been fully evaluated for compliance with the essential Health & Safety requirements of the directive when used in a typical machine application. A Declaration of Incorporation is available on request. European EMC Directive When installed according to the recommendations described in this manual. the MICROMASTER fulfils all requirements of the EMC Directive as defined by the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN61800-3. Underwriters Laboratories UL and CUL LISTED POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT ISO 9001 Siemens plc operates a quality management system. which complies with the requirements of ISO 9001.
MICROMASTER 440
298
Issue 07/05
List of Abbreviations
AC AD ADC ADR AFM AG AIN AOP AOUT ASP ASVM BCC BCD BI BICO BO BOP C CB CCW CDS CI CM CMD CMM CO CO/BO COM COM-Link CT CT CUT CW DA DAC DC DDS DIN DIP DOUT DS Alternating current Analog digital converter Analog digital converter Address Additional frequency modification Automation unit Analog input Advanced operator panel Analog output Analog setpoint Asymmetric space vector modulation Block check character Binary-coded decimal code Binector input Binector / connector Binector output Basic operator panel Commissioning Communication board Counter-clockwise Command data set Connector input Configuration management Commando Combimaster Connector output Connector output / Binector output Common (terminal that is connected to NO or NC) Communication link Commissioning. ready to run Constant torque Commissioning. run. ready to run Clockwise Digital analog converter Digital analog converter Direct current Drive data set Digital input DIP switch Digital output Drive state
299
Issue 07/05
EEC EEPROM ELCB EMC EMF EMI ESB FAQ FB FCC FCL FF FFB FOC FSA GSG GUI ID HIW HSW HTL I/O IBN IGBT IND JOG KIB LCD LED LGE MHB MM4 MOP NC NO OPI PDS PID PKE PKW PLC PLI PPO PTC PWE
European Economic Community Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory Earth leakage circuit breaker Electro-magnetic compatibility Electromotive force Electro-magnetic interference Equivalent circuit Frequently asked questions Function block Flux current control Fast current limit Fixed frequency Free function block Field orientated control Frame size A Getting started guide Global unique identifier Main actual value Main setpoint High-threshold logic Input and output Commissioning Insulated gate bipolar transistor Sub-index Jog Kinetic buffering Liquid crystal display Light emitting diode Length Motor holding brake MICROMASTER 4th. Generation Motor potentiometer Normally closed Normally open Operating instructions Power drive system PID controller (proportional. integral. derivative) Parameter ID Parameter ID value Programmable logic controller Parameter list Parameter process data object Positive temperature coefficient Parameter value
MICROMASTER 440
300
Issue 07/05
PWM PX PZD QC RAM RCCB RCD RFG RFI RPM SCL SDP SLVC STW STX SVM TTL USS VC VT ZSW ZUSW
Pulse-width modulation Power extension Process data Quick commissioning Random-access memory Residual current circuit breaker Residual current device Ramp function generator Radio-frequency interference Revolutions per minute Scaling Status display panel Sensorless vector control Control word Start of text Space vector modulation Transistor-transistor logic Universal serial interface Vector control Variable torque Status word Additional setpoint
301
Index
Issue 07/05
Index
A Adaptation of fan voltage.........................40 Alarm Messages....................................258 Altitude.....................................................24 Ambient operating conditions Altitude .................................................24 Atmospheric Pollution ..........................25 Electromagnetic Radiation...................24 Humidity Range ...................................24 Installation and cooling ........................25 Shock ...................................................24 Temperature ........................................24 Vibration...............................................24 Water hazard .......................................25 Ambient operating conditions ..................24 Atmospheric pollution ..............................25 Automatic restart ...................................208 B BICO technology .....................................55 Block diagram..........................................72 Brake unit ................................................35 C Changing the Operator Panel................279 Changing the Operator Panel................279 Closed-loop motor control .....................232 Closed-loop speed control .................245 Closed-loop torque control.................250 V/f control...........................................232 Vector control.....................................240 Closed-loop speed control.....................245 Closed-loop torque control ....................250 Closed-loop Vdc control ........................212 Kinetic buffering .................................215 Vdc_max controller ............................212 Commissioning ........................................75 50 / 60 Hz setting .................................77 Commissioning the application ............95 Fast commissioning .............................81 Motor / control data ..............................86 Motor data identification.......................89 Reset to the factory setting ................131 Series commissioning........................130 With BOP or AOP ................................81 Communications ................................... 142 Compound braking................................ 202 Connection drawing FX ........................................................ 37 GX ....................................................... 39 Connection of brake unit......................... 35 Connection Terminals ............................. 36 Contact address........................................ 5 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency........................................... 263 D Data sets................................................. 61 DC braking ............................................ 199 Dimensions and Torques........................ 30 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 440 ..... 27 Dynamic braking ................................... 203 E Electrical Installation ............................... 33 Electro-Magnetic Compatibility EC type-examination certificate ........ 274 general ...................................... 273, 274 self-certification ................................. 274 technical construction file .................. 274 Electro-Magnetic Interference................. 42 avoiding EMI........................................ 42 Electromagnetic radiation ....................... 24 Electronic brakes .................................. 199 Compound braking ............................ 202 DC braking ........................................ 199 Dynamic braking................................ 203 EMC ...................................................... 274 EMC Directive Compliance................... 275 EMC performance filtered for residential. commercial and light industry ...................................... 277 filtered industrial class ....................... 276 general industrial class...................... 276 EMI.......................................................... 42
MICROMASTER 440,
302
Issue 07/05
Index
F Fan fuses.................................................40 Fault messages .....................................258 with the BOP fitted .............................257 with the SDP fitted .............................256 Features ..................................................19 Fixed frequencies ..................................164 Flying restart..........................................210 Foreword ...................................................5 Free function blocks ..............................188 Functions .................................................45 H Humidity Range .......................................24 I Inputs / outputs ......................................133 Analog inputs .....................................138 Analog outputs ...................................140 Digital inputs ......................................133 Digital outputs ....................................136 Installation ...............................................21 after a period of storage.................21, 23 Installation and cooling............................25 Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Version FX ....................................28 Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Version GX....................................29 Installation of options...............................32 J Jog.........................................................169 JOG .......................................................169 L Load torque monitoring .........................220 Long cables operation with.......................................34 M Main characteristics.................................19 Mechanical Installation ............................26 MICROMASTER 440 general .................................................18 main characteristics .............................19 performance characteristics.................20 protection characteristics .....................20 specifications .....................................259 Monitoring functions / messages...........218
Motor connections................................... 35 Motor holding brake .............................. 193 Motorized potentiometer ....................... 167 Mounting on standard rail ....................... 31 Mounting onto standard rail .................... 31 O Online Service & Support ......................... 5 Operation with long cables .......................................... 34 Residual Current Device ..................... 34 ungrounded IT supplies....................... 34 Operator panels for MM4........................ 68 AOP ..................................................... 69 BOP ..................................................... 68 SDP ..................................................... 73 Options Inverter-dependent options ............... 271 Inverter-independent options ............ 271 Options.................................................. 271 Options for electronic box ....................... 32 Overload responses.............................. 224 Overview ................................................. 17 P Parameters ............................................. 49 Attributes ............................................. 50 Changing with BOP ............................. 71 Grouping and access .......................... 54 Monitoring parameters ........................ 50 Setting parameters .............................. 49 Performance characteristics ................... 20 Performance Ratings ............................ 260 PID controller ........................................ 170 PID dancer roll control....................... 176 PID fixed setpoint .............................. 175 PID motorized potentiometer ............ 174 Positioning down ramp ......................... 216 Power and motor connections ................ 35 Access................................................. 35 single phase ........................................ 40 Power connections.................................. 35 Power module protection ...................... 229 Protection characteristics........................ 20 Q Qualified personnel ................................... 6
MICROMASTER 440, Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0
303
Index
Issue 07/05
R Removing Y Cap..................................286 Removing fan Frame Size A .....................................292 Frame Size D and E ..........................294 Frame Size F .....................................295 Frame Size F with filter ......................296 Frame Sizes B and C.........................293 Frame Sizes FX and GX....................297 Removing Front Covers ........................280 Removing the I/O Board........................285 Residual Current Device operation with.......................................34 S Safety instructions .....................................7 Screening Methods .................................42 Setpoint channel....................................178 AFM ...................................................178 Ramp-function generator ...................180 Shock.......................................................24 Specifications ........................................264 Standards European EMC Directive ...................298 European Low Voltage Directive .......298 European Machinery Directive...........298 ISO 9001............................................298 Underwriters Laboratories .................298
T Technical Support ..................................... 5 Technological controller........................ 170 Terminal Torques.................................. 262 Thermal motor protection...................... 224 Troubleshooting .................................... 255 U Ungrounded (IT) supplies operation with ...................................... 34 V V/f control.............................................. 232 Vector control........................................ 240 W Warnings, cautions & notes commissioning....................................... 8 definitions .............................................. 6 dismantling & disposal........................... 9 general .................................................. 7 operation ............................................... 9 repair ..................................................... 9 transport & storage................................ 8 Water hazard .......................................... 25 Wiring Guidelines EMI ............................ 43
MICROMASTER 440,
304
Suggestions and/or Corrections
To: Siemens AG Automation & Drives Group SD SM P.O. Box 3269 D-91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany
Email: documentation.sd@siemens.com From Name:
Suggestions
Corrections For Publication/Manual: MICROMASTER 440
User Documentation
Operating Instructions Order Number: 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0 Date of Issue: 07/05
Company/Service Department Address:
Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication. please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.
Telephone: __________ / Telefax: ________ /
MICROMASTER 440, Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0
305
MICROMASTER 440,
306
307
Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives (A&D) Geschftsgebiet Standard Drives (SD) Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany
Siemens AG 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005 Subject to change without prior notice Order No.: 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0 Date: 07/05
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

440 Siemens Inverter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

440 Siemens Inverter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

440 Siemens Inverter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MICROMASTER 440

User Documentation 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Documentation

Operating Instructions User Documentation

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility Appendices

Valid for Inverter Type MICROMASTER 440 0.12 kW - 250 kW

Issue 07/05 Software Version 2.0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Information is also available from: Regional Contacts

Central Technical Support

Online Service & Support

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Definitions and Warnings

Definitions and Warnings

Use for intended purpose only

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Transport & Storage

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Dismantling & Disposal

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 5 6 6.1 6.2 7 7.1

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

This Chapter contains:

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

The MICROMASTER 440

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

This Chapter contains:

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Installation after a Period of Storage

Frame Sizes FX and GX

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Ambient operating conditions

Frame Sizes FX and GX:

90 85 constant torque variable torque 10 [C] 40 45 50 55 [C] Ambient temperature

Ambient operating temperature

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Installation altitude in m above sea level

2000 0 1000 3000 4000 Installation altitude in m above sea level

Shock and Vibration

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Installation and cooling

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 440

MICROMASTER 440 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size FX

Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AW00-0BP0

Installation dimensions for MICROMASTER 440 Frame size GX